Team Talk

TeemTalk
-05W, -07W & -11W

User's Guide
USA
Neoware, Inc.
3200 Horizon Drive
King of Prussia, PA 19406
Tel: +1-610-277-8300
Fax: +1-610-771-4200
Email: info@neoware.com
UK
Neoware UK Ltd
The Stables, Cosgrove
Milton Keynes MK19 7JJ
Tel: +44 (0) 1908 267111
Fax: +44 (0) 1908 267112
Email: teem-info@neoware.com
TeemTalk
Software Support
Telephone: +1.610.277.8300
Web: http://www.neoware.com/support/
Software Version 4.3.1

November 1999
Part number: TT6TM-4.3.1
Neoware UK Ltd,
The Stables, Cosgrove,
Milton Keynes, MK19 7JJ
Tel: +44 (0) 1908 267111
Fax: +44 (0) 1908 267112
TeemTalk 1988-2003 Neoware UK Ltd, All Rights Reserved.
The material in this user's guide is for information purposes only

and is subject to change without notice. Neoware UK Ltd
accepts no responsibility for any errors contained herein.
Trademarks
TeemTalk is a registered trademark of Neoware UK Ltd.
ADDS Viewpoint A2 is a trademark of Applied Digital Data Systems Inc.
D100, D200 and D410 are trademarks of Data General.
DEC, VT52, VT100, VT131, VT220, VT300, VT320, VT340, VT420, ReGIS,
DECnet, LK250 and LK450 are registered trademarks of Digital Equipment
Corporation.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
Hazeltine is a trademark of Esprit Systems, Inc.
HP700/92, HP2392A and HP2622A are trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company.
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
INFOConnect and Unisys are trademarks of Unisys Corporation.
Microsoft and MS-DOS are registered trademarks, and Windows and Excel are
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
NEWT is a trademark of NetManage, Inc.
OSLAN is a registered trademark of ICL.
PathWay is a trademark of the Wollongong Group, Inc.
PC/TCP is a registered trademark of FTP Software, Inc.
PowerStation is a trademark of KEA Systems.
Prime is a registered trademark and PT250 is a trademark of Prime Computer, Inc.
Reflection is a registered trademark of Walker Richer & Quinn, Inc.
Retrographics and VT640 are registered trademarks of Digital Engineering, Inc.
Sun, PC-NFS and NFS are registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Tandem, NonStop and LXN are trademarks of Tandem Computers Inc.
TeleVideo is a registered trademark, and TeleVideo 910, 910+ and 925 are trademarks
of TeleVideo Systems, Inc.
Tektronix is a registered trademark of Tektronix, Inc.
Westward is a registered trademark of Telemetrix, Inc.
WordPerfect is a trademark of WordPerfect Corporation.
WYSE is a registered trademark, and WY-50, WY-50+ and WY-60 are trademarks of
Wyse Technology Inc.
All other product names are trademarks of their respective manufacturers.
1988-2003 Neoware UK Ltd, All Rights Reserved.

Before reproduction of this material in part or in whole, obtain
written consent from Neoware UK Ltd.
Contents
Contents
Introduction ....................................................... 1-1
What Is TeemTalk? ........................................................................ 1-1
About This User's Guide ............................................................... 1-2
Terms & Conventions .................................................................... 1-4
Getting Started.................................................. 2-1

Running TeemTalk......................................................................... 2-1
Quitting TeemTalk ......................................................................... 2-1
Host Communications ................................................................... 2-3
Creating A Communications Session ............................................... 2-3
Making A Serial Host Connection ............................................. 2-3
Making A Network Host Connection ......................................... 2-4
Creating A Connection Template ..................................................... 2-6
Using Environment Variables To Locate Settings Files ........... 2-7
Selecting A Connection Template .................................................... 2-7
Selecting The Terminal Emulation ................................................ 2-9

Tablet & Mouse Configuration ................................................... 2-10
Primary Setup Mode .................................................................... 2-11
The TeemTalk Display ................................................................. 2-12
The Title Bar ................................................................................... 2-12
The Minimize & Maximize Buttons ............................................... 2-13
The Menu Bar .................................................................................. 2-13
Resizing The Window .............................................................. 2-14
The Toolbar ..................................................................................... 2-15
The Scroll Bar ................................................................................. 2-16
The Soft Buttons .............................................................................. 2-16
The Status Bar ................................................................................. 2-19
Contents-1
Contents
The Window Border & Corners ...................................................... 2-20
The Emulation Workspace .............................................................. 2-21
Default Font Sizes .................................................................... 2-21
The Text Cursor ............................................................................... 2-22
The Selection Cursor ....................................................................... 2-22
The Gin Cursor ................................................................................ 2-23
Keyboard Configuration ................................... 3-1

Introduction ................................................................................... 3-1
DEC LK250 Keyboard Drivers ..................................................... 3-8
Keyboard Nationality .................................................................... 3-9
Cursor Keys ................................................................................... 3-9
Remapping The Keyboard ........................................................... 3-10
Programming A Key ........................................................................ 3-12
Entering Control Characters ............................................................ 3-13
Key Combinations & Sequences ..................................................... 3-13
Entering Command Lines ............................................................... 3-14
Changing The Window Focus ......................................................... 3-14
Initiating A Script File .................................................................... 3-14
Action Locally Or Transmit To Host .............................................. 3-14
Default Key Definitions .................................................................. 3-15
Euro Sign ......................................................................................... 3-15
Compose Character Sequences ................................................... 3-16
Mouse Functions .............................................. 4-1

Introduction ................................................................................... 4-1
Redefining The Mouse Buttons ...................................................... 4-1
Selecting & Copying Text .............................................................. 4-3
Disabling The Copy & Paste Functions ....................................... 4-3
2-Button Mouse Emulating 3-Button ............................................ 4-4
Show & Action Hotspots ............................................................... 4-4
Send Keyword ................................................................................ 4-4
Moving The Cursor In Block Mode ............................................... 4-4
The Toolbar ........................................................ 5-1

Using The Toolbar ........................................................................ 5-1
Contents-2
Contents
The Predefined Button Tools ......................................................... 5-2

Redefining The Toolbar................................................................. 5-5
Adding Button Bitmaps ..................................................................... 5-5
Assigning Functions To Buttons ....................................................... 5-6
Removing Button Tools .................................................................... 5-8
Saving The Button Tools .................................................................. 5-8
Hotspots ............................................................ 6-1

Using Hotspots .............................................................................. 6-1
Defining Hotspots .......................................................................... 6-2
Setup Menus ..................................................... 7-1

Selecting & Closing Menus ........................................................... 7-1
Using The Menus ........................................................................... 7-2
Dialog Boxes ................................................................................. 7-3
Default Settings ............................................................................. 7-4
Creating A Connection Template .................................................. 7-5
Using Environment Variables To Locate Settings Files .................. 7-6
Selecting A Connection Template .................................................... 7-7
Menu Descriptions ........................................................................ 7-8

File Menu ........................................................................................... 7-8
Telnet Options ................................................................................. 7-19
Edit Menu ........................................................................................ 7-21
Settings Menu .................................................................................. 7-24
Emulation Settings .......................................................................... 7-25
Serial Settings .................................................................................. 7-27
NCSI Settings .................................................................................. 7-29
Terminal Settings ............................................................................ 7-31
Dialog Settings ................................................................................ 7-35
Gin Settings ..................................................................................... 7-38
Attributes ......................................................................................... 7-40
Keyboard Macros ............................................................................ 7-44
Euro Sign .................................................................................. 7-49
Soft Buttons ..................................................................................... 7-50
Mouse Button Actions ..................................................................... 7-54
Button Tools .................................................................................... 7-56
Help Menu ....................................................................................... 7-58
Contents-3
Contents
File Transfer ....................................................... 8-1

Introduction ................................................................................... 8-1
Protocols Supported ...................................................................... 8-1
Sending Files ................................................................................. 8-3
Receiving Files .............................................................................. 8-5
Cancelling A File Transfer ........................................................... 8-7
Setting Protocol Parameters ......................................................... 8-8
General Parameters ............................................................................ 8-8
Kermit Parameters ........................................................................... 8-10
ASCII Parameters ............................................................................ 8-12
ZMODEM Parameters ..................................................................... 8-14
Kermit Remote Operations .......................................................... 8-17

Local Operation .......................................................................... 8-19
ICL FTF File Transfer ........................................ 9-1

Configuration Requirements ......................................................... 9-1
Sending & Receiving Files ............................................................ 9-2
Transfer Options ........................................................................... 9-4
Remote Host Options ..................................................................... 9-7
FTP File Transfer ............................................. 10-1

The Transfer Procedure .............................................................. 10-1
Menu & Toolbar Options ............................................................ 10-7
The File Menu ................................................................................. 10-7
The Session Menu ......................................................................... 10-10
The Configure Menu ..................................................................... 10-11
The View Menu ............................................................................. 10-12
FTP Initialization File Entries .................................................. 10-13

Use Asynchronous Calls ................................................................ 10-13
Disable Delete Command ............................................................. 10-14
FTP Command Line Options .................................................... 10-14

Progress Bar ................................................................................... 10-14
Disabling The Include Subdirectories Option .............................. 10-14
Time Out ........................................................................................ 10-14
Contents-4
Contents
Initialization Commands ................................ 11-1

Introduction ................................................................................. 11-1
Initialization File ......................................................................... 11-1
Windows 3.1x .................................................................................. 11-1
TeemTalk Private Profile File .................................................. 11-2
Windows 95 & NT .......................................................................... 11-3
Command Line Option Format ................................................... 11-5

Command Summary .................................................................... 11-6
Network Connection .................................................................... 11-8
Telnet Commands ...................................................................... 11-12
Session Configuration ............................................................... 11-13
Display....................................................................................... 11-17
Keyboard & Mouse ................................................................... 11-25
Printing ...................................................................................... 11-27
Creating A Script File ..................................... 12-1

Introduction ................................................................................. 12-1
Initiating A Script File ................................................................ 12-1
Assigning Values To Variables ................................................... 12-3
Script File Examples ................................................................... 12-4
Syntax Conventions ................................................................... 12-12
Script Operators ........................................................................ 12-14
Command Descriptions ............................................................. 12-18
Error Numbers .......................................................................... 12-67
Script Error Trapping Functions .............................................. 12-71
PSET & PGET Parameters & Values ....................................... 12-73
FTU SET & GET Parameters ................................................... 12-86
Dynamic Data Exchange ................................ 13-1

Introduction ................................................................................. 13-1
DDE Terminology ....................................................................... 13-3
Hot & Warm DDE Links ............................................................. 13-3
Using The Edit Menu DDE Functions ........................................ 13-4
Contents-5
Contents
File Transfer ................................................................................ 13-6

Slave Mode .................................................................................. 13-6
Additional DDE Functions ........................................................ 13-18
DDE Link To A Visual Basic Application ................................. 13-24
Troubleshooting ................................................ A-1

Virtual Key Names ............................................ B-1
Standard Virtual Key Names ......................................................... B-1
DEC VT220 Virtual Key Names .................................................... B-2
Tek Virtual Key Names .................................................................. B-2
Key Reference Numbers .................................. C-1

Character Sets .................................................. D-1
Host Command Summary................................ E-1
VT52 Mode .................................................................................... E-1
ANSI VT100 Mode ......................................................................... E-3
ANSI VT220 Mode ......................................................................... E-6
Tek Mode ....................................................................................... E-7
W3220 Mode................................................................................ E-13
TeemTalk Additional Commands ................................................ E-15
Contents-6
Introduction
1
Introduction
This chapter introduces TeemTalk terminal emulation software for
Microsoft Windows and the contents of this User's Guide.
What Is TeemTalk?
TeemTalk for Windows provides precise emulation of a wide range of industry
standard text and graphics terminals on any PC running Microsoft Windows. Multiple
concurrent sessions with different hosts can be conducted over serial RS232 lines or
local area networks (LANs) including DECnet, TCP/IP and Novell.
TeemTalk incorporates an impressive range of additional features formulated to
increase productivity and reduce network loading. These include file transfer, session
capture and replay, dynamic data exchange, a toolbar, hotspots, soft buttons, keyboard
mapping, mouse button definition, connection templates, customising capabilities, a
comprehensive script language, and an optional Application Programming Interface
(API).
1-1
Introduction
About This User's Guide

This User's Guide describes how to use TeemTalk-05W, TeemTalk-07W and
TeemTalk-11W version 4.3.1 for Windows 3.1x, 95 and NT. The information
contained in the following chapters applies equally to TeemTalk-05W, TeemTalk07W and TeemTalk-11W unless indicated otherwise.
The illustrations in this User's Guide that show the TeemTalk window or dialog boxes
are shown in the Windows NT style. The layout for Windows 3.1 and 95 will be very
similar, but if their are significant differences then these will be illustrated accordingly.
If you require information on network protocols and facilities, refer to the TeemTalk
for Windows Networking Guide.
1-2
Chapter 1:
Introduction
Introduces TeemTalk for Windows and the contents of this
User's Guide.
Chapter 2:
Getting Started
Describes how to use TeemTalk and configure it for
compatibility with your hardware and the application.
Chapter 3:
Keyboard Configuration
Describes how to configure TeemTalk for your particular
keyboard, remap key functions and compose special characters.
Chapter 4:
Mouse Functions
Describes the special functions assigned to the mouse buttons
by TeemTalk and how to redefine the buttons.
Chapter 5:
The Toolbar
Describes how to use the toolbar and redefine the buttons.
Chapter 6:
Hotspots
Describes the hotspot facility which enables functions to be
performed by clicking on keywords displayed on the screen.
Chapter 7:
Setup Menus
Describes all the commands and setup dialog boxes that can
be accessed via drop-down menus in the menu bar.
Chapter 8:
File Transfer
Describes how to transfer files using the Kermit, XMODEM,
XMODEM-1K, YMODEM Batch, ZMODEM and ASCII
protocols.
Introduction
Chapter 9:
ICL FTF File Transfer

Describes the ICL FTF file transfer utility supported by
TeemTalk for Windows 3.1x in all terminal emulation modes.
Chapter 10: FTP File Transfer

Describes the FTP interface for file transfer across Windows
Sockets based networks.
Chapter 11: Initialization Commands
Describes commands that can be included in the initialization
file and on the command line to specify the loading
configuration for TeemTalk.
Chapter 12: Creating A Script File
Describes how to create a script file to automate certain
activities such as logging onto remote computers.
Chapter 13: Dynamic Data Exchange
Describes the support of dynamic data exchange (DDE) by
TeemTalk.
Appendix A: Troubleshooting
Provides answers to the most commonly asked questions.
Appendix B: Virtual Key Names
Lists all the virtual key names that enable you to include a
specific key function in a user definition for key macros, soft
buttons, hotspots, etc.
Appendix C: Key Reference Numbers
Lists all the valid key reference numbers used for key
programming in Tek Primary Setup and host commands,
and the script language PSET and PGET commands.
Appendix D: Character Sets
Shows the character set code tables supported by TeemTalk.
Appendix E: Host Command Summary
Lists the host commands that are supported in each terminal
emulation mode.
1-3
Introduction
Terms & Conventions

This User's Guide uses the following terms and conventions.
1. References to TeemTalk in the main text of this User's Guide apply
equally to TeemTalk-05W, TeemTalk-07W and TeemTalk-11W for
Windows 3.1x, 95 and NT unless indicated otherwise.
2. Some sections of this User's Guide assume you are using TeemTalk-07W
or TeemTalk-07W32 when describing various procedures. References to
TT07W in filenames and commands apply to TeemTalk-07W and
TeemTalk-07W32 and, unless indicated otherwise, should be substituted
with TT05W if you are using TeemTalk-05W or TeemTalk-05W32, or
TT11W if you are using TeemTalk-11W or TeemTalk-11W32.
3. An asterisk in a filename or directory name must be substituted with the
number indicating the version of your TeemTalk software unless specified
otherwise. For example, 07 for TeemTalk-07W.
4. When references to keys are shown linked by a + (plus sign), this means
that two or more keys have to be pressed at the same time. For example,
'press Ctrl + M' means press and hold down the Ctrl key, press the M
key then release both keys.
5. 'Click' means position the mouse pointer over an element on the display
then quickly press and release the specified mouse button.
6. 'Double click' means position the mouse pointer over an element on the
display then quickly press and release the specified mouse button twice
in quick succession.
7. 'Drag the pointer' means hold down the left mouse button (or button
assigned with the select function) and slide the mouse so that a selection
box is displayed.
1-4
Getting Started
2
Getting Started
This chapter describes how to run TeemTalk and configure it for
compatibility with your hardware and the application.
Running TeemTalk
To run TeemTalk, display the TeemTalk group window (or the window you specified
when installing the software) and select the icon shown below.
Mouse:
Double-click the TT05W, TT07W or TT11W icon.
Keyboard:
Press Ctrl + Tab until the icon is selected then press Return.
The screen will display a copyright message then the TeemTalk window (shown
overleaf) in which the DEC VT100 emulation is running by default.
Quitting TeemTalk
You can quit an instance of TeemTalk in one of two ways, from the File menu when
the window is displayed, or the Control menu when the window is displayed or
iconized.
Quitting using the File menu:

Mouse:
Click on File in the menu bar to display the File menu, then click the
Exit option.
Keyboard:
Press Alt + F to display the File menu, then press X to exit.
2-1
Getting Started
Quitting using the Control menu:

Mouse:
If the window is displayed, click the box or icon in the top left corner of
the window to display the Control menu, then click the Close option.
If the window is iconized, click the icon to display the Control menu
then click the Close option.
Keyboard:
If the window is displayed, press Alt + Spacebar to display the

Control menu. Press the down arrow key until the highlight rests over
Close then press Return.
If the window is iconized, press Alt + Esc until the icon title is
highlighted then Alt + Spacebar to display the Control menu. Press the
down arrow key until the highlight rests over Close then press Return.
2-2
Getting Started
Host Communications
Creating A Communications Session
When TeemTalk is loaded for the first time, a dialog box will be displayed which
enables you to configure TeemTalk for a serial or network host connection.
Note: If you do not wish to make a host connection at this moment,

just click the Cancel button to close the dialog box. You can
display the New Connection dialog box again later by
clicking File in the menu bar and selecting New
Connection... in the menu.
The Type option specifies whether a serial or network connection is to be made.
Clicking the arrow button will display a drop-down list box containing all the
possible settings.
The Services option specifies the port or network host node which TeemTalk is to
communicate with. This is a text box with an associated drop-down list box. You can
either make a selection from the list box or enter a valid host name or internet address
in the text box.
Note: If you are unfamiliar with using dialog boxes and setup
menus, refer to the beginning of the Setup Menus chapter.
Making A Serial Host Connection

To connect to a serial host, select Serial in the Type list box (default), then select the
Com port required in the Services list box.
Click the Configure... button to display the Serial Settings dialog box (shown
overleaf) and make sure the settings match that of the host.
Click OK to return to the New Connection dialog box then click the Connect button.
2-3
Getting Started
Note: The options in this dialog box are described in the Serial
Settings section in the Setup Menus chapter and only apply
when the connection type is set to Serial.
The status bar along the bottom of the TeemTalk window displays two LEDs. The first
LED indicates whether or not you are connected to the host. It will show red when
not connected and green when you are connected. The second LED indicates
whether or not data is being sent to or from the host. It will show dull green when
there is no activity, red when data is being sent to the host, and bright green when
data is being received from the host.
Making A Network Host Connection

To connect to a network host, select the protocol required in the Type list box:
TeemTalk for Windows 95 and NT:
TCP/IP
NetBIOS
LAT
CTERM
MultiLan
Microsoft SNA
WinSock 2
ISDN
TeemTalk-OSI (option)
TeemTalk for Windows 3.1x:

LAT
FTP PC/TCP
Sun PC/NFS
LAN W/Place
NetManage
PathWay
CTERM
NetBIOS
OSLAN
TELAPI
BAPI
Interrupt 14
INT6B / NASI
LanManager
B and W. TCP
WinSock
Ext. NCSI
Eicon X25
IPX/SPX
NetWare for LAT
TeemTalk-OSI
INFOConnect
ISDN
DOSLANTI
MultiLan
Note: Refer to the Network Connection chapter in the Networking

Guide for a description of each protocol supported and for
any additional configuration required prior to making a
connection.
2-4
Getting Started
The Services list box (in the New Connection dialog box) will display the devices on
the network which use the currently selected protocol. Click the name of the device
required or, in the case of TELAPI, enter an Internet address in the text box (for
example, 128.127.126.2). Note that either the host name or IP address may be entered
for TCP/IP connections. When Eicon X25 is selected, TeemTalk requires you to enter
a valid X25 address as none will be listed.
The Telnet Options button becomes available when a Telnet protocol is selected in
the Type list box. The dialog box displayed when this button is clicked is described
in the Setup Menus chapter.
Clicking the Connect button or the name of the host in the Services list box twice
will cause TeemTalk to attempt to connect to the specified host. If a connection cannot
be made because the network driver is not installed or the host node name is invalid,
an error message will indicate this. Failure to connect for any other reason will result
in a Connection Failed message.
The status bar along the bottom of the TeemTalk window displays two LEDs. The first
LED indicates whether or not you are connected to the host. It will show red when
not connected and green when you are connected. The second LED indicates
whether or not data is being sent to or from the host. It will show dull green when
there is no activity, red when data is being sent to the host, and bright green when
Connection to the network host node will close if you change the settings in the New
Connection dialog box and attempt to connect, if you log out of the host, or the host
closes the connection. When the host closes the connection a message box will be
displayed giving you the option of reconnecting to the network host node, cancelling
the message box and returning to TeemTalk, or exiting TeemTalk.
A warning message will be displayed if you attempt to open a new session while a
session is already open. If you attempt to exit TeemTalk while a network session is still
active, the following message box will be displayed:
Any of these message boxes can be disabled so that the current connection is
automatically closed when the host closes the connection, a new session is opened, or
TeemTalk is exited. Refer to the Initialization Commands chapter for details.
2-5
Getting Started
Creating A Connection Template

You can save the current session configuration as a connection template. To make
TeemTalk automatically attempt to make a host connection using the same settings the
next time it is loaded, click the File option in the menu bar to display the File menu,
then click the Save Session option.
TeemTalk enables you to create multiple connection templates, any one of which can
be used either when TeemTalk is loaded or while it is running. The procedure is as
follows:
1. In the File menu, select the Save Session As... option to display a dialog box.
2. In the Saved Items box, indicate which user preference settings are to be saved by
checking the boxes next to the relevant options.
3. In the Settings File text box, specify the name of the terminal emulation settings
file (and the directory path if different from the default) which is to store settings
only affecting the terminal emulation. The default filename is tt*w.nv where * is
05, 07 or 11, depending on your version of TeemTalk.
4. In the Save As File Name text box, specify the name of the workspace settings file
(and the directory path if different from the default) which is to store the user
preference settings selected by the Saved Items options. The default filename is
tt*w.wsp where * is 05, 07 or 11, depending on your version of TeemTalk.
Note: Splitting the saved settings into two files enables users to
share a common terminal emulation settings file while
allowing each user to have their own workspace settings
file.
2-6
Getting Started
5. In the Description text box, enter a unique description (up to 132 characters long)
which will be used to identify the connection template for future selection. This
description will also appear in the Open Session dialog box.
6. Click the OK button to save the template settings. If you specified the names of
settings files that already exist, a message box will ask you to confirm whether or
not you want to overwrite the existing files with the new settings.
Using Environment Variables To Locate

Settings Files
When TeemTalk for Windows 95 or NT is installed on a terminal server, environment
variables may be used to locate settings files on the client PC. This means that each
client may use a different setup configuration, reading and saving settings locally,
instead of changing files stored on the server which would affect all clients.
Each client must use the same user environment variable name to specify the
directory path for the TeemTalk settings file(s). This name is then specified in the
registry on the terminal server, enclosed by % (percentage) characters.
For example, each client has the user environment variable USERPROFILE pointing
to a local directory (which may be different on each client). To make the directory
specified by USERPROFILE the location of the TeemTalk settings files (.nv and
.wsp), the TeemTalk registry entries on the terminal server would look like this:
NvPath:
WsPath:
"%USERPROFILE%"
"%USERPROFILE%"
Selecting A Connection Template

The Open Session option in the File menu displays a dialog box that enables you to
select a connection template for TeemTalk to use.
The Description list box displays the one-line descriptions of connection templates
that were created using the Save Session As dialog box. The description of the
2-7
Getting Started
connection template currently in use is highlighted. The factory default connection
template is Untitled. Clicking one of the descriptions then the OK button will cause
TeemTalk to use the connection template associated with the chosen description.
You can make TeemTalk automatically use a particular connection template when it is
loaded or reset by clicking the required description, checking the Save As Default
check box, then clicking the OK button. To delete a connection template, select the
description then click the Delete button.
You can also use the following command line option to override the default
connection template used when TeemTalk is loaded:
-se"description"
where description must exactly match the description assigned to a connection
template already saved using the Save Session As dialog box. The description must be
enclosed by double-quotes.
2-8
Getting Started
Selecting The Terminal Emulation

When you load TeemTalk for the first time, the DEC VT100 emulation will be
running by default. All the terminal emulations supported by TeemTalk can be
accessed from the Emulation Settings dialog box. This is displayed by selecting
Settings in the menu bar then Emulation... The emulations available are listed in the
Emulation list box.
To change the current emulation mode, select the emulation required then click the
OK button. The emulation setting may be saved so that TeemTalk will automatically
run it when it is loaded or reset by selecting the Save Session option in the File
menu.
A brief description of the emulation options follows.
VT52 and VT100 modes enable you to run applications written for the DEC VT52
and VT100 terminals, respectively.
Tek mode provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Tektronix 4100
or 4200 series terminals. Emulation of the Tektronix 4014 terminal can be achieved
by selecting this option and setting the Dialog Area Enabled option in the Dialog
Settings dialog box to 0.
Edit mode provides compatibility with software designed to drive the DEC VT100
terminal. In this mode the following features are set to pre-determined conditions:
A. The dialog area is enabled and visible.
B. The dialog area buffer and scrolling region are set to 24 lines.
C. Cursor origin mode is set to Absolute (refer to the description of
the Cursor Origin option in the Dialog Settings dialog box).
2-9
Getting Started
D. Insert/Replace character mode is set to Replace.
E. Keys PF1 through PF4 generate ANSI cursor movement sequences.
F. All programmed strings for keys are temporarily disabled.
VT220-7 and VT220-8 modes are emulations of the DEC VT220 terminal, the
difference is in their treatment of 8-bit control codes. When VT220-7 is selected, all
8-bit codes are converted to their 7-bit equivalents, whereas VT220-8 leaves 8-bit
codes unchanged. If you are using VT200 applications, select VT220-7.
W3220 mode provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Westward
3220 terminal.
Tablet & Mouse Configuration

If you are using a tablet or mouse, you must specify the type of device and the port to
which it is connected before TeemTalk will recognize it. To do this, display the Gin
Settings dialog box by selecting Gin... in the Settings menu.
The Tablet Type option specifies the graphics input (GIN) device that is attached to
your system and the data format that TeemTalk uses to communicate with it.
TeemTalk incorporates several tablet drivers. The following list includes the baud rate,
data bits, stop bits and parity settings that are automatically set for the tablet type
selected.
2-10
MM1201
Summagraphics MM1201
(9600, 8, 1, Odd)
MM1812
(9600, 8, 1, Odd)
Getting Started
Bitpad-Plus
Summagraphics Bitpad-Plus
(9600, 7, 1, Even)
Calcomp
Calcomp (16 button)

(9600, 7, 1, Even)
Mouse
Mouse
(Uses the communication settings specified
in the Serial Settings dialog box)
Click the button next to the Tablet Type required then specify the Serial Port
Device to which the Gin device is attached. You can save these settings so that
TeemTalk will automatically assert them when loaded or reset by clicking the Save
Session option in the File menu.
Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for a complete description of the Gin Settings
dialog box.
Primary Setup Mode

TeemTalk can be configured for your hardware and application either by using setup
dialog boxes displayed from the Settings menu in the menu bar, or by specifying
settings in the Tektronix form of setup called Primary Setup.
The easiest way to configure TeemTalk is by using the various dialog boxes displayed
from the Settings menu. Some of these are discussed in this chapter and all of them
are described in detail in the Setup Menus chapter.
Primary Setup mode is used by those who have experience in programming. No
menus are displayed and the only indication that you are in Primary Setup mode is an
asterisk (*) character displayed in the first column. Primary Setup mode is toggled on
and off either by clicking the Setup button at the bottom of the TeemTalk window or
by pressing the keys Alt + Z together. Configuration is achieved by entering a
command at the asterisk prompt followed by one or more values. The valid
commands that can be entered are listed in the Command Summary appendix
alongside the equivalent host commands.
You can display the current setup configuration by entering STAT (short for status)
at the asterisk prompt and hitting Return. Changes made to the Primary Setup
configuration are automatically reflected in the Settings dialog boxes and vice versa.
2-11
Getting Started
The TeemTalk Display

The TeemTalk window incorporates several special facilities in addition to the
standard facilities supported by Microsoft Windows. The illustration below shows the
various elements of the window which are described in the following sections.
Control Menu Icon
Menu Bar
Title Bar
Toolbar
Text Cursor
Emulation Workspace
Minimize Button
Scroll Box
Scroll Bar
Selection Cursor
Soft Buttons
Window Border
Shutdown Button
Minimize Button
Scroll Arrow
Status Bar
Window Corner
The Title Bar

The title bar displays the name of your version of TeemTalk software (title), the name
of the session currently running (subtitle) in brackets, and an indication of the current
host connection (host name, IP address or COM port). You may specify a different title
or subtitle on the command line for loading TeemTalk or in the initialization file. Refer
to the Initialization Commands chapter for details.
2-12
Getting Started
The Minimize & Maximize Buttons

These buttons are used by the mouse to shrink the window to an icon or increase the
window to the maximum size possible while still displaying the number of lines and
columns specified in setup, the default setting being 80 columns by 32 lines. (The
equivalent keyboard functions are enabled via the Control menu).
Note: The number of lines and columns displayed is affected by
the setting of the Resize Font, Rows and Columns options
in the Dialog Settings dialog box. Refer to the Setup Menus
chapter for details.
Once the window has been iconized, it can be restored to its original state by doubleclicking the icon.
When the window has been maximized, the maximize button changes to show an up
and down arrow. Clicking the button now will restore the window to its previous size.
Note: You can cause the window to be minimized, maximized or
fill the display area when TeemTalk is first started by using
an initialization file command or command line option.
Refer to the Initialization Commands chapter for details.
The Menu Bar

The menu bar provides access to a series of commands and dialog boxes which
enable you to perform various functions and configure TeemTalk for compatibility
with the application.
One of four menus may be displayed at any one time. These are headed File, Edit,
Settings and Help.
To display a menu:
Mouse:
Click the title of the menu required.
Keyboard:
Hold down the Alt key and press the key bearing the underlined
character in the menu title. For example, pressing Alt + F will display
the File menu.
When the menu bar is not displayed you can still display the menus by pressing the
following keys:
Alt + F for the File menu
Alt + E for the Edit menu
Alt + S for the Settings menu
Alt + H for the Help menu
2-13
Getting Started
When you display a menu and move the cursor over the menu options, the status bar at
the bottom of the window will change to display a brief description of the option at the
cursor position.
Refer to the Setup Menus chapter for a complete discussion on selecting and using the
options in these menus.
To close a menu:
Mouse:
Click anywhere outside the menu.
Keyboard:
Press the Alt key.
Resizing The Window

The menu bar also includes two commands for resizing the window.
The << and >> commands enable you to decrease or increase the size of the window
to the size of the next smallest or largest font supported while retaining the same
number of lines and columns.
2-14
Getting Started
To resize the window:
Mouse:
Click the pointer over the << or >> commands.
Keyboard:
Hold down the Alt key and press the key bearing the underscored
character in one of the menu titles, for example, Alt + F. Press the right
arrow key to move the highlight over << or >> and press Return.
The Toolbar
The toolbar and associated floating button palette provide a quick way of actioning
commands or displaying setup dialog boxes by just clicking a button. TeemTalk
displays a toolbar below the menu bar by default.
The toolbar contains a series of buttons with graphical representations of their

functions. These buttons are predefined with functions found in the setup menus.
You can redefine all the buttons and add or remove buttons from the toolbar via the
Button Tools dialog box. Refer to the chapter entitled The Toolbar for a complete
description.
The toolbar can be pulled away from the menu bar and floated on the display by
positioning the mouse pointer anywhere in the toolbar except on a button, holding
down the left mouse button then dragging the pointer down until the toolbar outline
changes shape. Releasing the mouse button will display the floating button palette.
The floating button palette contains the same buttons as the toolbar. You can move
and resize the palette in the same way as any other window. To convert the floating
button palette back into the toolbar, click the control menu box at the top left corner
of the palette window and select Attach. If you click the shutdown button on the
floating button palette, you can restore display of the tool buttons by selecting the
Button Tools option in the Settings menu and checking the Visible option in the
dialog box.
2-15
Getting Started
The Scroll Bar

The scroll bar enables you to display alphanumeric data that is above or below the
view of the dialog area. The dialog area is a 'window' into the dialog buffer which is
used to store alphanumeric data. The dialog area may fill the entire emulation
workspace or consist of only two lines. The scroll bar represents the entire buffer.
You can specify the size of the dialog buffer and the number of lines actually
displayed (the dialog area) in the Dialog Settings dialog box, as described in the
Setup Menus chapter. The total number of dialog buffer lines may not exceed 100.
A mouse is required to enable scrolling as keyboard commands for moving through
the buffer are not supported. The scroll bar includes up and down scroll arrow
buttons and a scroll box to enable you to scroll through the buffer.
The scroll arrow buttons allow you to scroll up or down a line at a time or several
lines at a time when clicked, depending on the setting of the Burst Scroll option in
the Dialog Settings dialog box. Holding down the mouse button while a scroll arrow
is selected will enable continuous scrolling.
The scroll box allows you to quickly move through the buffer when it is dragged up
or down the scroll bar by placing the pointer over it, holding down the left mouse
button then moving the mouse.
Clicking the pointer in the scroll bar above or below the scroll box will cause the
previous or next block of data to be displayed. (A block is equal to the number of
lines and columns displayed in the window.)
The Soft Buttons
A set of soft buttons is displayed at the bottom of the TeemTalk window by default.
These can be programmed so that they perform various functions when clicked.
There are four soft button levels. Level 1 is displayed by default. Each level consists
of twelve programmable buttons, providing a combined total of 48 programmable
buttons. You can display all four levels at the same time if required. All levels are
accessible even if not all are displayed, levels stored off-screen can be 'scrolled' into
view by clicking the Level button. You can specify how many levels of soft buttons
are actually displayed by using an initialization file command or command line
option.
The soft buttons are programmed using the Soft Buttons dialog box, which is
displayed by selecting Settings in the menu bar then Soft Buttons... Refer to the
Setup Menus chapter for information on programming the buttons.
2-16
Getting Started
The soft buttons can be removed from the display by unchecking the Visible check
box in the Soft Buttons dialog box.
The soft buttons can be detached as a separate window by deselecting the Attached
option in the Soft Buttons dialog box.
If you close the Soft Buttons window, you can display it again by selecting the Soft
Buttons option in the Settings menu, checking the Visible check box, then clicking
OK.
The current position and size of the Soft Buttons window can be saved so that it is
displayed the same way the next time TeemTalk is loaded. To do this, select the Save
Session As option in the File menu, make sure the Soft Buttons option is checked in
the resulting dialog box, then click OK.
By default, the buttons displayed on level 1 are predefined with functions supported
by the Tektronix 4105 or 4207 and 4111 terminals as follows:
GErase
This will erase the contents of the graphics area and redraw all visible
segments.
DErase
This will erase all the text contained in the dialog area buffer.
DVisib
This will toggle the visibility of the dialog area on and off.
Cancel
This will halt terminal activity by resetting bypass, Gin, marker, prompt,
snoopy, and vector modes.
Setup
This will toggle the Tektronix form of setup called Primary Setup on and
off. An asterisk prompt indicates that you are in Primary Setup mode.
(Primary Setup can also be toggled on and off by pressing the keys Alt +
Z together.) Refer to the Primary Setup Mode section earlier in this
chapter for more details.
Zoom
(Not supported by TeemTalk-05W.) This will activate the zoom/pan

feature. When the pointer is moved into the emulation workspace it will
change into the zoom cursor, which appears as a two-way arrow. Click
the left mouse button to select that location as the centre of the area to be
zoomed. Moving the cursor now will cause two rectangles to appear. The
larger one represents what will be the edge of the window. Clicking the
middle mouse button (or holding down the Shift key while clicking either
the left or right button on a two-button mouse) will cause the contents of
this rectangle to be redrawn to fill the window.
2-17
Getting Started
If the left mouse button is clicked when the zoom cursor is displayed but
no zoom rectangles, an overview of the entire 4096x4096 display
memory will be displayed.
The zoom function can be exited without changing the window contents
by clicking the right mouse button.
After an increase or decrease in zoom, the view of the image prior to the
last redraw can be restored by clicking the RstView button. Up to four
views can be stored; clicking RstView repeatedly will recall these views
in sequence.
ViewUp
(Not supported by TeemTalk-05W.) This will save the state of the current
view then make the next higher numbered view the current view.
ViewDn
(Not supported by TeemTalk-05W.) This will save the state of the current
view then make the next lower numbered view the current view.
RstView
(Not supported by TeemTalk-05W.) This will display the last four views
when clicked repeatedly.
DefView
(Not supported by TeemTalk-05W.) This will display the default view.
Patterns
This will display all the predefined fill patterns that can be selected by the
Tek Primary Setup FILLPATTERN command to fill polygons.
There are three types of fill pattern: solid, textured and dithered. A fill
pattern is selected by specifying the number of the pattern required after
the FILLPATTERN command in Primary Setup. Fill patterns are
numbered as follows:
Solid fill patterns are numbered 0 to -15, left to right.
Textured fill patterns are numbered 1 to 16, left to right.
2-18
Getting Started
Dithered fill patterns are numbered 50 to 174, left to right, top to bottom,
as follows:
Row 1:
Row 2:
Row 3:
Row 4:
Print
50 to 65
66 to 81
82 to 97
98 to 114
Row 5:
Row 6:
Row 7:
Row 8:
115 to 129
130 to 145
146 to 161
162 to 174
This will display a dialog box which enables you to produce a hardcopy
of data displayed on the screen in a specified format. Refer to the
description of the File menu Print Screen option in the Setup Menus
chapter for more information.
The Status Bar

The status bar consists of several fields and buttons which show the status of various
operations and enable you to switch between modes.
F1
B1
Field 1:
B2
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
This displays two LEDs. The first LED indicates whether or not you are
connected to the host. It will show red when not connected and green
when you are connected. The second LED indicates whether or not data
is being sent to or from the host. It will show dull green when there is no
activity, red when data is being sent to the host, and bright green when
Button 1: This enables you to switch between Local and Online mode. The label
indicates the mode TeemTalk will switch to if the button is clicked.
Button 2: This enables you to Pause or Resume scrolling data in the window. The
label indicates the action that will be taken if the button is clicked.
Field 2:
Indicates the current terminal emulation.
Field 3:
This displays the line,column location of the text cursor.
Field 4:
This indicates whether Overstrike Mode or Insert Mode is currently

selected. In Overstrike Mode (default), new characters will replace
already existing characters at the cursor position. When Insert Mode is
selected, new characters will be inserted at the cursor position without
deleting existing characters, which will move to the right.
2-19
Getting Started
Field 5:
Indicates the status of the printer as follows:

None signifies that the printer is not turned on or not connected, or not
installed in Microsoft Windows.
Not Ready signifies that the printer is not ready to receive data for
printing.
Ready signifies that the printer is ready to receive data for printing.
Auto signifies that the emulation is in Auto Print mode in which the
current cursor line is sent to the printer when a command for the cursor to
move to the next line is issued.
Controller signifies that the emulation is in Printer Controller mode in
which the host has direct control over the printer. Print screen commands
issued from the keyboard or mouse will be ignored.
Field 6:
This is not used in the current version of TeemTalk.
The Window Border & Corners

The window border and corners can be selected and moved to resize the window. The
effect of resizing the window is determined by the Resize Font and Rows options in
the Dialog Settings dialog box.
When Resize Font is selected (default), resizing the window will cause TeemTalk to
search a list of known fonts and select the one that allows the same number of rows
and columns (80 or 132) to fill the new window size. The window will be adjusted to
display all the rows and columns.
When Resize Font is not selected, resizing the window will have no effect on the
font size and the number of displayed rows will be increased or decreased according
to the new window size.
To resize the window using the border:

Mouse:
Place the pointer over the border at the edge or corner to be moved,
hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse.
Keyboard:
Press Alt + Spacebar to display the Control menu then S to select

Size. Press the relevant arrow key once to move the four-headed arrow
to the border edge and, if a corner, press the arrow key in the direction
of the corner. Pressing the arrow keys will now resize the window until
Return is pressed to display the new window size.
2-20
Getting Started
The Emulation Workspace

The emulation workspace is the area which emulates the display of the terminal
specified in setup (the VT100 terminal by default) and where work is carried out with
an application. Refer to the section entitled Selecting The Terminal Emulation earlier
in this chapter for details on how to change the emulation.
In Tek mode, the emulation workspace effectively consists of two layers, one lying
on top of the other. One layer, referred to as the dialog area, is used to display
alphanumeric text. The other layer is used to display graphics and graphics text, and
is called the graphics area.
The dialog area is a 'window' into the dialog buffer which is used to store
alphanumeric text. The dialog area may fill the entire emulation workspace or consist
of only two lines. You can specify the size of the dialog buffer and the number of
lines actually displayed in the Dialog Settings dialog box, as described in the Setup
Menus chapter.
When the dialog area is disabled within Tek mode, all incoming alphanumeric text is
directed to the graphics area, providing an emulation of the Tektronix 4014 terminal
which does not support a separate dialog area. In any other terminal emulation mode,
the dialog area is always enabled (there is no separate graphics layer) and all
alphanumeric text is directed to it.
You can toggle the visibility of the dialog area on and off by clicking the DVisib soft
button in the Soft Buttons window. The contents of the dialog buffer can be erased
by clicking the DErase button, and you can erase the contents of the graphics area
and cause all visible segments to be redrawn by clicking the GErase button.
Default Font Sizes

The size of the font used by default when TeemTalk is loaded usually depends on
the type of display adaptor in your system. However, you can specify a different
default font size using the initialization file command defaultFontIndex=# or
-df# command line option, where # is the index of the font as defined in the following
table.
The size of the font for a particular index will vary depending on the terminal
emulation. Specifying an index outside the range for the emulation will cause the
highest valid index number for that emulation to be used. The font sizes are defined
in pixels.
2-21
Getting Started
Font
Index
DEC VT Modes
80 Cols 132 Cols
Tek 4205 & 4207

80 Cols 132 Cols
24 x 12
24 x 7
23 x 12
23 x 7
16 x 8
19 x 10
19 x 6
21 x 11
21 x 6
14 x 7
18 x 9
18 x 5
19 x 10
19 x 6
12 x 6
17 x 8
17 x 4
17 x 9
17 x 5
10 x 5
16 x 8
16 x 4
15 x 8
15 x 4
8x4
15 x 8
15 x 4
13 x 7
13 x 4
7x3
14 x 7
14 x 4
12 x 7
12 x 4
7x3
13 x 6
13 x 3
12 x 6
12 x 3
7x3
12 x 5
12 x 3
11 x 6
11 x 3
7x3
10 x 5
10 x 3
9x5
9x3
7x3
10
8x5
8x3
7x4
7x2
7x3
11
7x5
7x3
6x3
6x2
7x3
Tek 4111
128 Cols
The Text Cursor

The text cursor is a flashing block or underline character which indicates the position
at which the next displayable character received from the host or entered by the
keyboard will be displayed. The type of text cursor displayed can be selected by the
Cursor Style option in the Dialog Settings dialog box. Refer to the Setup Menus
The Selection Cursor

The selection cursor is a vertical bar which is displayed when the mouse pointer is
moved into the emulation workspace. It is controlled by the mouse and is used to
select text for editing.
To select text, position the selection cursor next to the first character position to be
selected, hold down the left mouse button then move the cursor to the end of the
selection. Moving the cursor above or below the boundary of the emulation
workspace while the left mouse button is held down will cause the display to scroll
enabling selection of text stored in display memory. The text will be highlighted
when selected. You can use the copy and paste commands in the Edit menu on
selected text as described in the Setup Menus chapter.
When the selection cursor is moved outside the emulation workspace, or when
menus or dialog boxes are displayed, it changes back to the mouse pointer, enabling
you to select window elements.
2-22
Getting Started
The Gin Cursor

The Gin (Graphics Input) cursor is a small crosshair cursor which is used to make
selections and specify locations in the graphics area. The Gin cursor can be steered
using the mouse or cursor keys. You can change the size of the cursor by using the
following initialization file command or command line option, where size is a
numeric value in the range 1 to 4096 (i.e. world coordinates):
Initialization file command:
Command line option:
CrosshairSize=size
-xsize
2-23
Getting Started
Notes
2-24
3
This chapter describes how to configure TeemTalk for your particular
keyboard, remap key functions and compose special characters.
Introduction
TeemTalk maps the keyboard to be as near as possible to the terminal being emulated.
The illustrations on the following pages show how the 83/84 key AT, 101/102 key
Enhanced AT and DEC LK250/450 keyboard layouts are mapped in DEC VT100,
VT220, Edit and Tek modes. The mapping for other layouts can be displayed by
using the Show Map option in the Keyboard Macros dialog box as described later
in the Remapping The Keyboard section. You can remap the keyboard as required
and functions that may not be represented on the keyboard can be assigned to
specific keys.
TeemTalk for Windows 3.1x supports the Digital LK250 and LK450 keyboards, and
the KEA Systems PowerStation keyboard. If a driver for one of these is loaded,
TeemTalk scans the SYSTEM.INI file to see if the string "LK250", "LK450" or
"PowerStation" is present and maps the keyboard accordingly.
TeemTalk for Windows 95 or NT will interrogate the system registry to see if LK450
drivers are installed. If LK450 drivers are installed then the keyboard will be mapped
accordingly.
Note: When running TeemTalk with the LK250 or LK450
keyboard, it is imperative that the LED on the keyboard
labelled SPECIAL or DEC is not on. This can be toggled on
and off by pressing the keys Alt + F17 together.
3-1
3-2
F9
F8
Shift
F7
Shift
F9
Shift
F11
Shift
F13
Shift
HELP
With Shift
Shift
F6
Shift
F8
Shift
F10
Shift
F12
Shift
F14
F17
With Ctrl
F20
F18 F19
DO
All unmarked keys function as indicated

by the legends on the keycaps.
The cursor keys will function without Alt

when Num Lock is OFF.
Normal
F14 HELP
F12 F13
F10 F11
F7
F6
Shift
F17
Shift
F19
Ctrl + Shift
Shift
DO
Shift
F18
Shift
F20
1
Normal
ENTER
PF1 PF2 PF3 PF4
HOME
With Alt
NEXT
PREV
NUM SCRL
BREAK
LOCK LOCK
INSERT
SELECT
FIND
ESC
AT Keyboard Layout
DEC VT220 Mode Mapping
F2
F4
F1
F3
All unmarked keys function as indicated by the legends on the keycaps.
F1
F2
F3
F4
AT Keyboard Layout
Tek, VT100 & Edit Mode Mapping
3-3
3-4
F7
Alt key usage:

Normal key usage:
F6
PF1
NUMLK
EURO
F8
F10 F11 F12 F13
F14 HELP DO
F17
(SCRL) (SCRL) (SCRL)
(SCRL)
PREVNEXT
IOUS
SELECT
F20
INSERT REHERE MOVE
F19
SCRLK BREAK
FIND
F18
4
1
ENTER
PF2 PF3 PF4
PF1
HOME
NUMLK

Bracketed functions are generated when used in conjunction with Control.
F9
Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout
Alt key usage:

Normal key usage:
BREAK
EURO
F2
F3
F4
BACK LINE
SPACE FEED
ESC
SCRLK BREAK
Control in Tek Mode
In conjunction with
PREVNEXT
IOUS
SELECT
F2
F1
INSERT REHERE MOVE
FIND
Except Tek Mode
Keys marked have no function.

F1
F3
ENTER
F4
Enhanced AT Keyboard Layout

3-5
3-6
Alt key usage:

Normal key usage:
F19
HOLD
EURO
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11 F12 F13 F14
PREVNEXT
IOUS
SELECT
(SCRL) (SCRL) (SCRL)
(SCRL)
INSERT REHERE MOVE
DO
FIND
HELP
F19
HOLD
F20
ENTER
PF1 PF2 PF3 PF4
F17 F18

Bracketed functions are generated when used in conjunction with Control.
F6
DEC LK250/450 Keyboard Layout
Alt key usage:

Normal key usage:
BREAK
EURO
F2
F3
F4
BACK
SPACE
ESC
4
1
0
PREVNEXT
IOUS
SELECT
Cursor keys used in

conjunction with
Control in Tek Mode
F1
F2
INSERT REHERE MOVE
FIND
Except Tek Mode
LINE
FEED
F3
ENTER
F4
SCRLK BREAK
Keys marked have no function.

F1
DEC LK250/450 Keyboard Layout

3-7
DEC LK250 Keyboard Drivers

TeemTalk for Windows 3.1x does not supply its own drivers for the LK250 keyboard,
it relies on using the drivers supplied by Digital on the Pathworks PCSA distribution
disk. If Pathworks has not been installed with the LK250 option then the following
modifications should be made to the SYSTEM.INI file in the WINDOWS directory
on the basis that the drivers and associated files are available:
SYSTEM.INI:[boot]
keyboard.drv=lk250.drv
[keyboard]
subtype=50
type=k
oemansi.bin=xlat437.bin
keyboard.dll=decuk250.dll
[boot.description]
keyboard.typ=Digital LK250 Keyboard
keyboard=vkd250.386
The following files must exist in the WINDOWS\SYSTEM directory :lk250.drv
xlat437.bin
vkd250.386
decus250.dll
decuk250.dll
decda250.dll
decfi250.dll
decfr250.dll
decge250.dll
decit250.dll
decno250.dll
decsf250.dll
decsg250.dll
decsp250.dll
decsw250.dll
decce250.dll
deccf250.dll
(US LK250 Keyboard Driver)

(UK LK250 Keyboard Driver)
(Danish LK250 Keyboard Driver)
(Finnish LK250 Keyboard Driver)
(French LK250 Keyboard Driver)
(German LK250 Keyboard Driver)
(Italian LK250 Keyboard Driver)
(Norwegian LK250 Keyboard Driver)
(Swiss/French LK250 Keyboard Driver)
(Swiss/German LK250 Keyboard Driver)
(Spanish LK250 Keyboard Driver)
(Swedish LK250 Keyboard Driver)
(Canadian LK250 Keyboard Driver)
(Canadian/French LK250 Keyboard Driver)
If the keyboard drivers and files have not been installed correctly the following will
be observed:
1) Displaying the Keyboard Macros dialog box will result in an incorrect keyboard
display window. The dialog box should show the LK250 layout and be titled
Digital LK250 Keyboard.
3-8
2) Although the alphanumeric area of the keyboard may appear to function, the
keypad, function keys and centre key cluster will not operate correctly, giving
unpredictable results.
Note: The LK250 keyboard for the PC is designed to operate in 2
modes. Mode 1 emulates an AT keyboard, and Mode 2
emulates a VT320 keyboard. The keyboard is switched
between Mode 1 and Mode 2 using Alt + F17. Mode 1 is
indicated as being active by the SPECIAL LED on the top
right hand side of the keyboard. TeemTalk requires the
keyboard to be in Mode 2 (VT320). Mode 1 disables certain
function keys.
Keyboard Nationality
When running TeemTalk for Windows 3.1x, the factory default keyboard nationality
is determined by the Keyboard Layout setting in the International dialog box within
the Microsoft Windows Control Panel. You can specify a different nationality while
TeemTalk is running and save it so that it is reassserted each time TeemTalk is loaded
or reset. When you exit TeemTalk the keyboard nationality will revert back to that
specified in the International dialog box.
When running TeemTalk for Windows 95 or NT, the factory default keyboard
nationality is determined by the system locale setting. You can specify a different
nationality while TeemTalk is running and save it so that it is reassserted each time
TeemTalk is loaded or reset. When you exit TeemTalk the keyboard nationality will
revert back to that specified in the locale.
To change the current nationality, display the Terminal Settings dialog box by
selecting Settings in the menu bar then Terminal...
The Keyboard Language option enables you to specify the nationality of the
keyboard being used. It is important that this is correct otherwise the characters
displayed may not match the key legends. Select the nationality required in this list
box then click the OK button to action the change and close the dialog box. If you
want to save the setting, display the File menu and select Save Session.
Cursor Keys
The cursor (arrow) keys on some keyboards will only function when the Alt key is
held down. This applies to IBM PC or any keyboards which do not have a separate
cluster of four cursor keys.
3-9
To enable the cursor keys permanently so that the Alt key does not have to be held
down when you want to use them, press the keys Alt + Num Lock together so that
the Num Lock indicator is not lit. To make the cursor keys generate their numeric
values again, press Alt + Num Lock. The Num Lock indicator should be lit.
Remapping The Keyboard

The Keyboard Macros dialog box enables you to redefine the function of most of the
keys on your keyboard and shows the mapping of the keyboard for the current
terminal emulation mode. This dialog box is displayed by selecting Keyboard
Macros in the Settings menu.
Two keyboard layouts are displayed. The upper layout corresponds to the keyboard
you are using, which will be one of the following: 101 key, 102 key, 84 key, Digital's
LK250 or LK450, or KEA Systems' PowerStation, depending on the type specified
within Microsoft Windows Setup for your PC.
Note: When an LK250, LK450 or PowerStation keyboard driver is
loaded, the SYSTEM.INI file is scanned by TeemTalk to see
if the string "LK250", "LK450" or "PowerStation" is
present and maps the keyboard accordingly.
The lower layout represents the keyboard associated with the terminal currently
being emulated, as specified in the Emulation Settings dialog box.
3-10
You can show how TeemTalk has mapped your keyboard within the current terminal
emulation mode by setting the Keyboard Action option (between the two layouts) to
Show Map, then moving the pointer over a key in the lower layout and holding down
the left mouse button. The key or combination of keys which emulate the function of
the key you are currently pressing will be displayed in the upper layout as if pressed
in.
Note: Control key functions are not shown.
TeemTalk provides two quick and easy ways of changing the default keyboard
mapping to suit your requirements.
Remapping Normal Key Functions

The following method is suitable when the function to be remapped does not require
a combination of keys to be pressed to action it. For example, you can make the F1
key on your keyboard emulate the Insert key of the terminal keyboard being
emulated, but you cannot specify that pressing the keys Alt + F1 together will
perform the Insert key function.
First, set the Keyboard Action option to Map Key, click the key in the lower layout
showing the legend of the function required, then click the key in the upper layout
which you want to assign that function to.
Note that you will now have two keys which emulate the same function, the default
mapping and the mapping you have just specified. You can either leave them this
way or assign a new function to the key which was mapped by default.
Remapping Key Combination Functions

The following method is suitable for both normal key functions and key combination
functions. For example, you can map the Insert key function to the F1 key on your
keyboard, and you can make the keys Alt + F1 emulate the Help key when pressed
together.
First, click the key in the upper layout (representing your keyboard) to which you
want to assign a function. The Define Key Macro dialog box will be displayed, as
shown below. This example shows how the F1 key is mapped by default.
3-11
The Predefined Macros option at the bottom of this dialog box enables you to select
from a list of standard functions associated with the current terminal emulation.
Clicking the arrow button will display a list box in which the names of valid key
functions (called virtual key names) are shown.
Note: The Virtual Key Names appendix lists all the functions and
associated virtual key names for each terminal emulation.
Before making a selection from this list box, click the pointer in the text box next to
the key combination that will be required to perform the function, that is, Normal
(key pressed on its own), Shift (key shifted) etc. For example, to assign the Help key
function to the key combination Alt + F1, click the pointer in the text box next to Alt,
display the Predefined Macros list box and scroll through the selection until
VT_HELP is displayed, click the pointer on it then click the Apply button. The
current function of the Alt + F1 key combination will be replaced with the Help
function, indicated in the text box by <VT_HELP>. If you want the mapping of this
key to be saved when you perform a Save Session, make sure the Non-Volatile box
is checked. Click the OK button to activate the change and close the dialog box. Note
that you will now have two keys which emulate the same function, the default
When you have finished remapping the keyboard, click the OK button in the
Keyboard Macros dialog box to close it and cause TeemTalk to assert the changes.
You can save the new keyboard mapping so that TeemTalk will reassert it each time it
is loaded or reset by displaying the Save Session As dialog box, selecting the
Keyboard Macros option, then clicking the OK button.
Programming A Key
Most of the keys on the keyboard may be programmed with up to five definitions
each. Keys that cannot be redefined include Shift, Caps Lock, Alt, Alt Gr and Print
Screen. Both Ctrl keys can be redefined.
To program a key, click the key in the upper layout (which represents your
keyboard). The Define Key Macro dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box
shows the current definitions of all the following combinations for the selected key:
Key
Shift + Key
Control + Key
Control + Shift + Key
Alt + Key
Each key combination may contain a string of up to 127 characters. The combined
total of all the characters that may be programmed into keys is determined by the 127
character limit per definition and the amount of memory available in your PC.
3-12
All keyboard macros can be saved so that TeemTalk will reassert them each time it is
loaded or reset by displaying the Save Session As dialog box from the File menu,
selecting the Keyboard Macros option, then clicking the OK button.
Entering Control Characters

You can enter a control character either as the control key character equivalent or the
decimal value of the ASCII character. For example, the control character for the
Return key function, CR (carriage return), can be entered by typing the characters ^
and M, representing the keys Ctrl + M which, when pressed together would
generate the CR code.
Decimal values are entered as three-digit numbers immediately preceded by an
underscore character. Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero. For
example, the decimal value of CR is 13, so this would be entered as _013.
Refer to the ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and
decimal references.
Key Combinations & Sequences

You can program a key to perform the function of a combination or sequence of
keys. For example, you can cause the F1 key to perform the same function as
pressing the keys Alt + F4 together, or pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4.
Keys are identified by their virtual key names as listed in the Virtual Key Names
appendix. The virtual key name has to be enclosed by the < and > characters in the
key definition text box. You may omit the VK_ and VT_ (etc.) parts of the virtual
key name.
To program a key so that it performs the same function as pressing two or more other
keys together, type the < character followed by the virtual key names linked together
with + (plus sign) characters and ending with the > character.
For example, to program the F1 key so that when it is pressed it performs the same
function as pressing the keys Alt + F4 together, enter the following characters in the
relevant text box:
<ALT+F4>
To program a key so that it performs the same function as pressing a sequence of
keys one after the other, enter each virtual key name in the order required, enclosing
each virtual key name with the < and > characters. Each enclosed virtual key name
must immediately follow the previous enclosed virtual key name with no spaces.
3-13
For example, to program the A key so that when it is pressed it performs the same
function as pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 enter the following characters in the
relevant text box:
<F2><F3><F4>
Entering Command Lines

You can enter a command line in a key definition by enclosing it within the ( and )
characters. This enables you to launch an application by just pressing a key. For
example, to program the F1 key so that another instance of TeemTalk-07W is run
when the key is pressed, you would enter the following in the relevant text box:
(C:\TEEMTALK\TT07W.EXE)
Changing The Window Focus

You can program a key to change the currently selected window or icon (that is the
window or icon to which keyboard and mouse commands will be directed) by
entering its window class name as a string enclosed by the < and > characters. For
example, to program the F4 key so that the TeemTalk-07W window is selected when
the key is pressed, you would enter the following in the relevant text box:
<"tt07w">
(tt07w is the window class name for TeemTalk-07W.)
Initiating A Script File

You can program a key to run a script file when pressed by enclosing the name of the
file and any arguments within the <' (left angle bracket and single quote) and '>
(single quote and right angle bracket) characters.
For example, to program a key so that it will run the script file myscript.scr and
assign the values value1 and value2 to two variables, you would enter the following:
<'myscript.scr(value1,value2)'>
Refer to the chapter entitled Creating A Script File for more information on initiating
script files.
Action Locally Or Transmit To Host

A key definition may be actioned locally or transmitted to the host when the key is
pressed. This is determined by the setting of the Local check box next to the
definition. When the check box is unchecked the definition will be transmitted to the
host.
3-14
Default Key Definitions

The default definition of a specific key may be reasserted by clicking the Default
button in the Define Key Macro dialog box for that key. The default definition of the
entire keyboard may be reasserted by clicking the Default button in the Keyboard
Macros dialog box.
Euro Sign
TeemTalk enables you to generate the euro sign from the keyboard by pressing the
keys Alt + 4 by default. TeemTalk also provides a cross-mapping mechanism to allow
any unused character symbols or string to be cross-mapped to display the euro. This
means, for instance, that a host application needing to display the euro could be
adjusted to send an unused character or character string, which TeemTalk would
convert to the euro symbol. Keyboard mapping is also configurable to allow the input
to the application to be similarly cross-mapped. The cross-mapping configuration is
specified in the Euro Currency Symbol dialog box which is displayed by clicking
the Euro Sign button in the Define Key Macro dialog box.
TeemTalk also provides the ability to print the euro symbol on printers that are euro
compliant, or to send a set of sequences that approximate to that symbol on non-euro
compliant printers. Similarly, data can be copied to or pasted from other Microsoft
Windows desktop applications that are also euro compliant.
3-15
Compose Character Sequences

Compose character sequences can be used to generate codes for characters not shown
on your keyboard when you are in VT220 mode.
The characters that can be composed depend on the setting of the Multinational
option in the Emulation Settings dialog box. When this option is not selected only
characters found in the character set that corresponds to the selected keyboard
nationality can be composed. When Multinational is selected (default), characters
from all national keyboard layouts may be composed.
If a character is a diacritical symbol (e.g. or ) and this symbol does not appear on
the keyboard, an equivalent character can be used in some cases. The diacritical
symbols and the possible substitutes are shown below. There are no equivalents for
the circumflex accent and tilde mark.
Diacritical Mark
Equivalent Character
'
"
'
*
Acute accent
Umlaut
Grave accent
Ring mark
Apostrophe
Double quote
Single quote
Asterisk or degree sign
To compose a character, first find the character you wish to compose in the left hand
column of the following tables. The two characters shown in the right hand column
are the keys that are used to create it. Several alternatives may be given for
generating the same character. A compose sequence is initiated by pressing the keys
Alt + I together, followed by the key bearing the first character then the key bearing
the second character.
Note: The compose character sequence can also be initiated by
pressing a key defined with the COMPOSE virtual key
name.
A compose character sequence may be abandoned before completion by pressing the
Delete key. Pressing Alt + I (or the key defined with the COMPOSE virtual key
name) again before completing a compose character sequence will cause it to be
abandoned and a second sequence to be started. An invalid compose character
sequence will cause the bell to sound.
The following tables use several conventions:
The keys bearing the characters used to compose a special character may be
pressed in any order unless (in order) is specified.
If a nationality is specified with the character description, for example
(Dutch), then the character can only be composed when the Multinational
option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is not selected.
3-16
COMPOSE CHARACTER SEQUENCES
"
quotation mark
space
feminine ordinal
indicator
a-
number sign
++
double open
angle brackets
<<
'
apostrophe
' space
degree sign
a a or A A
(Multinational)
or A A or a A
(National)
plus or
minus sign
+-
superscript 2
2^
superscript 3
3^
micro sign
/u
commercial at
aa
0^
(Multinational)
(National)
opening bracket
((
back slash
//
closing bracket
))
paragraph sign
p!
circumflex
accent
^ space
centred period
.^
grave accent
` space
superscript 1
1^
opening brace
(-
masculine
ordinal indicator
o_
vertical line
/^
double closed
angle brackets
>>
closing brace
)-
/4
fraction
one quarter
14
/2
fraction
one half
12
34
/<
or /
(in order)
tilde
~ space
inverted !
!!
/4
fraction threequarters (Dutch)
cent sign
fl
Florin (Dutch)
fl
pound sign
ij
i j sign (Dutch)
ij
yen sign
inverted ?
??
section
sign
A grave
A`
A acute
A'
A circumflex
A^
A tilde
A~
(National & Multinational)

National includes s O or S o
currency sign
copyright sign
xo
x0
co
c0
or
or
or
or
XO
X0
CO
C0
or
P!
or
O_
(in order)
c / or C /
c | or C |
l - or L l = or L =
y - or Y y = or Y =
s o or S O or s !
S ! or s 0 or S 0
A_
space
or
or
(in order)
(in order)
(in order)
(in order)
3-17
COMPOSE CHARACTER SEQUENCES (continued)
3-18
U circumflex
U^
A*
or A
(degree sign)
U umlaut
U"
or
A E diphthong
AE
Y umlaut
(DEC Multinat.)
Y"
or
C cedilla
/u
German small
sharp s
ss
E grave
E`
a grave
a`
E acute
E'
a acute
a'
E circumflex
E^
a circumflex
a^
E umlaut
E"
a tilde
a~
I grave
I`
a umlaut
a"
or
I acute
I'
a ring
a*
I circumflex
I^
a e diphthong
ae
I umlaut
I"
c cedilla
c,
N tilde
N~
e grave
e`
O grave
O`
e acute
e'
O acute
O'
e circumflex
e^
O circumflex
O^
e umlaut
e"
O tilde
O~
i grave
i`
O umlaut
O"
i acute
i'
O E diphthong
(DEC Multinat.)
OE
(in order)
i circumflex
i^
O slash
O/
i umlaut
i"
U grave
U`
n tilde
n~
U acute
U'
o grave
o`
A umlaut
A"
A ring
or
(in order)
or /
(in order)
or
or
or
or a
(degree sign)
(in order)
(comma)
or
or
COMPOSE CHARACTER SEQUENCES (continued)
o acute
o'
u grave
u`
o circumflex
o^
u acute
u'
o tilde
o~
u circumflex
u^
o umlaut
o"
u umlaut
u"
or
o e diphthong
(DEC Multinat.)
oe
y umlaut
y"
or
o slash
o/
or
(in order)
3-19
Notes
3-20
Mouse Functions
4
Mouse Functions
This chapter describes the special functions assigned to the mouse
buttons by TeemTalk and how to redefine the buttons.
Introduction
TeemTalk assigns a variety of special functions to the mouse buttons. Each button can
be used to action up to six functions when pressed in conjunction with modifier keys.
The following table lists the functions assigned to each button and key combination
by default.
Normal
Shift
Control
Control + Shift
Alt
Double Click
Left Button
Right Button
Select
Edit Copy
Extend Selection
Edit Paste
Action Hotspot
Show Hotspots
Select Rectangle
Unassigned
Send CR
Send Keyword
Select Word
Unassigned
Redefining The Mouse Buttons

TeemTalk enables you to redefine the functions assigned to the mouse buttons via the
Mouse Button Actions dialog box (shown overleaf), which is displayed from the
Settings menu. This enables you to specify the function of the left and right mouse
buttons when they are pressed on their own or in conjunction with modifier keys.
You can assign up to six functions to each button. Clicking one of the arrow buttons
will display a drop-down list box which lists all the standard functions that can be
assigned.
4-1
Mouse Functions
The following functions can be assigned:

Unassigned
Select
Extend Selection
Edit Copy
Edit Paste
Show Hotspots
Action Hotspot
Move Cursor
Send CR
Send Keyword
Middle Button
Select Rectangle
Select Word
Select and Copy
Cursor Select
You can also enter a definition of your own in the text box associated with each
button and key combination. Definitions are entered in the same way as for keyboard
macros and soft buttons, as described in the Setup Menus chapter.
The setting of the Highlight When Actioned option determines whether or not a
visual indication is given that a function has been actioned when a hotspot is clicked.
The Edit... button becomes active when you select the Show Hotspots or Action
Hotspot setting. Clicking the Edit... button will open a text editor window in which
the contents of the current hotspot definition file will be displayed. This enables you
to make changes without having to leave TeemTalk. The text editor used by default is
notepad.exe. You can specify a different text editor by modifying the Editor= line in
the TeemTalk private profile file.
4-2
Mouse Functions
Selecting & Copying Text

You can use the mouse buttons to copy and paste text. The region of the display that
will be selected for copying depends on whether you use the Select, Select
Rectangle, Select and Copy or Select Word function.
The Select function will select all text from the start position to the finish position,
working left to right across the entire width of the display, whereas the Select
Rectangle function will only select text contained within the rectangular area defined
by the start position (top left corner) and the finish position (bottom right corner). The
Select and Copy function is the same as Select but will also copy the selected data to
the Clipboard automatically. The Select Word function will cause the word under the
mouse cursor to be selected.
The default method for selecting and copying text is as follows. Place the cursor at
the start of the text to be copied, hold down the Left mouse button then drag the
cursor across to the end of the required text and release the mouse button. To extend
the selection, hold down the Shift key and click the Left mouse button at the new
position. Click the Right mouse button to copy the selected text to the clipboard.
Text copied to the clipboard may be pasted at the current cursor position by holding
down the Shift key and clicking the Right mouse button.
Disabling The Copy & Paste Functions

In some cases it may be necessary to disable the copy and paste function of the
mouse buttons to prevent accidental editing. This can be achieved using the
following initialization file commands or command line options:
Initialization file:
mouseEdit=off or mouseEdit=disabled
Command line:
-me0
-me1
-me2
allows highlighting but no copy or paste

all editing functions enabled
all editing functions disabled
When the mouse editing functions are disabled, use the Edit menu options or the
following keyboard commands to copy and paste instead:
Copy: Shift + Delete (i.e. Numeric keypad . key)
Paste: Shift + Insert (i.e. Numeric keypad 0 key)
4-3
Mouse Functions
2-Button Mouse Emulating 3-Button

You can assign the function of the middle button found on a three button mouse to
any button or button and key combination. The Mouse Button Actions dialog box
includes a Middle Button setting for this purpose.
Show & Action Hotspots

TeemTalk incorporates a user-definable hotspot facility which enables you to invoke a
function by clicking the mouse cursor over a keyword displayed on the screen. For
example, an application may display information relating to keys you can press to
perform a particular function. Instead of pressing the key on the keyboard, you could
invoke the function by moving the mouse cursor over the displayed key name,
holding down the Control key and clicking the Left mouse button (assuming default
mouse configuration).
Hotspots are supported in ALL terminal emulation modes. TeemTalk provides a set of
default hotspot keywords for each mode. These relate to key functions specific to the
emulation. For example, in VT200 mode you can click on the word Help displayed
on the screen and TeemTalk will execute the function associated with the Help key.
Refer to the Hotspots chapter for details.
You can identify hotspots that are currently present in display memory by holding
down the Control key and the Right mouse button. All colour attributes will be
temporarily removed from the display and the hotspots will be highlighted with a red
background. Releasing the keys will return the display to its original state.
Send Keyword
The Send Keyword function enables you to click on any delimited word displayed
on the screen and it will be sent to the host, as long as the word is not already defined
as a hotspot. Keyword delimiters are the same as for hotspots by default, that is:
space, NULL, / , : = ( ) [ and ].
Moving The Cursor In Block Mode

When TeemTalk is in any of the local block modes you can use the Move Cursor
function to quickly move the text cursor. Move the mouse cursor to the required
position then click the mouse button (with modifier key(s) held down) assigned with
the Move Cursor function. The text cursor will then jump to that position.
4-4
The Toolbar
5
The Toolbar
This chapter describes how to use and redefine the toolbar and associated floating button palette.
Using The Toolbar

The toolbar and associated floating button palette provide a quick way of actioning
commands or displaying setup dialog boxes by just clicking a button. TeemTalk
displays a toolbar below the menu bar by default.
The toolbar contains a series of buttons with graphical representations of their

functions. These buttons are predefined with functions found in the setup menus and
are described in the next section. You can redefine all the buttons and add or remove
buttons from the toolbar via the Button Tools dialog box which is described later.
The toolbar can be pulled away from the menu bar and floated on the display by
positioning the mouse pointer anywhere in the toolbar except on a button, holding
down the left mouse button then dragging the pointer down until the toolbar outline
changes shape. Releasing the mouse button will display the floating button palette.
5-1
The Toolbar
The floating button palette contains the same buttons as the toolbar. You can move and
resize the palette in the same way as any other window. To convert the floating button
palette back into the toolbar, click the control menu box at the top left corner of the
palette window and select Attach. If you click the shutdown button on the floating
button palette, you can restore display of the tool buttons by selecting the Button
Tools option in the Settings menu and checking the Visible option in the dialog box.
The Predefined Button Tools

The toolbar displayed by default contains a series of buttons defined with functions
found in the setup menus. These functions are listed below and described in the Setup
Menus chapter.
Displays the New Connection dialog box for making a serial
or network host connection.
Displays the Open Session dialog box. This enables you to
load a particular setup configuration.
Displays the Save Session As dialog box. This enables you to
specify how the current session configuration is to be saved.
Copies selected data to the clipboard.
Pastes clipboard data at the current cursor position.

Displays the Initiate File Transfer dialog box for transferring
files using the Kermit, XMODEM, XMODEM-1K, YMODEM
Batch, ZMODEM, ASCII, or ICL FTF protocols. Refer to the
File Transfer chapter for details.
Displays the Run Script dialog box for specifying the name of
a script file to execute.
Displays the Printer Setup dialog box. This enables you to
select any printer that is configured in Microsoft Windows.
5-2
The Toolbar
Displays the Print Screen dialog box for producing a hardcopy
of screen data in a particular format.
Displays the Attributes dialog box. This enables you to specify
the colours used in the dialog area and how text with attributes is
displayed.
Displays the Keyboard Macros dialog box. This shows the
mapping of your keyboard and enables you to redefine the
function of keys.
Displays the Soft Buttons dialog box for redefining the buttons
at the bottom of the TeemTalk window.
Displays the Mouse Button Actions dialog box for assigning
up to six functions to each mouse button.
Increases the size of the window to the next font size up while
retaining the same number of rows and columns.
Decreases the size of the window to the next font size down
while retaining the same number of rows and columns.
Displays the Button Tools dialog box for redefining the
toolbar.
Closes the current session.
Resets the current terminal emulation mode.
Erases the contents of the window and the scroll buffer.
Displays the Help contents dialog box.
Erases the contents of the graphics area and redraws all visible
segments.
5-3
The Toolbar
Erases the contents of the dialog area and buffer.
Toggles dialog area visibility on and off.
Activates the zoom/pan feature (except TeemTalk-05W and

TeemTalk-05W32).
5-4
The Toolbar
Redefining The Toolbar

Clicking the last button in the default toolbar, or selecting Button Tools from the
Settings menu will display a dialog box which enables you to redefine the toolbar.
Up to 64 button tools can be defined, all of which can be displayed in the floating
button palette but only one row of buttons can be displayed in the toolbar. The
maximum number of buttons that can be displayed in the toolbar depends on the
display resolution and the size of the window.
A button tool is defined in two stages. The first stage is to specify the button bitmap
for display in the toolbar and the second stage is to assign a function to it.
Adding Button Bitmaps

Clicking the arrow button in the Current Tool box will display a list box showing all
the button bitmapss in the order displayed in the toolbar, together with their
functions. The Current Tool will be highlighted in this list. When you add a new
button to the toolbar it is positioned to the left of the button currently selected in this
list. Select the current tool then close the list box by clicking the arrow button again.
To add a new button, select a button bitmap from the Buttons list box then click the
Insert at Current button. Note that the function of this new button will be the same
as that of the previously selected button tool until you redefine it. You can insert a
space before the current button tool as it is displayed in the toolbar by selecting
[Space] in the Commands list box then clicking the Insert at Current button.
5-5
The Toolbar
You are not restricted to the set of predefined button bitmaps displayed in the Buttons
list box. You can add your own customised buttons to the bottom of the list by
clicking the Add Custom... button. This will display the Load Custom Bitmap
dialog box which enables you to select a bitmap file from which a button will be
automatically generated.
Specify the name of the bitmap file to use then click the OK button. The dialog box
will close and you will see the new button bitmap highlighted at the bottom of the
Buttons list box.
If you want to delete a custom button from the Buttons list box, select the button
bitmap then click the Delete Custom button. DO NOT click the Delete Current
button as this will remove the currently selected button tool from the toolbar. Note
that you cannot delete the predefined button bitmaps displayed by default.
Assigning Functions To Buttons

You can assign a variety of functions to the buttons. You can either enter a definition
of your own or you can select a menu command from the Commands list box.
The buttons displayed in the toolbar by default are defined with some of the functions
listed in the setup menus. These enable you to quickly action a command or display a
setup dialog box without having to display the menu first. The Commands list box
displays all the menu items that can be assigned to the buttons.
To assign a function to a button, make sure that the button bitmap required is
displayed in the Current Tool box, enter the new definition in the associated text
box or select a menu command from the Commands list box, then click the Change
Current button to action the change. The toolbar will not be updated until you click
the OK button to close the dialog box.

You can enter a control character in a button tool definition either as the control key
character equivalent or the decimal value of the ASCII character. For example, the
control character for the Return key function, CR (carriage return), can be entered
by typing the characters ^ and M, representing the keys Ctrl + M which, when
pressed together would generate the CR code.
example, the decimal value of CR is 13, so this would be entered as _013. Refer to
the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal references.
5-6
The Toolbar

You can program a button tool to perform the function of a combination or sequence
of keys. For example, you can cause a button to perform the same function as
appendix. The name has to be enclosed by the < and > characters in the Current
Tool text box. You may omit the VK_, VT_ parts (etc.) of the virtual key name.
To program a button so that it performs the same function as pressing two or more
other keys together, type the < character followed by the virtual key names linked
together with + characters and ending with the > character. For example, to program
a button so that when it is clicked it performs the same function as pressing the keys
Alt + F4 together, enter the following characters in the Current Tool text box:
<ALT+F4>
To program a button so that it performs the same function as pressing a sequence of
must immediately follow the previous enclosed virtual key name with no spaces. For
example, to program a button so that when it is clicked it performs the same function
as pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4 enter the following characters in the
Current Tool text box:
<F2><F3><F4>

You can enter a command line in a button definition by enclosing it within the ( and )
characters. This enables you to launch an application by just clicking a button. For
example, to program a button so that another instance of TeemTalk-07W is run when
the button is clicked, you would enter the following in the Current Tool text box:

You can program a button to change the currently selected window or icon (that is the
window or icon to which keyboard and mouse commands will be directed) by entering
its window class name as a string enclosed by the < and > characters. For example, to
program a button so that the TeemTalk-07W window is selected when it is clicked,
you would enter the following in the Current Tool text box:
<"tt07w">
5-7
The Toolbar

You can program a button to run a script file when pressed by enclosing the name of
the file and any arguments within the <' (left angle bracket and single quote) and '>
(single quote and right angle bracket) characters. For example, to program a button
so that it will run the script file myscript.scr and assign the values value1 and
value2 to two variables, you would enter the following:
Refer to the chapter Creating A Script File for more information.
Removing Button Tools

You can remove individual button tools from the toolbar or you can remove the entire
toolbar and floating button palette from the display.
A button tool is removed by selecting it in the Current Tool list box then clicking
the Delete Current button. To remove the toolbar and floating button palette from
the display, deselect the Visible check box.
Saving The Button Tools

When you have finished defining button tools you can save them so that they will be
reasserted when TeemTalk is loaded or reset by selecting Save Session in the File
menu.
Button tool definitions are saved in a file which has the same name (and is in the
same directory) as the current workspace file but with the extension .tbr instead of
.wsp. If you specify a different workspace file name in the Save Session As dialog
box and save the current settings, TeemTalk will automatically make a copy of the
current button tool definitions file and give it the new workspace name if a file with
the same name does not already exist.
5-8
Hotspots
6
Hotspots
This chapter describes the hotspot facility which enables functions to be
performed by clicking on keywords displayed on the screen.
Using Hotspots
TeemTalk incorporates a user-definable hotspot facility which enables you to invoke a
function by clicking the mouse pointer over a keyword displayed on the screen. For
example, an application may display information relating to keys you can press to
perform a particular function. Instead of pressing the key on the keyboard, you could
invoke the function by moving the mouse pointer over the displayed key name,
holding down the Control key and clicking the Left mouse button.
Hotspots are supported in ALL terminal emulation modes. TeemTalk provides a set of
default keywords for each mode. These keywords relate to key functions specific to
the emulation. For example, in VT200 mode you can click on the word Help
displayed on the screen and TeemTalk will execute the function associated with the
Help key.
You can identify hotspots that are currently present in display memory by holding
down the Control key and the Right mouse button (assuming default mouse
configuration). All colour attributes will be temporarily removed from the display and
the hotspots will be highlighted with a red background. Releasing the keys will return
the display to its original state.
In summary, the following key and mouse button combinations are used to identify
and action hotspot functions by default:
Identify hotspots:
Control + Right Mouse Button
Action hotspot function:
Control + Left Mouse Button
Note: These functions may be assigned to different mouse button

and key combinations. Refer to the Mouse Functions
6-1
Hotspots
Defining Hotspots
Hotspot keywords and associated functions are specified in a text file which has the
same name (and is in the same directory) as the current workspace file but with the
extension .hot instead of .wsp. For example, the default hotspot definitions supplied
with TeemTalk-07W32 are stored in the file tt07w.hot. If you specify a different
workspace file name in the Save Session As dialog box and save the current settings,
TeemTalk will automatically make a copy of the current hotspot file and give it the
new workspace name if a hotspot file with the same name does not already exist.
Note: A hotspot file may not necessarily be in use, in which case
TeemTalk will not attempt to create a new hotspot file with
the new workspace file.
You can view the contents of the hotspot file currently in use without leaving
TeemTalk by displaying the Mouse Button Actions dialog box, selecting one of the
hotspot options (from a drop down list box if necessary), then clicking the Edit...
button.
The format of entries in the hotspot definition file is as follows. Each hotspot
definition is entered on a separate line and definition lines are grouped under
headings which specify the terminal emulation mode in which they will take effect.
The following definition line examples are taken from the tt07w.hot file supplied
with TeemTalk-07W32.
[Separators]
Separators= /,:=()[]
[Definitions]
F1=<VK_F1>
F2=<VK_F2>
[Definitions,VT52]
[Definitions,VT200 7-Bit]
F6=<VT_F6>
F7=<VT_F7>
The first command group, headed [Separators], specifies the displayed characters
which delimit the hotspot keyword. Delimiters include SPACE and NULL as well as
the characters shown in the example by default. The end delimiter does not need to
be the same as the first. Delimiters are necessary to prevent hotspots occuring within
words that happen to contain the same formation of characters as the keywords.
The following command groups specify the keywords used in each terminal emulation mode. Keyword definitions that can apply to all modes are specified under the
heading [Definitions]. Keyword definitions that apply to a specific mode are
specified under the heading [Definitions,<emulation>], where <emulation> must be
the name of the terminal emulation mode as already specified in the default hotspot
6-2
Hotspots
definitions file. Note that a keyword definition under a [Definitions,<emulation>]
heading will override the definition given to the same keyword in any other definitions group when that particular emulation is running.
Each keyword definition line consists of the keyword immediately followed by an
equals (=) sign, then the function that it will perform. The keyword can consist of any
characters except those specified as delimiters in the Separators= line. TeemTalk will
search for the keyword on a case insensitive basis.
The function that will be performed when the keyword is selected is specified in the
same way as for key macros, soft buttons and script language programming.

You can enter a control character in a keyword definition either as the control key
character equivalent or the decimal value of the ASCII character. For example, the
control character for the Return key function, CR (carriage return), can be entered
pressed together would generate the CR code. This could be used to define the
keyword Login to enable you to log on to a host:
Login=hostname^M
the ASCII character table in the Character Sets appendix for code and decimal
references.

You can define a keyword to perform the function of a particular key, a combination
of keys, or a sequence of keys. For example, you can define a keyword to perform
the same function as pressing the key F4, or pressing the keys Alt + F4 together, or
pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4. Keys are identified by their virtual key names
as listed in the Virtual Key Names appendix. You may omit the VK_, VT_ (etc.)
parts of the name.
To define a keyword so that it will perform the function of a particular key, type the <
character followed by the virtual key name then the > character. For example, to
define the keyword Insert so that it will perform the same function as the Insert key
found on the DEC VT320 keyboard, enter the following line in the relevant Definitions command group:
Insert=<VT_INSERT>
To define a keyword so that it will perform the same function as pressing two or more
other keys together, type the < character followed by the virtual key names linked
6-3
Hotspots
together with + characters and ending with the > character. For example, to define the
keyword Help so that when it is clicked it performs the same function as pressing the
keys Alt + F4 together, enter the following line in the relevant Definitions command
group:
Help=<ALT+F4>
To define a keyword so that it will perform the same function as pressing a sequence
of keys one after the other, enter each virtual key name in the order required,
enclosing each name with the < and > characters. Each enclosed virtual key name
must immediately follow the previous enclosed virtual key name with no spaces. For
example, to define the keyword Command so that when it is clicked it performs the
same function as pressing the keys F2 then F3 then F4, enter the following:
Command=<F2><F3><F4>

You can enter a command line in a keyword definition by enclosing it within the (
and ) characters. For example, to define the keyword TT07W so that when it is
clicked another instance of TeemTalk-07W32 is run, you would enter the following:
TT07W=(C:\PROGRAM FILES\TEEMTALK\TT07W.EXE)

You can define a keyword to change the currently selected window or icon (that is the
window or icon to which keyboard and mouse commands will be directed) by entering
its window class name as a string enclosed by the < and > characters. For example, to
define the keyword TeemTalk so that the TeemTalk-07W32 window is selected when
the keyword is clicked, you would enter the following line in the relevant Definitions
command group:
TeemTalk=<"tt07w">
(tt07w is the window class name for TeemTalk-07W32.)

You can define a keyword to run a script file when clicked by enclosing the name of
the file and any arguments within the <' (left angle bracket and single quote) and '>
(single quote and right angle bracket) characters. For example, to define the keyword
Script so that it will run the script file myscript.scr and assign the values value1 and
value2 to two variables, you would enter the following in the relevant Definitions
command group:
Script=<'myscript.scr(value1,value2)'>
6-4
Setup Menus
7
Setup Menus
This chapter describes the options available in the setup menus and
dialog boxes.
Selecting & Closing Menus

The following menus can be displayed from the menu bar:
7-1
Setup Menus
To display a menu:
Mouse:
Click the title of the menu required.
Keyboard:
Hold down the Alt key and press the key bearing the underlined
character in the menu title. For example, pressing Alt + F will display
the File menu.
When the menu bar is not displayed you can still display the menus by pressing the
following keys:
Alt + F for the File menu
Alt + E for the Edit menu
Alt + S for the Settings menu
Alt + H for the Help menu
To close a menu:
Mouse:
Click anywhere outside the menu.
Keyboard:
Press the Alt key.
Using The Menus

When you display a menu and move the cursor over the menu options, the status bar
at the bottom of the TeemTalk window will change to display a brief description of the
option at the cursor position.
The menu options follow several conventions:
Options that are displayed dimmed are not applicable to the current mode of
operation and cannot be selected. An example of this is the Cancel Print option in
the File menu. This can only be selected after a print command has been initiated.
Options that include an underlined character may be actioned by pressing the key
bearing that character. For example, pressing the X key while the File menu is
displayed will cause TeemTalk to shut down.
Options that are not followed by an ellipsis (...) perform a particular function when
selected. For example, selecting Save Session in the File menu will cause TeemTalk to
save the session configuration to the currently selected saved settings files.
Options that are followed by an ellipsis indicate that a dialog box will be displayed
with all the selections applicable to that option. For example, selecting New
Connection... in the File menu will display a dialog box in which you can specify
host communication settings.
Some options display a tick mark when they are selected or activated, such as the
Clipboard Text option in the Edit menu.
7-2
Setup Menus
To select a menu option:
Mouse:
Click the menu option.
Keyboard:
Method 1: If the option includes an underlined character, press the key

bearing that character. For example, pressing X while the File menu is
displayed will cause TeemTalk to shut down.
Method 2: Use the up or down arrow keys to highlight the option
required then hit Return.
Dialog Boxes
Selecting an option which is followed by an ellipsis (...) will cause a dialog box to be
displayed. The example shown below is displayed by selecting the Dialog... option in
the Settings menu.
There are four basic methods for making selections within the dialog boxes.
Options preceded by a check box, such as Auto Wrap in the example above, are true
or selected when the box contains a or X, and false or unselected when the box is
empty. Click the pointer in the box to toggle the setting on or off.
When a group of options preceded by round buttons are enclosed in a box, such as
the Cursor Origin options in the example above, only one of these options is
selected or true at any one time. The currently selected option is indicated by a button
with a dark centre. These buttons behave just like radio buttons in that clicking one
will cause the previously selected button to be deselected.
Some options require you to type information in a text box, such as the Dialog Area
Lines option.
7-3
Setup Menus
When an option has many possible settings, these will be shown in a list box. The
Baud Rate option in the Serial Settings dialog box is an example of this. To make a
selection using the mouse, click the arrow button to display a drop-down list box then
click on the setting required. If the list is long a scroll bar may be displayed. To make
a selection using the keyboard, press the up or down arrow keys to cycle through the
available settings until the one required is highlighted in the box.
To select a dialog box option:

Mouse:
Click the check box, button or list box. The current setting is highlighted or surrounded by a dotted rectangle, or both.
Keyboard:
Press the Tab key to move forward through the options (left to right,
top to bottom), or Shift + Tab to move backwards, until the required
option is highlighted or surrounded by a dotted rectangle, or both. Press
the Spacebar to toggle check boxes or buttons on or off.
To close a dialog box without actioning changes:

Mouse:
Click the Cancel button.
Keyboard:
Press the Tab or Shift + Tab keys to move the cursor until it rests over
the Cancel button and press Return or the Spacebar.
To close a dialog box and action changes:

Mouse:
Click the OK button.
Keyboard:
Press Return.
Default Settings
TeemTalk is supplied with the setup options set to factory default. If these have been
altered since and you wish to reassert the original settings of all the options, display
the File menu and select the Factory Default option.
Some dialog boxes include a Default button to enable the factory default settings of
options contained in the dialog box to be reasserted.
7-4
Setup Menus
Creating A Connection Template

You can save the current session configuration as a connection template. To make
TeemTalk automatically attempt to make a host connection using the same settings the
next time it is loaded, display the File menu and select the Save Session option.
follows:
1. In the File menu, select the Save Session As... option to display the following
dialog box.
2. In the Saved Items box, indicate which user preference settings are to be saved by
checking the boxes next to the relevant options.
only affecting the terminal emulation. The default filename is tt*w.nv, where * is
either 05, 07 or 11, depending on your version of TeemTalk.
Note: There is no need to specify file extensions as defaults are
applied when the files are created.
4. In the Save As File Name text box, specify the name of the workspace settings
file (and the directory path if different from the default) which is to store the user
tt*w.wsp, where * is either 05, 07 or 11, depending on your version of TeemTalk.
Note: Splitting the saved settings into two files enables users to share
a common terminal emulation settings file while allowing each
user to have their own workspace settings file.
7-5
Setup Menus
Using Environment Variables To Locate

Settings Files
When TeemTalk for Windows 95 or NT is installed on a terminal server, environment
variables may be used to locate settings files on the client PC. This means that each
client may use a different setup configuration, reading and saving settings locally,
instead of changing files stored on the server which would affect all clients.
Each client must use the same user environment variable name to specify the
directory path for the TeemTalk settings file(s). This name is then specified in the
registry on the terminal server, enclosed by % (percentage) characters.
For example, each client has the user environment variable USERPROFILE pointing
to a local directory (which may be different on each client). To make the directory
specified by USERPROFILE the location of the TeemTalk settings files (.nv and
.wsp), the TeemTalk registry entries on the terminal server would look like this:
NvPath:
WsPath:
7-6
"%USERPROFILE%"
"%USERPROFILE%"
Setup Menus
Selecting A Connection Template

The Open Session dialog box in the File menu enables you to select a connection
template for TeemTalk to use.
the dialog box to close and TeemTalk to use the connection template associated with
the chosen description.
You can also use the following command line option to override the default
connection template used when TeemTalk is loaded:
-se"description"
where description must exactly match the description assigned to a connection
template already saved using the Save Session As dialog box. The description must
be enclosed by double-quotes.
7-7
Setup Menus
Menu Descriptions
The following pages describe the options available in all the menus and associated
dialog boxes. The descriptions begin by showing the menu or dialog box as it is
displayed on the screen. The factory default setting is shown below each option title
where applicable.
File Menu
Factory Default...
This will make TeemTalk reassert all the original settings that it had when you first
installed it. A message box will be displayed asking you to confirm whether or not
you want to assert the factory default settings. Click the OK button to assert the
factory defaults or Cancel to cancel the selection.
7-8
Setup Menus
Reset Terminal
This will reset the current terminal emulation mode.
New Connection...
Factory default: Serial, Com 1
This will display a dialog box which enables you to make a serial or network host
connection.
The Type option specifies whether a serial or network connection is to be made.

Clicking the arrow button will display a drop-down list box containing all the
possible settings.
The Services option specifies the port or network host node which TeemTalk is to
communicate with. This is a text box with an associated drop-down list box. You can
either make a selection from the list box or enter a valid host name or internet address
in the text box.
Making A Serial Host Connection

To connect to a serial host, select Serial in the Type list box (default), then select the
Com port required in the Services list box. Click the Configure... button to display
the Serial Settings dialog box and make sure the settings match that of the host.
Click OK then click Connect.
Note: These options are described in the Serial Settings section

later in this chapter and only apply when the connection
type is set to Serial.
7-9
Setup Menus
The status line along the bottom of the window displays two LEDs. The first LED
indicates whether or not you are connected to the host. It will show red when not
connected and green when you are connected. The second LED indicates whether or
not data is being sent to or from the host. It will show dull green when there is no
activity, red when data is being sent to the host, and bright green when data is being
received from the host.
Making A Network Host Connection

To connect to a network host node, select the protocol required in the Type list box:
TeemTalk for Windows 95 and NT:
TCP/IP
NetBIOS
LAT
CTERM
MultiLan
Microsoft SNA
WinSock 2
ISDN
TeemTalk-OSI (option)

LAT
FTP PC/TCP
Sun PC/NFS
LAN W/Place
NetManage
PathWay
CTERM
NetBIOS
OSLAN
TELAPI
BAPI
Interrupt 14
INT6B / NASI
LanManager
B and W. TCP
WinSock
Ext. NCSI
Eicon X25
IPX/SPX
NetWare for LAT
TeemTalk-OSI
INFOConnect
ISDN
DOSLANTI
MultiLan
Note: Refer to the Network Connection chapter in the Networking

Guide for a description of each protocol supported and for
any additional configuration required prior to making a
connection.
The Services list box (in the New Connection dialog box) will display the devices
on the network which use the currently selected protocol. Click the name of the
device required or, in the case of TELAPI, enter an Internet address in the text box
(for example, 128.127.126.2). Note that either the host name or IP address may be
entered for TCP/IP connections. When Eicon X25 is selected, TeemTalk requires you
to enter a valid address as none will be listed.
The Telnet Options button becomes available when a Telnet protocol is selected in
the Type list box. The dialog box displayed when this button is clicked is described
in the next section.
Clicking the Connect button or the name of the host in the Services list box twice
will cause TeemTalk to attempt to connect to the specified host. If a connection cannot
be made because the network driver is not installed or the host node name is invalid,
an error message will indicate this. Failure to connect for any other reason will result
in a Connection Failed message.
7-10
Setup Menus
The status line along the bottom of the window displays two LEDs. The first LED
indicates whether or not you are connected to the host. It will show red when not
connected and green when you are connected. The second LED indicates whether or
not data is being sent to or from the host. It will show dull green when there is no
activity, red when data is being sent to the host, and bright green when data is being
received from the host.
Connection to the network host node will close if you change the settings in the New
Connection dialog box and attempt to connect, if you log out of the host, or the host
closes the connection. Warning messages will be displayed if the host closes the
connection, or you attempt to open a new session or exit TeemTalk while a session is
open. These message boxes can be disabled using initialization file commands or
command line options. Refer to the Initialization Commands chapter for details.
Open Session...
This enables you to select a connection template for TeemTalk to use. The following
dialog box will be displayed.
TeemTalk to use the connection template associated with the chosen description.
Close Session
This will close the current session.
7-11
Setup Menus
Save Session
Selecting this option will cause the current session configuration to be saved to the
connection template specified in the Save Session As dialog box.
Save Session As...
This will display a dialog box which enables you to save the current session
configuration as a connection template.
follows:
1. In the Saved Items box, indicate which user preference settings are to be saved
by checking the boxes next to the relevant options.
only affecting the terminal emulation. The default filename is tt*w.nv, where * is
either 05, 07 or 11, depending on your version of TeemTalk.
Note: There is no need to specify file extensions as defaults are
applied when the files are created.
3. In the Save As File Name text box, specify the name of the workspace settings
file (and the directory path if different from the default) which is to store the user
tt*w.wsp, where * is either 05, 07 or 11, depending on your version of TeemTalk.
7-12
Setup Menus
Startup Options...
The following dialog box will be displayed when this option is selected.
This enables you specify whether TeemTalk is to make a host connection using the
default connection template, display the New Connection dialog box, or display the
Open Session dialog box when it is loaded (but not when it is reset). Refer to the
relevant descriptions earlier in this section for information on these dialog boxes.
Clicking the Edit... button will open a text editor window in which the contents of the
TeemTalk private profile file containing startup settings will be displayed. This enables
you to make changes without leaving TeemTalk. (Note that changes will not take
effect until the next time TeemTalk is loaded.) The text editor used by default is
the command group headed [Startup] in the TeemTalk private profile file.
Note: Refer to the Initialization Commands chapter for information
on the private profile file.
Capture File...
This will display a dialog box which enables you to specify the name of a file in which
all following data received from the host will be logged.
Clicking the OK button after entering the name of the file will cause all data received
from the host to be stored in this file until the Cancel Capture option (which
replaces the Capture File option during a capture session) is selected. The contents
of this file can be played back later by selecting the Replay File... option.
7-13
Setup Menus
Replay File...
Factory default: *.*
This option will display a dialog box which enables you to replay the contents of a file
previously created by the Capture File... option.
Enter the name of the file to be replayed in the Replay File Name text box, or
alternatively select a file name in the list box below, specify whether the replay is
directed to the emulation (default) or host, then click the OK button.
To cancel a file replay, select the Cancel Replay option which replaces the Replay
File option while a file is being replayed.
File Transfer...
This option provides access to the file transfer utility. Refer to the File Transfer
FTP...
This option provides access to the FTP file transfer utility. Refer to the FTP File
Transfer chapter for details.
Printer Setup...
This displays a dialog box which enables you to select any printer that is configured
in Microsoft Windows instead of just the default printer.
Note: You can specify a different printer which TeemTalk will use
by default instead of that specified in the Control panel by
including the printer details on a device= line in the
initialization file.
7-14
Setup Menus
The currently selected printer is the TeemTalk default printer if specified, or the printer
specified in the Control panel, when the dialog box is displayed for the first time after
TeemTalk is loaded or reset, otherwise it is the printer that was last used.
Selecting a printer other than the default printer will enable the Save New Default
option. If you click the OK button when this option is selected, the currently
highlighted printer will become the new default printer. If you want to keep the
original printer as the default, uncheck this box before clicking OK.
The Microsoft Windows Print Manager normally controls all print formatting,
translates host characters to supported printer characters, and also provides a spooling
facility. A disadvantage of using the Print Manager is that any print formatting escape
sequences received from the host are stripped. The Through Print Action options
enable you overcome this problem.
If you want to use the Print Manager but disable its print formatting process so that the
original escape sequences from the host are retained, select both the Use Print
Manager and PassThru options. (Note that the PassThru option will be
unselectable if the printer driver currently selected does not support this facility.)
If you want to bypass the Print Manager, deselect the Use Print Manager option.
The FormFeed Terminator and Translate National Characters options will
become available. Selecting the FormFeed Terminator option will cause the printer
to advance the paper to the top of the form when it has finished printing. The setting
of the Translate National Characters option determines whether or not the ISO
Latin characters used by Microsoft Windows are translated to IBM characters for the
printer.
If you find a through print results in data being split into lines, each treated as a
separate print job, specify a time in the Seconds Close Delay box (e.g. 5 seconds).
This will enable the next line of data to be sent before the print job is assumed to
have finished and therefore prevents the print job from being closed prematurely.
When Auto Line Feed is selected, every carriage return command will be followed
by a line feed command.
The Setup... button enables you to display the Microsoft Windows Print Setup
dialog box for the currently selected printer. This includes a Fonts... button which
enables you to change the font settings. The "Courier New" 11 point font will be used
by default.
Note: The Printer Setup option will be unselectable if no printer
is installed or if the Status option in the Microsoft Windows
Printers dialog box is set to Inactive.
Print Screen...
This will display a dialog box which enables you to produce a hardcopy of data
displayed on the screen in a particular format.
7-15
Setup Menus
The Text option is selected by default and the printer resolution and scaling options
are not accessible. Clicking the OK button with Text selected will cause a fast print of
the screen using ASCII text codes, therefore any graphics displayed in the TeemTalk
client area will not be printed.
Note: The virtual key name VT_PRINT will also cause this dialog
box to be displayed.
Selecting Graphics will print all the data in the TeemTalk client area, both graphics
and text, when the OK button is clicked. The hardcopy output will be an almost exact
representation of the client area. Note that a graphics print will take a lot longer than
a text print.
The Use Printer Resolution option is available when Graphics print is selected.
This will force a dot for dot print of the screen on the printer and generally produces a
small print, depending on the printer resolution. When this option is not selected
(unchecked), TeemTalk will try and print as large an image as possible on the printer's
paper. Both methods can print in landscape or portrait format, depending on the
current setup of the printer.
The Centre Image on Paper option is available when Graphics print is selected.
This will ensure that the graphics image is printed centrally on the paper.
The Scaling option is available when Graphics print is selected. This enables the
image to be scaled to suit your preference. When the Use Printer Resolution option
is selected, you can scale the image up, and when unselected you can scale the image
down. (Scaling up when Use Printer Resolution is not selected may result in loss of
some of the image.)
The Graphics Image option is available when Graphics print is selected. This
enables you to specify how the graphics image is to be printed. Clicking the arrow
button next to the text box will cause four print options to be displayed.
7-16
Setup Menus
These options allow you to print the graphics image as displayed (Normal by default),
with black and white reversed, with colour converted to monochrome, or colour
converted to monochrome with black and white reversed.
Once a screen print is initiated by clicking OK, another dialog box will be displayed
while the screen data is being spooled out to the print manager. This enables you to
terminate the print process before data is actually printed.
Print Buffer
This will send a copy of all the data contained in the window buffer to the currently
selected printer.
Auto Print
This toggles auto print mode on and off, as indicated by a tick when auto print mode
is on. Auto print mode causes each line of data to be transmitted to the printer when
the cursor moves to a new line as a result of a carriage return, line feed, vertical tab,
or form feed.
Cancel Print
This will cancel the current Print Screen or Print Buffer function.
Eject Page
When TeemTalk is in Auto Print or Printer Controller mode and the Use Print
Manager option in the Printer Setup dialog box is checked, this option enables data
that has been spooled to the printer to be printed. This option will be greyed
(unselectable) when TeemTalk is not in Auto Print or Printer Controller mode.
Run Script...
This will display a dialog box which enables you to run a script file.
Windows 3.1x
Windows 95 & NT
The name of the file is entered in the Script File Name text box, or alternatively you
can select a file name in the list box below.
7-17
Setup Menus
The Parameters text box enables you to specify the values of ArgV# type variables
within the script file, if required. Values are separated from each other by a comma.
You must ensure that the values are entered in the right order so that they are
assigned to the correct variables. Refer to the Initiating A Script File section in the
Creating A Script File chapter for details.
Note: If the values to be entered include sensitive data, such as a
password, you can cause the text to be displayed as
asterisks instead of normal text by using the -hs command
line option or scriptparameter=off initialization file
command.
When the name of the script file has been specified and any parameters entered, click
the OK button to run the script file. To cancel a script file, select the Cancel Script
option which replaces the Run Script option while a file is being run.
The Edit... button becomes active when you select the name of a script file. Clicking
the Edit... button will open a text editor window in which the contents of the selected
script file will be displayed. This enables you to make changes without leaving
TeemTalk.
Exit
This option will cause TeemTalk to shut down. If you attempt to exit TeemTalk while
a network session is still active, the following message box will be displayed:
This message box can be disabled so that the connection is automatically closed when
TeemTalk is exited by using the -J command line option or entering the line
warnExit=off in the initialization file.
7-18
Setup Menus
Telnet Options
This dialog box is displayed when you click the Telnet Options button in the New
Connection dialog box when any Telnet protocol is selected in the Type list box.
Note that the options available and the default settings depend on the current terminal
emulation. The '3270' and '5250' options are not applicable to this version of
TeemTalk.
Note: Many of these settings can be specified in the TeemTalk
private profile file. Refer to the Initialization Commands
Port Number
This enables you to specify the Telnet port number. The default Telnet port number,
23, can be substituted with any valid 16 bit port number. Specifying a number outside
the valid range will cause the setting to default to 1.
Telnet Name
This enables you to override the name that will be reported for the terminal type over
Telnet.
Suppress Echo
When selected, this will will prevent the emulator from generating the Telnet echo
option on connection.
7-19
Setup Menus
Force Negotiation
These settings determine whether or not the Telnet Binary or EOR options are
supported. Both are set to no by default.
No
Will not force any negotiations. It will leave it up to the

host to decide what to do.
DO
Will force negotiation. The host will be informed that the

option is supported.
DONT
Will force negotiation. A negotiation packet will be sent

to the host telling it that the option is not supported.
Break Settings
The setting of these options determine whether or not a timing mark (TM) and/or
carriage return (CR) is sent with a Telnet break packet. A timing mark is sent by
default.
7-20
Setup Menus
Edit Menu
Clipboard Text
Clipboard Graphics
Selecting one of these options will enable selected text or graphics to be copied to the
clipboard when the Copy command is used. The Paste and Select All commands
will also be enabled. A tick will be displayed next to the option when it is selected
and the DDE commands will be disabled.
DDE Row Copy
DDE Column Copy
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) is a much more powerful tool than the clipboard as
it establishes a link between the copied data and the original source data so that when
changes occur to the source data, the copied data can be updated automatically so
that you do not have to copy and paste the data again. A tick will be displayed next to
the option when it is selected and the Paste command will be disabled.
The DDE Row Copy and DDE Column Copy options enable selected data to be
copied in a format suitable for applications which use cells to store information, such
as spreadsheets. When the Copy command is used, selected data will be copied so
that each line is treated as a separate cell.
The way in which each cell of data is inserted in the application's worksheet when
pasted is determined by whether the DDE Row Copy or DDE Column Copy option
was selected before the Copy command was used. DDE Row Copy will enable each
line of copied data to be pasted in a row of selected cells, and DDE Column Copy
will enable each line of copied data to be pasted in a column of selected cells.
Note: Refer to the Dynamic Data Exchange chapter for more
information.
7-21
Setup Menus
Copy
This command becomes available (ungreyed) when data has been selected. The
function of this command is determined by whether the Clipboard Text, Clipboard
Graphics, DDE Row Copy or DDE Column Copy option is selected.
When the Clipboard Text or Clipboard Graphics option is selected, this command
will cause currently selected text or graphics to be copied to the clipboard. The data
can then be inserted in a different position or another file using the Paste command.
The next block of data that is copied will delete the previous block on the clipboard.
When DDE Row Copy or DDE Column Copy is selected, various commands
representing the selected screen area will be copied to the clipboard. These
commands can be pasted to an appropriate area of the screen by another Windows
application that can interpret the commands, for example, Microsoft Excel. DDE
messages will be exchanged between TeemTalk and the application in which the
commands were pasted and, if acknowledged positively by both parties, an automatic
update will be performed from TeemTalk to the application if data in the selected area
changes.
To use the Copy option, hold down the left mouse button and move the pointer
across to the right to display additional options, as shown below.
The first option enables you to perform a standard copy. Pressing the keys Shift +
Delete together will perform the same function. The last three options are only
available when Clipboard Graphics is selected. They enable you to copy the
graphics image with black and white reversed, with colour converted to
monochrome, or both.
Note: A standard copy can also be performed by clicking the
middle mouse button on a 3-button mouse, or the right
button on a 2-button mouse.
Paste
This only functions when the Clipboard Text or Clipboard Graphics option is
selected and will cause data that has been copied to the clipboard to be pasted at the
7-22
Setup Menus
current cursor position. The same block of data may be pasted repeatedly as the
clipboard stores it until the Copy command is used again.
Note: The same function can be performed by clicking the right
mouse button on a 3-button mouse, or Shift + Left or Right
Button on a 2-button mouse, or by pressing the keys Shift +
Insert.
Select All
This will cause the window contents (not the entire buffer) to be selected.
Clear Buffer
This will erase the contents of the window and the scroll buffer.
7-23
Setup Menus
Settings Menu
The following dialog boxes can be displayed from this menu:

Emulation Settings
- for specifying the terminal emulation, terminal

identity and displayable characters.
Serial Settings
- for specifying serial communication settings.
Terminal Settings
- for specifying terminal and keyboard settings.
Dialog Settings
- for specifying the text window format, buffer

size and cursor movement.
Gin Settings
- for configuring TeemTalk for compatibility with

the attached GIN device.
Attributes
- for assigning colours and specifying how

characters with attributes are displayed.
Keyboard Macros
- for remapping the keyboard and defining the

function of keys.
Soft Buttons
- for defining soft button functions.
Mouse Button Actions
- for defining mouse button functions.
Button Tools
- for defining the toolbar/floating button palette.
7-24
Setup Menus
Emulation Settings
This dialog box is displayed by selecting Emulation in the Settings menu.

Emulation
Factory default: VT100
The setting of this option determines the current terminal emulation mode.
VT52 and VT100 modes enable you to run applications written for the DEC VT52
and VT100 terminals, respectively.
Tek mode provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Tektronix 4100
or 4200 series terminals. Emulation of the Tektronix 4014 terminal can be achieved
by selecting this option and setting the Dialog Area Enabled option in the Dialog
Settings dialog box to 0.
Edit mode provides compatibility with software designed to drive the DEC VT100
terminal. In this mode the following features are set to pre-determined conditions:
A. The dialog area is enabled and visible.
B. The dialog area buffer and scrolling region are set to 24 lines.
C. Cursor origin mode is set to Absolute (refer to the description of
the Cursor Origin option in the Dialog Settings dialog box).
D. Insert/Replace character mode is set to Replace.
E. Keys PF1 through PF4 generate ANSI cursor movement
sequences.
F. All programmed strings for keys are temporarily disabled.
7-25
Setup Menus
VT220-7 and VT220-8 modes run emulations of the DEC VT220 terminal, the
difference is in their treatment of 8-bit control codes. When VT220-7 is selected, all
8-bit codes are converted to their 7-bit equivalents, whereas VT220-8 leaves 8-bit
codes unchanged. If you are using VT200 applications, select VT220-7.
W3220 mode provides compatibility with software designed to drive the Westward
3220 terminal.
Code 1 Selects
Factory default: ANSI
The setting of this option determines what action will be taken on receipt of an 'Enter
ANSI Mode' (Code 1) command from the host. It can be set to cause entry to the
DEC VT220 7 or 8-bit emulation instead of ANSI (VT100). This provides the same
functionality as the Tektronix DecTerminal command.
Terminal ID
Factory default: VT100
This option identifies the particular 'VT' terminal model emulated by TeemTalk in
response to a terminal identification request from the host when in any mode except
Tek.
Multinational
Factory default: Unselected
The setting of this option determines whether the national or multinational character
set is used when TeemTalk is in VT220 7 or 8-bit Alpha mode. (All other modes use
the national character set.)
When this option is unselected, the national character set which corresponds to the
keyboard language selected in the Terminal Settings dialog box will be used. Only
characters found in this character set may be generated.
When this option is selected, the multinational character set will be used. This
consists of the 7-bit ASCII character set and the 8-bit VT220 Additional character set
(as shown in the Character Sets appendix). This enables characters from all national
character sets to be generated.
Display Controls
The setting of this option determines whether received control codes are actioned or
displayed. When selected, a representation of most control codes will be displayed on
the screen.
7-26
Setup Menus
Serial Settings
This dialog box is displayed by selecting Serial in the Settings menu, or by clicking
the Configure... button in the New Connection dialog box when the connection type
is set to Serial or Interrupt 14. Note that the port for serial communications is
selected via the New Connection dialog box which is displayed from the File menu.
Baud Rate
Factory default: 2400
This specifies the transmit and receive baud rates for the port selected for host
communications.
Parity
Factory default: None
This option specifies the parity mode for each transmitted character. If the number of
Data Bits is 8, set this option to None.
Selecting Odd will cause an eighth bit to be added with a value of 1 if the previous 7
bits add up to an even number, and 0 if the previous 7 bits add up to an odd number.
Selecting Even will cause an eighth bit to be added with a value of 1 if the previous 7
bits add up to an odd number, and 0 if the previous 7 bits add up to an even number.
Mark parity will set every eighth bit to 1 and Space parity every bit to 0.
Flow Control
Factory default: Output
This option specifies the type of flow control used by the line port to communicate
readiness to transmit or receive data from the host.
None
Input
Output
- No flow control
- XON/XOFF on received data
- XON/XOFF on transmitted data
7-27
Setup Menus
In/Out
- XON/XOFF on transmitted & received data
Hardware - DTR/CTS hardware flow control.
Data Bits
Factory default: 8
This option specifies the number of data bits sent for each transmitted character.
Stop Bits
Factory default: 1
This specifies the number of stop bits sent for each transmitted character.
Transmit Rate
Factory default: Unlimited
The setting of this option determines the maximum effective baud rate that TeemTalk
transmits terminal reports and data sent as a result of pasting data to the host.
On Line
Factory default: Selected
When this option is selected, normal two-way communication between TeemTalk and
the host is enabled. When unselected, TeemTalk is in Local mode and data will not be
sent to, or received from the host. Data typed on the keyboard will be displayed on
the screen or actioned if a control command is typed.
Local Echo
The setting of this option determines whether keyboard entered characters are
displayed on the screen as well as sent to the host. When unselected, characters are
not displayed when they are transmitted unless the host 'echoes' them back.
Detect Carrier
This option is only valid if the script command PSET HOST DCDDETECT YES
has been specified (refer to the Creating A Script File chapter for details).
When this option is selected, TeemTalk will check to see whether a modem connection
is running. If the DCDDETECT command is not specified or set to NO, the check
will always be true.
Note: The script command PGET HOST DCDTEST can be used
to test whether DCD was present when the last character
was sent.
7-28
Setup Menus
NCSI Settings
This TeemTalk for Windows 3.1x dialog box is displayed by clicking the Configure...
button in the New Connection dialog box when the connection
type is set to Extended NCSI.
Baud Rate
This specifies the transmit and receive baud rates in the range 50 to 115200 baud.
Parity
This option specifies the parity mode for each transmitted character.
If the number of Data Bits is 8, set this option to None.
Selecting Odd will cause an eighth bit to be added with a value of 1 if the previous 7
bits add up to an even number, and 0 if the previous 7 bits add up to an odd number.
Selecting Even will cause an eighth bit to be added with a value of 1 if the previous 7
bits add up to an odd number, and 0 if the previous 7 bits add up to an even number.
Mark parity will set every eighth bit to 1 and Space parity every bit to 0.
Flow Control
Factory default: Xon/Xoff
This option specifies the type of flow control used to communicate readiness to
transmit or receive data from the host. It can be set to None, DTR, RTS, DTR/RTS
or Xon/Xoff.
7-29
Setup Menus
Data Bits
Factory default: 8
This option specifies the number of data bits sent for each transmitted character.
Stop Bits
Factory default: 1
This specifies the number of stop bits sent for each transmitted character.
Show Port Details
By default the Services list box will show the server name and general service (e.g.
VAX or modem) but not the port name. If the server has two or more of the same
type of service connected, for example two modems, then you can have the port
name displayed as well by selecting this option.
7-30
Setup Menus
Terminal Settings
This dialog box is displayed by selecting Terminal in the Settings menu.

Keyboard Language
This option enables you to specify the nationality of the keyboard being used. It is
important that this is correct otherwise the characters displayed may not match the
key legends.
When running TeemTalk for Windows 3.1x, the factory default keyboard nationality
is determined by the Keyboard Layout setting in the International dialog box within
the Microsoft Windows Control Panel. You can specify a different nationality while
TeemTalk is running and save it so that it is reassserted each time TeemTalk is loaded
or reset. When you exit TeemTalk the keyboard nationality will revert back to that
specified in the International dialog box.
When running TeemTalk for Windows 95 or NT, the factory default keyboard
nationality is determined by the system locale setting. You can specify a different
nationality while TeemTalk is running and save it so that it is reassserted each time
TeemTalk is loaded or reset. When you exit TeemTalk the keyboard nationality will
revert back to that specified in the locale.
LF Implies CR
When selected, this will cause TeemTalk to interpret each line feed character it receives
as a line feed and carriage return pair.
7-31
Setup Menus
CR Implies LF
When selected, this will cause TeemTalk to interpret each carriage return character it
receives as a carriage return and line feed pair.
Ignore Deletes
The setting of this option determines whether TeemTalk ignores or actions delete
characters received from the host.
Application Keypad
The setting of this option determines the effect of pressing keys in the keypad on the
right side of the keyboard.
When unselected, the keypad is in numeric mode and keys will generate the
characters shown on the key caps. When selected, the keypad is in application mode
and keys will generate control functions when pressed.
Note: On some keyboards the keypad acts as both a numeric
keypad and a cursor key block depending on the setting of
some modifier, such as the Num Lock key. This option only
affects the characters generated when the keypad is acting
as a numeric keypad.
Application Cursor Keys
When this option is selected the cursor keys will generate application program codes
when pressed. Unselected, the keys will generate normal cursor movement
commands.
Note: On some keyboards the keypad acts as both a numeric
keypad and a cursor key block depending on the setting of
some modifier, such as the Num Lock key. This option only
affects the characters generated when the keypad is acting
as a cursor key block.
Scroll Bar on Maximize
The setting of this option determines whether or not a scroll bar is displayed when the
window is maximized.
7-32
Setup Menus
Report Maximum Line Length
Factory default: 0
The setting of this option determines the maximum number of characters per line for
reports sent to the host. The numeric value must be in the range 0 through 65535.
This feature is disabled if 0 is specified.
Bypass Cancel Character
Factory default: ^J (LF)
This option sets the bypass mode cancellation character. Bypass mode is entered
when TeemTalk sends a report to the host so as to prevent reports echoed by the host
being actioned by TeemTalk. All characters subsequently received from the host are
discarded until the terminal receives the bypass cancel character, after which it
resumes processing received data.
If the host does not echo, then bypass mode can be disabled by specifying the
character as NULL (ASCII decimal 00) in one of the ways described in the following
paragraphs. Otherwise, set the bypass character to the last character that the host
sends when it echoes a line of text.
To change the current definition, delete the definition displayed in the text box and
type in the new one, either as the control key character equivalent or the decimal
value of the ASCII character. For example, the default ASCII character LF can be
entered by typing the characters ^ and J, representing the keys Ctrl + J which, when
pressed together would generate the LF code.
example, the decimal value of LF is 10, so this would be entered as _010. Refer to
references.
End Of Line Characters
Factory default: ^M (CR)
This option is used to specify up to two ASCII characters in the decimal range 0
through 127 which are sent by TeemTalk at the end of reports sent to the host.
value of the ASCII character. For example, the default character CR can be entered
pressed together would generate the CR code.
references.
7-33
Setup Menus
End Of Message Characters
Factory default: ^M (CR) and ^J (LF)
This option is used to specify up to two ASCII characters in the decimal range 0
through 127 which are sent by TeemTalk to end a line of data transmission.
value of the ASCII character. For example, the ASCII character LF can be entered by
typing the characters ^ and J, representing the keys Ctrl + J which, when pressed
together would generate the LF code.
example, the decimal value of LF is 10, so this would be entered as _010. Refer to
references.
EOM Frequency
Factory default: High
The end of message frequency specifies how often TeemTalk inserts end of line strings
into reports that it sends to the host.
Terminal
The setting of this option determines the extent of control over text displayed in the
graphics area. Specifying 4105 will cause the Tek emulation to use string precision
text only, whereas 4207 or 4111 (depending on your version of TeemTalk) will allow
both string and stroke precision text. String precision text only consists of alpha
mode fonts. Stroke precision allows both alpha and user-defined fonts to be
displayed, and provides greater precision when slanting, rotating or sizing the text.
Answerback String
This option enables you to specify the Answerback string that is sent to the host in
response to an ANSI mode enquiry command. The string may be up to 30 characters
long.
Answerback Concealed
Selecting this option will cause the Answerback string specified in the text box above
to be locked from change and displayed as asterisks. Note that deselecting this option
will cause the Answerback string to be deleted.
7-34
Setup Menus
Dialog Settings
This dialog box is displayed by selecting Dialog in the Settings menu.

Burst Scroll
The setting of this option determines whether data is scrolled one or several lines at a
time when the window becomes full. Data will scroll up several lines at a time when
this is selected.
Auto Wrap
This option determines whether characters wrap to the next line when the right
margin is reached. When unselected, on reaching the right margin, the last character
position will be overwritten by every new character received until a command
positions the cursor at a different location.
Dialog Indices Locked
Selecting this option will prevent the host from changing the current colour settings
of the dialog area.
In some circumstances the dialog indices may have to be locked to prevent the text
becoming unreadable due to clashes between the character foreground colour and the
background colour. This is because TeemTalk does not have a separate dialog and
graphic colour map.
7-35
Setup Menus
Dialog Area Visible
This option enables you to make the dialog area visible or invisible.
Cursor Origin
Factory default: Relative
The setting of this option defines the relationship between the cursor position and the
emulation workspace.
When this option is set to Absolute, the cursor position is calculated using the first
column and row of the emulation workspace as its origin, so allowing addressing
outside the current text scrolling region.
When set to Relative, the cursor position is calculated using the first column and row
of the current text scrolling region as its origin. Cursor movement is restricted to the
scrolling region.
Cursor Style
Factory default: Underline
This option enables you to specify how the text cursor is displayed, either as an
underline character or a block.
Columns
Factory default: 80
This option enables you to specify a width of 80 or 132 columns for the dialog area.
Resize Font
This option determines the effect on displayed text when the window is resized.
When selected, resizing the window will cause TeemTalk to search a list of known
fonts and select the one that allows the same number of rows (specified by the next
option) and columns to fill the new window size. The window will be adjusted to
display all the rows.
When unselected, resizing the window will have no effect on the font size and the
number of displayed rows will be increased or decreased according to the new
window size. Note that the number of columns will remain set to 80 or 132 even
though the window may be wider, leaving a margin on the right.
Rows
Factory default: 32
This option determines the total number of text rows that may be displayed in the
window, which can be set to a maximum of 64. TeemTalk will search a list of known
fonts and select the one that allows all the specified rows to be displayed in the
7-36
Setup Menus
window. The window size will be adjusted accordingly. Note that the number of text
rows actually used for displaying dialog area text is determined by the setting of the
Dialog Area Lines option.
Dialog Area Lines
Factory default: 32
This option defines how many lines of the dialog buffer are visible on the screen in
the dialog area. The size of the text window (see Rows) and dialog buffer (see Dialog
Area Buffer) determines the maximum number of lines that can be displayed. The
minimum number of lines that can be displayed is 2.
Dialog Area Buffer
Factory default: 49
This option specifies the size of the buffer which is used to store text for display in
the dialog area. The number of lines specified must be in the range 2 through 100.
Dialog Area Enabled
Factory default: 1
The dialog area is a region on the screen in which text stored in the dialog area buffer
can be displayed. This option specifies whether the dialog area is enabled or
disabled. The dialog area is enabled when set to 1 and disabled when set to 0.
In VT52, VT100 and Edit mode, text is automatically placed in the dialog area
regardless of whether or not the area is enabled. In Tek mode with the dialog area
enabled, all alphanumeric text is placed in the dialog area buffer. In Tek mode with
the dialog area disabled, text is placed in the graphics area at the current graphics
position. This gives an emulation of the Tektronix 4014 terminal which does not
support an equivalent of the dialog area. In Primary Setup mode, all text entered from
the keyboard is displayed in the dialog area.
7-37
Setup Menus
Gin Settings
This dialog box is displayed by selecting Gin in the Settings menu.

Tablet Type
Factory default: MM1201
This option specifies the graphics input device that is attached to your system and the
data format that TeemTalk uses to communicate with it.
TeemTalk incorporates several tablet drivers. The following list includes the baud rate,
data bits, stop bits and parity settings that are automatically set for the tablet type
selected.
MM1201
(9600, 8, 1, Odd)
MM1812
(9600, 8, 1, Odd)
Bitpad-Plus
Summagraphics Bitpad-Plus
(9600, 7, 1, Even)
Calcomp
Calcomp (16 button)

(9600, 7, 1, Even)
Mouse
Mouse
(Uses the communication settings specified
in the Serial Settings dialog box)
Serial Port Device

Factory default: Com 2
This option specifies the serial port to which the Gin device is attached.
7-38
Setup Menus
Gin Tablet Characters
Factory default: Z123
This option specifies the characters sent by the buttons on the mouse or tablet puck for
Gin pick and locate operations. The setting must consist of four characters or no
characters. For a mouse which only has three buttons, the first character is ignored
and subsequent characters correspond to the left, middle and right buttons.
Map Mouse To Joystick
Factory default: Enabled
When this option is selected, any Gin operations which enable or disable the joystick
or keyboard cursor keys will also enable or disable the mouse.
7-39
Setup Menus
Attributes
This dialog box is displayed by selecting Attributes in the Settings menu. It enables
you to specify the colours used in the dialog area and how text with attributes is
displayed.
To change the way a screen element is displayed, select the relevant item from the
Screen Element list box, for example, Bold (BD) for characters with the bold
attribute. The settings of the other options in the dialog box will change to reflect the
settings currently assigned to the screen element, and the Sample Text window will
show how the screen element is actually displayed with these settings.
Text with attributes can be displayed in various ways. For example, characters with
the underline attribute can be displayed as standard (e.g. underlined only), as a
particular colour only (e.g. green without the underline), or with both attribute and a
specific colour (e.g. underlined and green). The Attribute options allow you to
enable or disable any of the attributes normally associated with the currently selected
screen element. The setting of the Use Colours option determines whether or not a
specific colour is assigned to the text attribute.
When the Use Colours option is selected, the colour of the screen element can be
changed by clicking on the required colour block in the palette of Foreground and/
or Background colours. The two palettes enable you to specify a different colour for
text (foreground) and text cell (background). The set of 16 colours displayed can be
customized using the Colour Palette dialog box which is described later.
The following sections describe items in the Attributes dialog box in more detail.
7-40
Setup Menus
Screen Element
This list box enables you to select the screen element for definition.
Normal
Screen
Bold (BD)
Underline (UL )
Flashing (FL)
Inverse (IV)
UL+BD
FL+BD
FL+UL
IV+FL
IV+BD
IV+UL
FL+BD+UL
IV+UL+BD
IV+FL+BD
IV+FL+UL
IV+FL+BD+UL
Attribute
The list of attribute options allow you to enable or disable the actual display of
attributes associated with the selected screen element. Text with the bold attribute
may be displayed as such by checking the Font box when the Screen Element is set
to one of the bold options. Note that text display will be slower when Font is selected
to display characters with the bold attribute as bold instead of a substitute colour.
Use Colours
When selected, the currently selected screen element will be displayed in the colours
highlighted in the Foreground and Background colour palettes. For default display,
deselect this option.
Swap Black/White
This option is not applicable to TeemTalk-05W, -07W or -11W and will therefore be
unselectable.
Inverse Colours
When this option is selected, characters with the inverse attribute will have the text
(foreground) colour swapped with that of the text cell (background).
AutoColour
unselectable.
Ansi Colours Disabled
unselectable.
7-41
Setup Menus
Colours Cleared With Attributes
unselectable.
Attributes Use Normal BG
unselectable.
Customizing The Colour Selection

You can change any of the 16 colours displayed in the Foreground and
Background colour selection boxes. To do this, select the colour you wish to change
in one of the selection boxes then click the Set Colour... button to display the Colour
Palette dialog box.
This provides two methods for specifying a different colour, one visual and the other
numeric. All the settings initially displayed relate to the colour selected in the
Attributes dialog box. When you start changing any of the settings, the Set Colour
box will display the original colour on the left and the new colour on the right.
7-42
Setup Menus
Visual Method
The full range of colours available is displayed in the large colour selection box. A
target cursor is positioned over the currently selected colour. To select a new colour
you can either click the mouse pointer over the colour required or drag the target
cursor over it. The right hand colour of the Set Colour box will change accordingly.
The lightness of the selected colour can be altered by dragging the triangular pointer
up or down the vertical bar to the right. When you have finished, click OK to apply
the change or Cancel to cancel it and return to the Attributes dialog box.
Numeric Value Method

The numeric value of Hue, Lightness and Saturation, or the Red, Green and Blue
percentage values can be entered directly in the text boxes or you can click the arrow
buttons to cycle through the numeric values. The right hand colour of the Set Colour
box will change accordingly. When you have finished, click OK to apply the change
or Cancel to cancel it and return to the Attributes dialog box.
7-43
Setup Menus
Keyboard Macros
This dialog box is displayed by selecting Keyboard Macros in the Settings menu.
The Keyboard Macros dialog box enables you to redefine the function of most of the
keys on your keyboard and shows the mapping of the keyboard for the current
terminal emulation mode.
Two keyboard layouts are displayed. The upper layout corresponds to the keyboard
you are using, which will be one of the following: 101 key, 102 key, 84 key, Digital's
LK250 or LK450, or KEA Systems' PowerStation, depending on the type specified
within Microsoft Windows Setup for your PC.
Note: When an LK250, LK450 or PowerStation keyboard driver is
loaded, the SYSTEM.INI file is scanned by TeemTalk to see
if the string "LK250", "LK450" or "PowerStation" is
present and maps the keyboard accordingly.
The lower layout represents the keyboard associated with the terminal currently
being emulated, as specified in the Emulation Settings dialog box.
Keyboard Mapping
You can show how TeemTalk has mapped your keyboard within the current terminal
emulation mode by setting the Keyboard Action option (between the two layouts) to
7-44
Setup Menus
Show Map, then moving the pointer over a key in the lower layout and holding down
the left mouse button. The key or key combination which emulate the function of the
key you are currently pressing will be displayed in the upper layout as if pressed in.
Note: Control key functions are not shown.
TeemTalk provides two quick and easy ways of changing the default keyboard
mapping to suit your requirements.
Remapping Normal Key Functions

The following method is suitable when the function to be remapped does not require
a combination of keys to be pressed to action it. For example, you can make the F1
key on your keyboard emulate the Insert key of the terminal keyboard being
emulated, but you cannot specify that pressing the keys Alt + F1 together will
perform the Insert key function.
First, set the Keyboard Action option to Map Key, click the key in the lower layout
showing the legend of the function required, then click the key in the upper layout
which you want to assign that function to.
Note that you will now have two keys which emulate the same function, the default
Remapping Key Combination Functions

The following method is suitable for both normal key functions and key combination
functions. For example, you can map the Insert key function to the F1 key on your
keyboard, and you can make the keys Alt + F1 emulate the Help key when pressed
together.
First, click the key in the upper layout (representing your keyboard) to which you
want to assign a function. The Define Key Macro dialog box will be displayed, as
shown below. This example shows how the F1 key is mapped by default.
7-45
Setup Menus
The Predefined Macros option at the bottom of this dialog box enables you to select
from a list of standard functions associated with the current terminal emulation.
Clicking the arrow button will display a list box in which the names of valid key
functions (called virtual key names) are shown.
Note: The Virtual Key Names appendix lists all the functions and
associated virtual key names for each terminal emulation.
Before making a selection from this list box, click the pointer in the text box next to
the key combination that will be required to perform the function, that is, Normal
(key pressed on its own), Shift (key shifted) etc. For example, to assign the Help key
function to the key combination Alt + F1, click the pointer in the text box next to Alt,
display the Predefined Macros list box and scroll through the selection until
VT_HELP is displayed, click the pointer on it then click the Apply button. The
current function of the Alt + F1 key combination will be replaced with the Help
function, indicated in the text box by <VT_HELP>. If you want the mapping of this
key to be saved when you perform a Save Session, make sure the Non-Volatile box
is checked. Click the OK button to activate the change and close the dialog box. Note
that you will now have two keys which emulate the same function, the default
When you have finished remapping the keyboard, click the OK button in the
Keyboard Macros dialog box to close it and cause TeemTalk to assert the changes.
You can save the new keyboard mapping so that TeemTalk will reassert it each time it
is loaded or reset by displaying the Save Session As dialog box, selecting the
Keyboard Macros option, then clicking the OK button.
Programming A Key
Most of the keys on the keyboard may be programmed with up to five definitions
each. Keys that cannot be redefined include Shift, Caps Lock, Alt, Alt Gr and Print
Screen. Both Ctrl keys can be redefined.
To program a key, click the key in the upper layout (which represents your
keyboard). The Define Key Macro dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box
shows the current definitions of all the following combinations for the selected key:
Key
Shift + Key
Control + Key
Control + Shift + Key
Alt + Key
Each key combination may contain a string of up to 127 characters. The combined
total of all the characters that may be programmed into keys is determined by the 127
character limit per definition and the amount of memory available in your PC.
7-46
Setup Menus
All keyboard macros can be saved so that TeemTalk will reassert them each time it is
loaded or reset by displaying the Save Session As dialog box from the File menu,
selecting the Keyboard Macros option, then clicking the OK button.

and M, representing the keys Ctrl + M which, when pressed together would
generate the CR code.
decimal references.

You can program a key to perform the function of a combination or sequence of
keys. For example, you can cause the F1 key to perform the same function as
key definition text box. You may omit the VK_ and VT_ (etc.) parts of the virtual
key name.
To program a key so that it performs the same function as pressing two or more other
keys together, type the < character followed by the virtual key names linked together
with + (plus sign) characters and ending with the > character.
For example, to program the F1 key so that when it is pressed it performs the same
relevant text box:
<ALT+F4>
To program a key so that it performs the same function as pressing a sequence of
must immediately follow the previous enclosed virtual key name with no spaces.
For example, to program the A key so that when it is pressed it performs the same
relevant text box:
<F2><F3><F4>
7-47
Setup Menus

You can enter a command line in a key definition by enclosing it within the ( and )
characters. This enables you to launch an application by just pressing a key. For
example, to program the F1 key so that another instance of TeemTalk-07W is run
when the key is pressed, you would enter the following in the relevant text box:

You can program a key to change the currently selected window or icon (that is the
window or icon to which keyboard and mouse commands will be directed) by
example, to program the F4 key so that the TeemTalk-07W window is selected when
the key is pressed, you would enter the following in the relevant text box:
<"tt07w">

You can program a key to run a script file when pressed by enclosing the name of the
file and any arguments within the <' (left angle bracket and single quote) and '>
For example, to program a key so that it will run the script file myscript.scr and
assign the values value1 and value2 to two variables, you would enter the following:
script files.

A key definition may be actioned locally or transmitted to the host when the key is
pressed. This is determined by the setting of the Local check box next to the
host.
Default Key Definitions

The default definition of a specific key may be reasserted by clicking the Default
button in the Define Key Macro dialog box for that key. The default definition of the
entire keyboard may be reasserted by clicking the Default button in the Keyboard
Macros dialog box.
7-48
Setup Menus
Euro Sign
TeemTalk enables you to generate the euro sign from the keyboard by pressing the
keys Alt + 4 by default. TeemTalk also provides a cross-mapping mechanism to allow
any unused character symbols or string to be cross-mapped to display the euro. This
means, for instance, that a host application needing to display the euro could be
adjusted to send an unused character or character string, which TeemTalk would
convert to the euro symbol. Keyboard mapping is also configurable to allow the input
to the application to be similarly cross-mapped. The cross-mapping configuration is
specified in the Euro Currency Symbol dialog box which is displayed by clicking
the Euro Sign button in the Define Key Macro dialog box.
TeemTalk also provides the ability to print the euro symbol on printers that are euro
compliant, or to send a set of sequences that approximate to that symbol on non-euro
compliant printers. Similarly, data can be copied to or pasted from other Microsoft
Windows desktop applications that are also euro compliant.
7-49
Setup Menus
Soft Buttons
This dialog box is displayed by selecting Soft Buttons in the Settings menu.
These can be programmed so that they perform various functions when clicked.
The soft button display can be switched on or off using the Visible check box.
The soft buttons can be detached as a separate window by deselecting the Attached
option.
of twelve programmable buttons, providing a combined total of 48 programmable
buttons. You can display all four levels at the same time if required. All levels are
view by clicking the Level button.
You can specify how many levels of soft buttons are actually displayed by using the
following initialization file command or command line option:
7-50
buttonlevels=0-4
-bl0-4
Setup Menus
All four levels can be displayed by specifying 4. Specifying 0 will cause no soft
buttons to be displayed.
You can assign a title to the definition set which will be displayed in the leftmost
button in the second row by entering it in the Title text box. The title can consist of
up to seven characters.
By default the buttons on level 1 are defined with functions relating to the Tek
emulation, as described in the Getting Started chapter. You can redefine these
buttons to perfrom other functions if required. Note that the Tek functions assigned to
buttons 6 through 10 by default are not supported by TeemTalk-05W.
Programming A Soft Button

To program a soft button, first select which level or definition set of buttons you wish
to define by selecting the level number in the Level box below the Apply button.
Each button can be assigned a name of up to ten characters which is displayed on the
button in the window. To assign a name, enter it in the Name text box next to the
relevant button number.
The button definition is entered in the Command text box on the same line as the
button number and name. The definition can be up to 80 characters long. The
following sections describe various ways in which you can define the buttons.
When you have finished defining a particular level of soft buttons, either click the
OK button to apply the changes and close the dialog box, or click Apply to apply the
changes without exiting so that you can define another level straight away.
You can save the new button definitions so that TeemTalk will reassert them each time
it is loaded or reset by displaying the Save Session As dialog box, selecting the Soft
Buttons option, then clicking the OK button.

and M, representing the keys Ctrl + M which, when pressed together would generate
the CR code.
decimal references.
7-51
Setup Menus

You can program a soft button to perform the function of a combination or sequence
of keys. For example, you can cause a button to perform the same function as
Command text box. You may omit the VK_ and VT_ parts (etc.) of the virtual key
name.
To program a soft button so that it performs the same function as pressing two or
more other keys together, type the < character followed by the virtual key names
linked together with + characters and ending with the > character.
For example, to program the button B1 so that when it is clicked it performs the same
B1 Command text box:
<ALT+F4>
To program a soft button so that it performs the same function as pressing a sequence
of keys one after the other, enter each virtual key name in the order required,
enclosing each virtual key name with the < and > characters. Each enclosed virtual
key name must immediately follow the previous enclosed virtual key name with no
spaces.
For example, to program the button B2 so that when it is clicked it performs the same
B2 Command text box:
<F2><F3><F4>

You can enter a command line in a soft button definition by enclosing it within the (
and ) characters. This enables you to launch an application by just clicking a button.
For example, to program the button B3 so that another instance of TeemTalk-07W is
run when the button is clicked, you would enter the following in the B3 Command
text box:

You can program a soft button to change the currently selected window or icon (that is
the window or icon to which keyboard and mouse commands will be directed) by
example, to program the button B4 so that the TeemTalk-07W window is selected
7-52
Setup Menus
when the button is clicked, you would enter the following in the B4 Command text
box:
<"tt07w">

You can program a soft button to run a script file when pressed by enclosing the name
of the file and any arguments within the <' (left angle bracket and single quote) and '>
(single quote and right angle bracket) characters. For example, to program a button so
that it will run the script file myscript.scr and assign the values value1 and value2 to
two variables, you would enter the following:
script files.

A soft button definition may be actioned locally or transmitted to the host when the
button is clicked. This is determined by the setting of the Local check box next to the
host.
7-53
Setup Menus
This dialog box is displayed by selecting Mouse Button Action in the Settings menu.
This enables you to specify the function of the left and right mouse buttons when they
are pressed on their own or in conjunction with modifier keys. You can assign up to
six functions to each button. Clicking one of the arrow buttons will display a dropdown list box which lists all the standard functions that can be assigned:
Unassigned
Select
Extend Selection
Edit Copy
Edit Paste
Show Hotspots
Action Hotspot
Move Cursor
Send CR
Send Keyword
Middle Button
Select Rectangle
Select Word
Select and Copy
Cursor Select
The Select function will select all text from the start position to the finish position,
working left to right across the entire width of the display, whereas the Select
Rectangle function will only select text contained within the rectangular area defined
by the start position (top left corner) and the finish position (bottom right corner). The
Select and Copy function is the same as Select but will also copy the selected data to
the Clipboard automatically. The Select Word function will cause the word under the
mouse cursor to be selected.
The Show Hotspots and Action Hotspots functions are described in the Hotspots
chapter. The Send Keyword function is very similar to the hotspot feature. It enables
you to send delimited text displayed on the screen to the host just by clicking on it.
7-54
Setup Menus
Delimiters are the same as for hotspots.
The Move Cursor function can be used in any of the local block modes as a quick
way of positioning the text cursor within a block of text. Move the mouse cursor to
the position where the text cursor is required then click the mouse button (and key
combination) assigned with the Move Cursor function to cause the text cursor to
jump to that location.
The Cursor Select function performs the same way as Move Cursor.
The Middle Button setting enables you to make the left or right button (and key
combination) of a two button mouse emulate the middle button of a three button
mouse.
You can also enter a definition of your own in the text box associated with each
button and key combination. Definitions are entered in the same way as for keyboard
macros and soft buttons.
The setting of the Highlight When Actioned option determines whether or not a
visual indication is given that a function has been actioned when a hotspot is clicked.
The Edit... button becomes active when you select the Show Hotspots or Action
Hotspot setting. Clicking the Edit... button will open a text editor window in which
the contents of the current hotspot definition file will be displayed. This enables you
to make changes without having to leave TeemTalk. The text editor used by default is
the TeemTalk private profile file.
7-55
Setup Menus
Button Tools
This dialog box is displayed by selecting Button Tools in the Settings menu.
This enables you to redefine the button tools displayed in the toolbar or floating button
palette. Up to 64 buttons can be defined. For a complete description of how to use the
toolbar and floating button palette, refer to the chapter entitled The Toolbar.
A button tool is defined in two stages. The first stage is to specify the button bitmap
for display in the toolbar and the second stage is to assign a function to it.
Adding Button Bitmaps

Clicking the arrow button in the Current Tool box will display a list box showing all
the button bitmaps in the order displayed in the toolbar, together with their functions.
The Current Tool will be highlighted in this list. When you add a new button to the
toolbar it is positioned to the left of the button currently selected in this list. Select the
current tool then close the list box by clicking the arrow button again.
To add a new button, select a button bitmap from the Buttons list box then click the
Insert at Current button. Note that the function of this new button will be the same
as that of the previously selected button tool until you redefine it. You can insert a
space before the current button tool as it is displayed in the toolbar by selecting
[Space] in the Commands list box then clicking the Insert at Current button.
You are not restricted to the set of predefined button bitmaps displayed in the
Buttons list box. You can add your own customised buttons to the bottom of the list
by clicking the Add Custom... button. This will display the Load Custom Bitmap
dialog box which enables you to select a bitmap file from which a button will be
automatically generated.
7-56
Setup Menus
Specify the name of the bitmap file to use then click the OK button. The dialog box
will close and you will see the new button bitmap highlighted at the bottom of the
Buttons list box.
If you want to delete a custom button from the Buttons list box, select the button
bitmap then click the Delete Custom button. DO NOT click the Delete Current
button as this will remove the currently selected button tool from the toolbar. Note
that you cannot delete the predefined button icons displayed by default.
Assigning Functions To Buttons

You can assign a variety of functions to the buttons. You can either enter a definition
of your own in the same way as for keyboard macros and soft buttons, or you can
select a menu command from the Commands list box.
The buttons displayed in the toolbar by default are defined with some of the functions
listed in the setup menus. (Refer to the chapter entitled The Toolbar for details.)
These enable you to quickly action a command or display a setup dialog box without
having to display the menu first. The Commands list box displays all the menu items
that can be assigned to the buttons.
To assign a function to a button, make sure that the button bitmap required is
displayed in the Current Tool box, enter the new definition in the associated text
box or select a menu command from the Commands list box, then click the Change
Current button to action the change. The toolbar will not be updated until you click
the OK button to close the dialog box.
Removing Button Tools

You can remove individual button tools from the toolbar or you can remove the entire
toolbar and floating button palette from the display.
A button tool is removed by selecting it in the Current Tool list box then clicking
the Delete Current button. To remove the toolbar and floating button palette from
the display, deselect the Visible check box.
7-57
Setup Menus
Help Menu
Help Contents
Selecting this option will display a help window listing the contents of help for
TeemTalk. Clicking an underlined topic or pressing Tab to highlight the topic then
pressing Enter will cause the window to display information on that topic.
Text that has a continuous underline will cause another topic to be displayed when
clicked, while text with a dotted underline will display a small temporary window
with a description of the term.
How To Use Help
This option will display a window which provides information on how to use help.
About TeemTalk...
Selecting this option will cause a dialog box to be displayed in which details of your
version of TeemTalk will be shown. To close the box, click the OK button.
7-58
File Transfer
8
File Transfer
This chapter describes how to transfer files using the Kermit,
XMODEM, XMODEM-1K, YMODEM Batch, ZMODEM and
ASCII protocols.
Introduction
TeemTalk includes a file transfer utility which enables two-way file transfer between
the host and your PC. A range of file transfer protocols are supported to provide
compatibility with virtually any host computer. Several transfers may be run
simultaneously in the background while you continue to use other Windows
applications.
Protocols Supported
Kermit
Kermit is a packet-oriented file transfer protocol which enables binary files to be
transferred between 7 and 8 bit systems. Multiple file transfers and data compression
is supported.
XMODEM
XMODEM is a block-oriented protocol which enables a single file to be transferred
at a time in 128 byte blocks. It uses two-way communications and checks for errors
using a cycling redundancy check unless the host does not respond, in which case a
checksum is used.
XMODEM-1K
XMODEM-1K is similar to XMODEM, but uses 1024 byte data blocks, speeding up
transmission.
8-1
File Transfer
YMODEM Batch
YMODEM Batch is similar to XMODEM-1K, but enables several files to be
transferred. It checks for errors using a cycling redundancy check only.
ZMODEM
ZMODEM is an advanced development of YMODEM which enables much faster
multiple file transfer with enhanced error detection and aborted transfer resumption.
The zmodemStartup initialization command or -zm command line option can be
used to make TeemTalk check incoming data for a remote ZMODEM startup sequence
then automatically start a file transfer.
Note: XMODEM, YMODEM Batch and ZMODEM require a
communication setting of 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and no
parity. These settings will automatically be used for the
transfer, after which the original settings will be reasserted.
ASCII
ASCII file transfer enables characters to be sent with no handshaking (unless XON/
XOFF is enabled) or error checking.
ICL FTF
The ICL FTF protocol supported by TeemTalk for Windows 3.1x can be used in any
terminal emulation mode. It requires the DOSLANTI TSR to be loaded, but it is not
necessary for the user interface providing you do not attempt to initiate a transfer.
Refer to the ICL FTF File Transfer chapter for details on how to use it.
8-2
File Transfer
Sending Files
The following procedure is used to transfer files from your PC to the host.
1. Start the transfer procedure on the host computer and specify that
files are to be received.
2. Display the TeemTalk File menu on your PC and select File
Transfer... to display the Initiate File Transfer dialog box.
3. Select the transfer protocol you wish to use in the Transfer

Protocol list box.
4. If you want to change the default parameter settings for the
chosen transfer protocol, click the relevant Parameters button
and make your selections in the displayed dialog box then click
OK. See the section entitled Setting Protocol Parameters later in
this chapter for details.
Note: If the file transfer fails it is probably because of differences
between the local and remote parity and the word size.
5. Select Send in the How box.
6. Click the Start button to display the Send File dialog box.
8-3
File Transfer
7. Specify the directory which contains the file(s) for transfer in the
right list box by clicking on one of the path options and clicking
the Select button until the full directory path displayed above the
list box is correct. The files contained in this directory will be
displayed in the left list box.
8. Display the name(s) of the file(s) to send in the left list box, either
by using the scroll bar or by specifying a filename type (e.g. *.exe
for all files ending with .exe) in the Search specification text box
then pressing Return or clicking the Select button.
Note: Using the Search function will cause all filenames
displayed in the list box to be automatically selected.
9. Select the file to send by clicking on the filename in the left list
box to highlight it. If more than one file is to be sent, hold down
the Ctrl key while clicking each additional filename. If the files
for selection are listed contiguously, point to the first file then
hold down the Shift key while dragging the mouse.
10. Once all files to send have been highlighted, click the Send
button to start transferring data to the host. A window will be
displayed showing how the file transfer is progressing. The
transfer will continue until all selected files have been received
by the host or the transfer is cancelled (refer to the Cancelling A
File Transfer section later).
8-4
File Transfer
Receiving Files
The following procedure is used to transfer files from the host to your PC.
1. Start the transfer procedure on the host computer and specify that
files are to be sent.
2. Display the TeemTalk File menu on your PC and select File
Transfer... The Initiate File Transfer dialog box will be
displayed.
3. Select the transfer protocol you wish to use in the Transfer

Protocol list box.
4. If you want to change the default parameter settings for the
chosen transfer protocol, click the relevant Parameters button
and make your selections in the displayed dialog box then click
the OK button. (The ASCII protocol requires the Discard partial
file option in the General Parameters dialog box to be
unselected.)
Note: If the file transfer fails it is probably because of differences
between the local and remote parity and the word size.
5. If you wish to specify a different local directory for received files,
click the Local button to display the Local System Directory /
Change Directory dialog box, then specify the new directory as
described in the Local Operation section at the end of this
chapter.
8-5
File Transfer
6. If the kermit protocol is being used and the host kermit is in
remote mode, click the Remote button in the Initiate File
Transfer dialog box, then the Get button in the Remote
Operations dialog box to specify the file to be received,
otherwise, click the Receive button in the Initiate File Transfer
dialog box.
Note: The program waits for the arrival of one or more files from
the host.
7. Click the Start button. If you selected the XMODEM,
XMODEM-1K or ASCII protocol, a dialog box will be displayed
in which you specify the name of the file to be received. All the
other protocols do not require this as the filename is provided by
the sender.
When the transfer begins, a window will be displayed indicating
the status of the file transfer.
On completion of the transfer, or if the transfer is cancelled (refer

to the next section), an audible tone will sound and appropriate
messages will be displayed. (ASCII requires user intervention
and will continue to transfer data until you cancel it.)
Note: Once the file transfer is initiated you can minimize the
window to run it in the background.
8-6
File Transfer
Cancelling A File Transfer

When a file transfer is in progress, the File Transfer Data window will be displayed.
This will provide information on the progress of the file transfer similar to that shown
below.
Clicking the Cancel button will display another dialog box with four cancel options.
Selecting Cancel File then clicking the YES button will cause transfer of the current
file to be cancelled by sending a 'Cancel File' message.
Selecting Cancel Batch then clicking YES will cause transfer of the current file and
all remaining files to be cancelled by sending a 'Cancel Batch' message.
Selecting Cancel Nicely then clicking YES will stop the transfer by sending an error
packet with a 'Transfer Cancelled' message.
Selecting Cancel Abrubtly then clicking YES will stop the transfer immediately
without any messages being sent.
Clicking the NO button will close the Cancel dialog box.
8-7
File Transfer
Setting Protocol Parameters

General Parameters
Clicking the General... button in the Initiate File Transfer dialog box will cause the
General Parameters dialog box to be displayed. This enables you to set various
parameters for any of the transfer protocols.
Once the settings have been selected, the initialization file can be modified to reflect
the changes under the heading [TeemTalkFTU,Kermit] by checking the Save
Settings box then clicking the OK button.
Timer
When this option is selected, if no packets have been received for a certain period of
time then a retry will be attempted. The protocol will be exited if the number of
retries exceeds that specified by the Retry limit option.
Warning bell
When this option is selected, an audible tone will sound when a transfer is completed
or cancelled.
Discard partial file
This option determines what happens to a file when an error condition occurs or the
Reset or Cancel button is clicked during a file transfer. When selected, the part of the
file already transferred will be deleted. When unchecked, the part of the file that has
been transferred will be kept.
8-8
File Transfer
Duplicate file warning
When this is selected, if an incoming file has the same name as an existing one it will
be renamed to avoid overwriting it. A unique generation number will append or
replace part of the old name.
Send delay for first packet
Factory default: 0
The setting of this option determines the length of time in seconds before the first
packet is sent when sending a file. The time delay can be set to any number of
seconds between 0 and 63, inclusive.
Retry limit
Factory default: 10
The setting of this option determines the number of retries that will be performed
before the protocol is exited. The retry limit can be set to any number between 1 and
63, inclusive.
8-9
File Transfer
Kermit Parameters
Clicking the Kermit... button in the Initiate File Transfer dialog box will cause the
Kermit Parameters dialog box to be displayed. This enables you to set parameters
specific to the Kermit protocol.
the changes under the heading [TeemTalkFTU,Kermit] by checking the Save
Most of the settings in this dialog box affect how outbound and inbound packets are
treated. These settings may need to be reflected by the remote Kermit as well.
Start of Packet
Factory default: CTRL-A (i.e. SOH)
This specifies the character which is used to mark the start of a Kermit packet. The
character should be changed if the remote host intercepts it.
Timeout in secs
Factory default: 5
This specifies how long the remote Kermit should wait before timing out.
Padding count
Factory default: 0
This specifies the number of padding characters to be sent before the packet.
Padding char
Factory default: CTRL-@ (i.e. NULL)
This specifies the character to use for padding.
8-10
File Transfer
End of line char
Factory default: CTRL-M (i.e. CR)
This specifies the character which terminates the packet.
Quote char
Factory default: #
This specifies the character used to indicate that the next character is in the decimal
range 0 - 31, 128 - 159, or is a delete character (127).
Packet size
Factory default: 80
This specifies the maximum byte size of a packet from the sequence number byte and
including the checksum characters.
Checksum Type
Factory default: 1-Byte
This specifies the type of checksum computation used. 1-Byte and 2-Byte selects the
standard Kermit 1-byte and 2-byte checksum computations, respectively. 3-ByteCRC selects a cyclic redundancy checksum computation which is useful when
operating on noisy lines or transferring large packets.
Prompt For Filename
This option enables you to specify a different file name for each received file.
When enabled, a dialog box will be displayed before each file is sent when
performing a Kermit Send File from the host. The dialog box displays the name of
the file about to be transferred and gives you the opportunity to change it. If the
filename is acceptable, clicking the OK or Cancel button will cause the transfer to
continue, using the filename displayed. If you wish to change the name of the file,
edit the name in the text box before clicking OK. Clicking Cancel will revert back to
the original filename.
Force Print of File
Selecting this option will cause data received as part of a Kermit transfer to be
directed to the printer (through print) instead of a file.
8-11
File Transfer
ASCII Parameters
Clicking the ASCII... button in the Initiate File Transfer dialog box will cause the
ASCII Parameters dialog box to be displayed. This enables you to set parameters
specific to the ASCII protocol.
the changes under the heading [TeemTalkFTU,ASCII] by checking the Save
Note: The ASCII protocol has additional parameters which can be
set in another dialog box by pressing the General... button.
This dialog box was described earlier.
CR Translation
Factory default: CR
This determines how carriage return characters are interpreted. When set to None, all
carriage returns are removed before data is transferred. When set to CR, carriage
returns are transmitted as they are. When set to CR/LF, every carriage return
character will be appended with a line feed character.
Note: On a PC most text files are delimited by a CR/LF sequence,
whereas most mainframes and other systems expect ASCII
files delimited only with a CR.
LF Translation
Factory default: LF
This determines how line feed codes are interpreted. When set to None, all line feeds
are removed before data is transferred. When set to LF, line feeds are transmitted as
they are. When set to LF/CR, every line feed character will be appended with a
carriage return character.
8-12
File Transfer
Line Pacing Character
This specifies the pacing character used to indicate that the host or PC is ready to
receive the next line of data.
Line Pacing Time
Factory default: 0
This specifies the time in 1/10 seconds that the program will pause between each line
transmission.
Expand Blank Lines
The setting of this check box determines how the host interprets blank lines
encountered in a data transmission.
When the box is unchecked, lines will be uploaded as they exist. The host will
interpret a blank line as an end of message marker.
When the box is checked, a space will be added to lines that contain only a CR or
CR/LF code. This enables lines of text to be spaced out.
8-13
File Transfer
ZMODEM Parameters
Clicking the Zmodem... button in the Initiate File Transfer dialog box will cause the
ZMODEM Parameters dialog box to be displayed. This enables you to set
parameters specific to the ZMODEM protocol. The Send settings inform the remote
end how to treat the data that will be sent to it. The Receive settings will override any
Send settings specified at the remote end.
the changes under the heading [TeemTalkFTU,ZMODEM] by checking the Save
The zmodemStartup private profile file command or -zm command line option can
be used to make TeemTalk check incoming data for a remote ZMODEM startup
sequence then automatically start a file transfer using the settings specified in this
dialog box. Note that the transfer protocol selected in the Initiate File Transfer
dialog box will be ignored.
Data Conversion
This specifies whether or not the file being transferred is converted to ASCII or
Binary format at the receiving end, or remains unchanged (None).
8-14
File Transfer
The Resume option enables you to send the remainder of a file if the transfer process
is interrupted, for example if data blocks were missed or the connection was lost.
This saves you having to retransmit the entire file again.
File Transfer Action
Factory default: Default
This specifies what action is to be taken by the receiving end on files that are
transferred.
Selecting Default will use the action specified by the receiving end.
Newer or Longer will cause files to be transferred if they do not exist in the
destination directory and will replace files with the same name if the transfer files are
more recent or contain more data.
CRC Different will cause the source and destination files to be compared and files
will only be transferred if the file lengths or polynomials differ.
Append will cause the contents of the transfer file to be appended to the end of the
file with the same name in the destination directory.
Replace will cause the contents of the transfer file to replace that of the file with the
same name in the destination directory
Newer will cause files to be transferred if they do not exist in the destination
directory and will replace files with the same name if the transfer files are more
recent.
Length Differs will cause files to be transferred if they do not exist in the destination
directory and will replace files with the same name if the file sizes or dates differ.
Absent will cause files to be transferred if they are absent from the destination
directory.
Receive Existing File Only
When this option is selected, only files with the same name in the destination
directory are transferred.
Change . to / in Filename
This option enables you to specify that all . (period) characters in the name of a
transfer file are converted to / (forward slash) characters.
Send Full Pathname
The setting of this option determines whether or not the full pathname associated
with a transfer file is sent.
8-15
File Transfer
Remote Command
Factory default: Not specified
This enables you to enter a command that will be sent to the remote end to initiate the
file transfer. If a remote command is specified, this will be sent to the host with a
terminating carriage return character before the transfer is started.
Window Size
When a file transfer has been initiated, ZMODEM will send data continuously to the
receiving end. If the receiving end is slower, then data will be stored on the network.
This may cause a problem if an error occurs because the message will take longer to
get through to the sender due to the amount of data still waiting on the network.
This option enables you to overcome the problem by limiting the amount of data that
is stored on the network before waiting for an acknowledgement from the receiver.
The window size relates to the network area taken up by the transfer data. A setting
of 0 (zero) specifies that the window size is unlimited. Any other numeric value
entered here will be rounded to 256 bytes or the nearest multiple of 64 if higher.
Escape Control Codes
The setting of this option determines whether control codes are sent on their own
(default) or preceded by the escape code CTRL X.
The escape code prevents problems caused by the removal of control codes during
transmission. When this option is selected, control codes are sent as readable
characters preceded by CTRL X.
8-16
File Transfer
Kermit Remote Operations
When Kermit is selected as the transfer protocol, the Remote button in the Initiate
File Transfer dialog box provides access to commands that enable you to perform
various operations on the host. Kermit has to be operating in server mode on the host
for remote commands to function. A command is initiated by selecting it in the
Kermit Remote Operations dialog box then clicking the Action... button.
Most commands will cause a dialog box to be displayed in which you have to enter
information, though if the OK button is not initially dimmed then the information is
not essential for the command to function. A window will display the results of
commands. If the results are extensive, an Edit window will display them, enabling
you to edit and even transfer them to another Windows application.
Get
This will display a dialog box in which you specify the name of a file to be obtained
from the host.
Command
This enables you to specify a command which is to be executed by the host. The
command must be entered using a valid syntax for the host.
Change Dir
This enables you to specify a different working directory for the host and enter your
password. If no directory is specified, the host will execute its default action for this
command. UNIX will enter the home directory.
8-17
File Transfer
Directory
This enables you to specify which filenames are listed from the host's working
directory. Clicking OK when nothing has been specified will cause all filenames to
be displayed.
Erase
This enables you to specify the names of files to be deleted from the host's working
directory.
Help
This enables you to specify the topic on which help is required. If nothing is entered
then clicking OK will cause the remote commands understood by the host to be
displayed.
Space
This enables you to specify the area for the host to display disk usage information on.
Type
This enables you to specify the names of files to be typed on the host.
Who
This enables you to enquire who is currently using the host.
Finish
When this command is actioned, the remote Kermit will exit server mode.
Logout
This command will execute a logout on the remote host.
Bye
This command will execute a logout on the remote host and close the Kermit
program.
8-18
File Transfer
Local Operation
Clicking the Local button in the Initiate File Transfer dialog box will display a
dialog box which enables you to specify the default local directory for sending and
receiving files. The current directory is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box.
The Specification text box is used to specify which files in the current directory are
displayed in the Files selection box. For example, to display all the files with the
extension .exe, type *.exe then click the Dir / cd button.
To change the current directory, scroll through the available directories in the
Directories list box, then either click the name of the directory once so that it is
highlighted and click the Dir / cd button, or double-click the name of the directory.
The Files list box will be updated accordingly and the new directory will be
displayed at the bottom of the dialog box. Click the Cancel button to action the
change and close the dialog box.
Note: The Cancel button in this particular dialog box functions as
an OK button.
8-19
File Transfer
Notes
8-20
9
This chapter describes the ICL FTF file transfer utility supported by
TeemTalk for Windows 3.1x in all terminal emulation modes.
Configuration Requirements
1. FTF requires the DOSLANTI TSR to be loaded, but it is not necessary for the user
interface, providing you do not attempt to initiate a transfer.
2. The list of hosts that can be selected from the FTF dialog box depends on entries in
the private profile file OSLANSVF.INI. This file is described in the OSLAN
section of the Network Connection chapter in the Networking Guide. The
LocalTSAP, RemoteTSAP and RemoteLSAP entries for each host must be as
shown in the example below.
[nigelpc]
RemoteDteAddress=020723feda67
LocalTSAP=0881
- this entry must be the same for all hosts
RemoteTSAP=0882 - this entry must be the same for all hosts
RemoteLSAP=fe
- this entry must be the same for all hosts
3. For an ICL host system to initiate file transfers to FTF it is necessary that the
TFRFOUT command is used. The FTTEXTOPTION parameter should be set
to the following:
"RECPRESERVE=NO,TFORMATING=0001"
4. The following line must be inserted under the Protocol VCSTS section of
NET.CFG:
LOCAL_LSAP
0xFE
9-1
Sending & Receiving Files

The following procedure is used to transfer files between your PC and the remote host.
1. Run the File Transfer Responder on the remote host computer.
2. Display the TeemTalk File menu on your PC and select File Transfer... to display the Initiate File Transfer dialog box. Select ICL FTF
in the Transfer Protocol list box. The following dialog box will be
displayed.
Note: If you close this dialog box, you can display it again by
clicking the Start button in the Initiate File Transfer dialog
box when Transfer Protocol is set to ICL FTF.
3. Select the name of the remote host in the Host Name list box.
4. If you need to provide Authorisation for the remote host, enter the
required User Name and User Password. Note that the password will
be echoed as a series of asterisks.
5. In the Local Filename text box, specify the name and directory path
of the file on your PC that is to be sent to the remote host or written to,
depending on the transfer direction. You can either type in the
filename or click on Browse to view the PC's directory structure and
make a selection. Note that if you only enter the filename and not the
directory, then FTF will assume the file is in the directory in which
TeemTalk was installed.
6. In the Remote Filename text box, specify the name of the file on the
remote host that is to be read or written to, depending on the transfer
direction. This can be the same name as the local filename.
9-2

7. If the file to be transferred is a binary file, change the Data Type
setting to Binary, otherwise leave it as Text. No translation of the data
will be performed during the transfer.
8. Specify the Direction of the file transfer by selecting To Host or From
Host.
9. If you want to change the default parameter settings for the file transfer,
click on the During Transfer button to specify the transfer of the data
in more detail, or the At Remote Host button for options relating to the
remote host. These options are described in the following sections.
10. If you are sending a file to the remote host, click on the Start Transfer
button. If you are receiving a file from the host, click on the Start
Responder button. Note that clicking Start Responder will also
enable the remote host to get files from your PC. This can be run at
any time and will simply run as a background task.
When the transfer begins, an icon of an open blue book appears. When the transfer
has been completed, the book closes and a cross or a tick on the icon indicates
whether or not the transfer was successful.
You can maximize the book icon at any time to display information on the state
of the transfer. When the transfer is in progress a count of bytes transferred is
updated. Any messages relating to the transfer, such as failure messages from the
remote file transfer responder, are displayed in the window.
9-3
Transfer Options
This dialog box is displayed by clicking the During Transfer... button in the FTF
dialog box.
Text Formatting
Factory default: Negotiate
This specifies the method of formatting text during the file transfer. Clicking on the
arrow button will display a list of all the formatting methods supported from which
you can make a selection.
9-4
EOR=>, no FEs
End of record implies new line action. No actions are implied

by embedded characters.
EOR=>NL+FEs
End of record implies new line action. The formatting actions

CR, LF, NL, BS, FF, NP may also be represented by
embedded characters.
EOR=>NP+NL
End of record implies new page action. The formatting action

NL may be represented by embedded characters.
EOR=>NP+FEs
End of record implies new page action. The formatting

actions CR, LF, NL, BS, FF, NP may also be represented by
embedded characters.
NL
No formatting action is specified by end of record but the

formatting action NL may be represented by embedded
characters.

FEs
No formatting action is specified by end of record but the

formatting actions CR, LF, NL, BS, FF, NP may be
represented by embedded characters.
Negotiate
FTF negotiates with the remote host to decide on the text

formatting required.
No formatting
No formatting actions are implied by end of record or by

emdedded characters.
Maximum Record Size

This specifies the maximum record size to be found in the data being transmitted.
Records that are larger than this will be fragmented. This may have the effect of
inserting spurious new lines depending on the Text Formatting setting.
Maximum Transfer Size
Factory default: Unspecified
This specifies the maximum transfer size that will be allowed on this transfer.
Timeout Interval(s)
This specifies the timeout, in seconds, that FTF uses to decide when a transfer should
be abandoned.
Horizontal Tab Settings
Factory default: Unspecified
This text box enables you to specify a pattern to be used for expanding tabs to spaces
by typing spaces where there are no tab stops and an asterisk where there
is one. A short pattern repeats up to the end of the line.
DRS Compatibility
This option should be selected if a DRS system is involved in the transfer. It tells the
FTF initiator and responder to make allowances for the limited level of implementation in the standard DRS File Transfer product. Checking this box will not prevent
transfers from working with VME, which has a full implementation.
Retry Connect
When this option is selected, FTF will retry failed connect requests indefinitely,
otherwise, FTF will stop if it cannot connect to the remote host.
9-5

Debug Transfer
This option should only be selected under the guidance of a Pericom representative. It
causes diagnostic information to be produced which is used for troubleshooting purposes.
Preserve Record Boundaries
Select this option if you want the receiving system to preserve the record boundaries in
the transmitted data when it writes the file to disk. Note that the
MS-DOS filestore does not support record-oriented files.
Preserve Horizontal Tabs
Select this option if you want the receiving system to preserve horizontal tabs in the
transmitted data when it writes the file to disk, otherwise tabs may be expanded to
spaces.
9-6
Remote Host Options
This dialog box is displayed by clicking the At Remote Host... button in the FTF
dialog box.
Remote File Operation
Factory default: Make or replace
This specifies what operation should be performed on the file. Click on the arrow
button to display a list of operations supported, then double-click to select the mode
you want to use. The modes which are available are as follows:
Make
The file must not exist on the remote system and will be
created. If the file is being sent to VME, this will cause a new
generation to be created if the file already exists.
Replace
The file must already exist on the remote system and it will be
replaced by the file to be transferred.
Make or replace
The file will be created on the remote system if it does not

already exist, but will replace an existing file of the same
name. This is the mode of access used if you select the direction of transfer To Host in the main FTF dialog box.
Append
The file must exist on the remote system and the data
transferred will be appended to it.
Make or append
The file will be created on the remote system if it does not

already exist, but if it does, the transferred data will be appended to it.
9-7

Execute
The file, which must be SCL or VME, will be submitted for

execution. See also Special options.
Print
The file, which must be text, will be printed by the remote

system after the transfer has completed. See also Special
Options. This mode is used if you select direction To Host in
the main FTF dialog box and Print in this dialog box.
Read and remove The file must exist on the remote system. After being
transferred to the local system, it will be deleted on the
remote system.
Read
The file must exist on the remote system and will be

transferred to the local system. This mode is used if you
select direction From Host in the main FTF dialog box.
Destructive read
The file must exist on the remote system and will be erased as
it is transferred to the local system. This mode may not be
supported by the remote responder.
File Password
This text box enables you to enter a file password if one is required before you are
allowed to do a file transfer.
Information Message
This text box enables you to enter a message that may be logged in the remote system's journal, depending on the remote implementation.
Account
This text box enables you to specify an account if required before you can do a file
transfer.
Account Password
This text box enables you to enter an account password if one is required before you
are allowed to do a file transfer.
Output Device Type
This enables you to specify the device to be used for output when you selected Print
for the remote file operation. If you are transmitting to VME, the value of this parameter is a property associated with the device to be used for output as specified in the
unit description.
Output Device Qualifier
This text box enables you to enter a qualifying string to the device to be used for
output when you selected Print for the remote action. If you are transmitting to VME
this will be interpreted as an identifier for printer stationery.
9-8

Text Storage Code
Factory default: Host Default
This specifies the code in which data is stored at the remote system. Usually you can
leave this set to Host Default so that the remote system decides for itself what code
the data is stored in.
Print
When selected, this will cause the file to be printed by the remote host after it has
been received.
Special Options
This enables you to specify any special options to be actioned by the remote system.
If you are transmitting to VME you can specify special options in the following
format:
keyword=value[,keyword=value,...]
The relevant keywords are:
ALL
influences the placement of new fully catalogued files
PRE
B - Transfer records map on to physical blocks

R - Transfer records map on to CTM records
FDE
File description to be used
For new fully catalogued files, the description used will be :STD.STDM, modified by
one or more of the following values, provided that at least one of them is supplied:
BLO
CLA
RMI
RMA
RTY
ORG
BLOCKSIZE
CLASS
RMIN
RMAX
RTYPE
ORG
LOC For spool requests, defines the location at which the output is required.
PRF
For spool (VME/B only) and job requests, defines the profile under
which they should run.
Action Message
The message entered in this text box may be displayed to the remote operator when
the transfer begins, depending on the remote system (not for VME).
9-9
Notes
9-10
FTP File Transfer
10
FTP File Transfer
This chapter describes the FTP file transfer utility for TCP/IP
connections.
The Transfer Procedure

The basic procedure for transferring files is described below. Following sections
describe the various options available in detail. Note that FTP only operates on the
Windows Sockets stack.
1. Display the File menu and select FTP. The presence of all available drives
including floppy disk drives and network drives will be checked before the
TTWFTP window is displayed. Note that this may take a few seconds.
10-1
FTP File Transfer

The left hand list box will display the contents of the local home directory on
your current drive by default. The drive selection list box above it enables you to
specify a different disk drive.
2. To make a remote host connection, display the Connection dialog box either by
clicking the following button in the toolbar, or by selecting Connect to Host in
the Session menu.
3. Enter the Host name, Login details and Password relevant for the host you wish
to connect to (on some systems you may be required to enter the Account as
well). Specify the type of operating system used by the remote host by selecting
one of the following from the System list box:
Auto
VAX UCX V1
VAX UCX V2
VAX UCX
VAX MultiNet
NT
UNIX
Tandem
VAX TCPWare
Prime
IBM (MVS)
Dos
HP3000
AS400
KNET/MVS
IBM (Interlink)
Auto will cause FTP to automatically select the appropriate operating system and
this setting will be suitable in most cases. Note that some DOS based FTP servers
cannot automatically be resolved, so it is advisable to select Dos when you know
the target server is based on a DOS machine. VAX UCX applies to versions
higher than V2.
10-2
FTP File Transfer

The Local and Remote Directory boxes enable you to specify the start directories
(and drive name if required) that FTP will automatically attempt to locate and
display in the TTWFTP window when a session is connected. The normal default
directory (home) will be displayed if no directory is specified or the directory is
not accessible.
Click the Connect button at the top right corner of this dialog box. TeemTalk will
attempt to connect to the specified host. If the connection is successful, you will
be returned to the TTWFTP window after a few seconds.
If you specified a particular local directory in the Connection dialog box then
this will be displayed in the left hand list box, otherwise the home directory is
displayed by default.
The right hand list box will display the contents of the remote host directory,
which will be the home directory by default if you did not specify a particular
remote directory in the Connection dialog box. If you did specify a remote
directory, then FTP will attempt to access and display it. If unsuccessful, then the
normal default directory will be displayed. Note that Tandem will not list
subdirectory information. The ftp> box at the bottom of the window will display
messages about each operation as it is performed.
You can display information about the system you are currently connected to in
the status line at the bottom of the window by selecting the first item in the
Remote Directory list box. The status line can also display information on the
currently selected file or the first file in a group of selected files.
10-3
FTP File Transfer

4. If you want to save the session configuration for future connection, display the
Configure menu and select Save Settings on Exit. This is a toggle selection
which will display a tick mark when enabled.
5. Display the directory containing the file(s) to be transferred and the destination
directory in the Local and Remote Directory list boxes as required. The contents
of subdirectories can be displayed by by double-clicking the mouse pointer on
the folder icons or names. The directory path on the remote host can be specified
by entering it in the Remote Directory text box then clicking the Apply button
or pressing the Return key.
Note that the directory structure of the AS400 operating system consists of
libraries/files.members. Changing the directory changes the library. Doubleclicking a file name (folder) will display its members (documents).
6. Select the data format required for the file transfer in the list box above the Local
Directory details.
ASCII is generally used for document files and Binary for executables or nonvolatile files. Tenex is a specialist format for transfer to Tenex type machines.
7. Select the file(s) or directories to be transferred in the relevant directory list box.
A single item (file or directory) is selected by clicking the mouse pointer
anywhere on the line containing its name. Two or more contiguous items can be
selected by holding down the Shift key while clicking on them. Non-contiguous
items can be selected by holding down the Ctrl key then clicking on them.
8. When you have selected the file(s) or directories to be transferred, place the
mouse pointer on a selected item, hold down the left mouse button and drag the
pointer across to the opposite directory list box so that it rests on the icon or file
contents of the destination directory, then release the mouse button.
The Confirm Copy Files dialog box will be displayed. The From box displays
the name and location of the file or directory to be transferred. The To box shows
the name that the transferred file or directory will have at the destination. By
default this is the same as the source, but you can change the name here.
10-4
FTP File Transfer
If the current directory contains subdirectories that you wish to transfer, check the
Include Subdirectories check box. This will ensure that FTP creates the relevant
subdirectories on the destination drive.
Note: A new Confirm Copy Files dialog box will appear for each
subdirectory when it is opened ready for transferring its
contents. The dialog box will close when the relevant items
in its subdirectory have been transferred.
Clicking the Yes button will transfer the named file or directory then wait for
confirmation for the next if applicable.
Usually, clicking Yes To All will copy all files and subdirectories from that
directory down without waiting for further confirmation. However, if you are
already in a subdirectory then an additional Yes To All Parent Directories
Also? box will appear. Clicking No will transfer the remaining files and any
subdirectories from the current position in the directory tree without waiting for
further confirmation, then return you to the next directory up. Clicking Yes will
transfer all the files and subdirectories from the original starting point without
waiting for further confirmation.
Clicking No will cancel the named file or directory while allowing the next file or
directory in the selection to be displayed for confirmation.
Usually, clicking Cancel will cancel the selection and close the dialog box.
However, if you are in a subdirectory then a Cancel Parent Directories Also?
box will appear. Clicking No will cancel the transfer at the current position in the
directory tree and the next directory up will be displayed ready to continue with
the transfer. Clicking Yes will terminate all transfers.
9. When you have finished transferring files, disconnect from the host either by
clicking the following button in the toolbar, or by selecting Disconnect from
Host in the Session menu.
10. To close the TTWFTP window, display the File menu and select Exit.
10-5
FTP File Transfer

Note that if you try to exit without disconnecting from the host, the following
message box will be displayed:
Clicking Yes will disconnect from the host then close the TTWFTP window.
10-6
FTP File Transfer
Menu & Toolbar Options

Five menus can be displayed from the menu bar, four of which are shown below. The
fifth menu, Help, enables you to display the software version number.
Fi
le
Fi
en
et
el
D
op
C
le
R Cre am s
em
at
e
e
Fi
ot
D
e
ire le
C
ha
c
ng tory
e
M
od
e
os
H
os
H
m
ro
To
tF
ct
ne
ec
nn
on
D
is
co
The buttons on the toolbar provide a quick way of performing functions or displaying
dialog boxes without having to use the menus.
The following sections describe each of the options available.
The File Menu
Copy
This will display a dialog box which enables you to duplicate a file on the local PC.
10-7
FTP File Transfer
Delete
This will display a message box to confirm that you want to delete the currently
selected file(s) or directory on the local PC or remote host. Pressing the Delete key
will have the same effect. Note that directories have to be empty before they can be
deleted.
Clicking the Yes button will delete the named file or directory then wait for
confirmation for the next if more than one file was selected.
Clicking Yes to All will cause all selected files to be deleted without waiting for
additional confirmation.
Clicking No will cancel the named file while allowing the next file in the selection to
be displayed for confirmation.
Clicking Cancel will cancel the selection and close the dialog box.
Note: You can prevent the deletion of files and directories by
including a command in the FTP initialization file. Refer to
the FTP Initialization File Entries section at the end of this
Rename
This will display a dialog box which enables you to change the name of a file or
directory on the local PC.
10-8
FTP File Transfer

Create Directory
This will display a dialog box which enables you to create a new directory (or library
on AS400) on the local PC or remote host.
Remote Change Mode

This will display a dialog box which enables you to change the permission settings
available to you for a specified file on the remote host. Note that some FTP sites may
not have remote change mode facilities, in which case this dialog box will not be
available or the user will be unable to perform the request.
Exit
This will close the TTWFTP window. Note that if you try to exit without
disconnecting from the host, the following message box will be displayed:
Clicking Yes will disconnect from the host then close the TTWFTP window.
10-9
FTP File Transfer
The Session Menu
Connect to Host
This will display a dialog box which enables you to enter details of the remote host
and make a connection.
A connection is made by entering the Host, Login, Password and (if required)
Account details, specifying the operating system of the remote host, then clicking the
Connect button.
The operating system type is selected from the System list box which includes the
following options:
Auto
VAX UCX V1
VAX UCX V2
VAX UCX
VAX MultiNet
NT
UNIX
Tandem
VAX TCPWare
Prime
IBM (MVS)
Dos
HP3000
AS400
KNET/MVS
IBM (Interlink)
Auto will cause FTP to automatically select the appropriate operating system and this
setting will be suitable in most cases. Note that some DOS based FTP servers cannot
automatically be resolved, so it is advisable to select DOS when you know the target
server is based on a DOS machine. VAX UCX applies to versions higher than V2.
The Local and Remote Directory boxes enable you to specify the start directories
(and drive name if required) that FTP will automatically attempt to locate and display
in the TTWFTP window when a session is connected. The normal default directory
(home) will be displayed if no directory is specified or the directory is not accessible.
To save you having to enter details of the remote host each time you want to make a
connection, you can assign a session name to them which will automatically set the
10-10
FTP File Transfer

host, login, password and account details when you click on it. A session name is
assigned by clicking the Add button to display the following dialog box.
Enter a unique name, the name of the remote host for example, then click OK to save
the current host connection settings to that name. The session name will be displayed
in the Sessions list box together with any others that have been defined. Clicking on a
session name will automatically update the host connection settings in the dialog box.
If you need to change any of the settings assigned to a session name, click on the
name, make the relevant changes then click the Add button then OK to the same
name.
You can delete a session name and its associated settings by selecting the name then
clicking the Delete button. You will be asked to confirm the deletion.
Session names and associated settings can be saved by selecting Save Settings on
Exit in the Configure menu. This is a toggle function which displays a tick mark
when selected.
Disconnect from Host
This will close the current connection with the remote host.
The Configure Menu
Transfer Settings
This will display a dialog box which enables you to select or deselect lowercase
conversion. File names that incorporate uppercase characters may cause transfer
problems on some systems, for example DOS machines. Selecting the Lowercase
10-11
FTP File Transfer

Conversion option will cause all uppercase characters in the name of the file to be
converted to lowercase during the transfer process.
Save Settings on Exit

This is a toggle function which will display a tick mark when selected. When
selected, all the currently defined session names and associated settings will be saved
when you exit. All FTP settings are stored in one of the following files:
Windows 3.1x:
TTWFTP.INI in the WINDOWS directory.
Windows 95:
TTW32FTP.INI in the WIN95 directory.
Windows NT:
TTW32FTP.INI in the WINNT directory.
Refer to the FTP Initialization File Entries section later in this chapter for more
information.
The View Menu
Debug Output
This is a toggle function which will display a tick mark when selected. Seleting this
option will enable debug messages to be displayed in the ftp> box at the bottom of
the TTWFTP window.
File Details
This is a toggle function which will display a tick mark when selected. Selecting this
option will cause details of the currently selected file to be displayed in the status line
at the bottom of the TTWFTP window.
10-12
FTP File Transfer
FTP Initialization File Entries

Session settings specified in the Connection dialog box can be saved by selecting Save
Settings on Exit in the Configure menu. This is a toggle function which will display a
tick mark when selected. The settings are stored in one of the following files:
Windows 3.1x:
TTWFTP.INI in the WINDOWS directory.
Windows 95:
TTW32FTP.INI in the WIN95 directory.
Windows NT:
TTW32FTP.INI in the WINNT directory.
The format of the entries is shown in the example below.

[Sessions]
hp9700=hp9700.ses
VaxStation=VaxStation.ses
[hp9700.ses]
Host=hp9700
Login=root
Password=101e002e5f
Account=
SystemType=Auto
LclDir=
RemDir=
[VaxStation.ses]
Host=vax
Login=system
Password=1d101e5813001f5c
Account=
SystemType=Auto
LclDir=
RemDir=
Use Asynchronous Calls

By default FTP uses asynchronous Windows Sockets calls. You can configure FTP
to use synchronous calls by adding the following line under a command group
headed [General]:
Blocking=1
Specifying Blocking=0 or removing this line will cause FTP to use asynchronous
calls.
10-13
FTP File Transfer
Disable Delete Command

You can prevent the deletion of files and directories in the TTWFTP window by
including the command DisableDelete=1 in a command group headed [General].
This will disable the Delete File button, the Delete option in the File menu, and the
Delete key.
FTP Command Line Options

The command line for running the FTP executable can be extended to include the
options described below. Note that the first command after the executable is ignored,
so enter this as - or /. The commands are not case sensitive.
Progress Bar
You can control the progress bar display using the -b command line option as
follows:
-b0
-b1
-b2
No progress bar.
Default progress bar, updated for every byte (ASCII) or block
(binary) read.
Update time and progress bar every 0x7fffffff bytes.
For example, to run FTP without a progress bar the command line would look like
this:
Ttw32ftp - -b0
Disabling The Include Subdirectories Option

You can disable the Include Subdirectories check box in the Confirm Copy Files
dialog box by using the following command line option:
-d-1
For example: Ttw32ftp - -d-1
Time Out
You can specify the amount of idle time (in seconds) allowed before FTP times out,
unless the host closes the connection first, by using the -t command line option. For
example, to specify time out after 40 seconds you would enter the following:
Ttw32ftp - -t40
10-14
Initialization Commands
11
This chapter describes all the commands that can be included in the
initialization file or on the command line.
Introduction
The initialization file is used to store various settings which specify how TeemTalk is
initially run and displayed. Once the normal initialization specification has been
defined in this file, the settings for a particular instance of TeemTalk may be overridden using command line options.
The following sections describe how to enter commands in the initialization file and
on the command line, then describe all the valid initialization commands.
Note: The default settings of functions relating to terminal
emulation are specified via pop-up menus in the main
window. These are described in the Setup Menus chapter.
Initialization File
The name and contents of the initialization file will vary depending on which version
of Microsoft Windows you are using.
Windows 3.1x
TeemTalk initialization commands are grouped under one of the following headings in
the Microsoft Windows WIN.INI file:
TeemTalk-05W:
TeemTalk-07W:
TeemTalk-11W:
[tt05w]
[tt07w]
[tt11w]
11-1
The following command group example will cause TeemTalk-07W to attempt to
connect to a network host called sparc1 using the LAN Manager protocol, and
display two levels (i.e. 4 rows) of soft buttons.
[tt07w]
host=sparc1
protocol=lanman
buttonlevels=2
You can specify more than one set of commands in the WIN.INI file so that each
instance of TeemTalk displayed on the screen can be configured differently. The
heading of the command group to action is specified on the command line using the n command line option, so if, for example, the group of commands above was
headed [window1], the command for actioning this set of commands instead of the
default [tt07w] set would be -nwindow1.
TeemTalk Private Profile File

A private profile file is used to store settings specific to TeemTalk which are inappropriate for placing in any of the standard Windows .INI files. A default private profile
file is automatically created when TeemTalk is installed:
TeemTalk-05W:
TeemTalk-07W:
TeemTalk-11W:
TT05W.INI
TT07W.INI
TT11W.INI
You can create additional files to meet various requirements, any one of which can be
used by TeemTalk instead of the default file by using the command line option:
-pffilename
The private profile file can be placed in any of the standard Windows File search
directories to enable TeemTalk to locate it. For example, assuming a default installation of TeemTalk-07W, the private profile file TT07W.INI could be placed in any of
the following directories:
1) C:\TEEMTALK (default)
2) C:\WINDOWS
3) C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM
4) Any other directory referenced via
the environment path variable.
You can view the contents of the current private profile file by displaying the
Startup Options dialog box from the File menu and clicking the Edit... button. The
format of entries is the same as for those in the WIN.INI file. A heading enclosed by
square brackets is followed by one or more commands on separate lines, as in the
example below:
11-2
[Untitled.ses]
Wsp=tt07w.wsp
Nv=tt07w.nv
[Sessions]
Default=Untitled.ses
[Startup]
Dialog=1
SaveAsDefault=1
Editor=notepad.exe
All entries within the file are searched for on a case insensitive basis.
Note: TeemTalk WIN.INI commands cannot be placed in the
private profile file. Settings which should be placed in the
private profile file will be clearly indicated.
Windows 95 & NT
The TeemTalk private profile file contains various commands which affect the way in
which TeemTalk is initially run and displayed. A default private profile file is automatically created when TeemTalk is installed and this has the name TT*W.INI, where
* is the particular version of TeemTalk installed as follows:
TeemTalk-05W32:
TeemTalk-07W32:
TeemTalk-11W32:
TT05W.INI
TT07W.INI
TT11W.INI
You can create additional files to meet various requirements, any one of which can be
used by TeemTalk instead of the default file, by using the command line option:
-pffilename
The private profile file can be placed in any of the standard Windows File search
directories to enable TeemTalk to locate it. For example, assuming a default installation of TeemTalk-07W32, the private profile file TT07W.INI could be placed in any
of the following directories:
1) C:\PROGRAM FILES\TEEMTALK (default)
2) C:\WIN95
C:\WINNT35
(Windows 95)
(Windows NT)
3) C:\WIN95\SYSTEM
C:\WINNT35\SYSTEM32
(Windows 95)
(Windows NT)
4) Any other directory referenced via

the environment path variable.
11-3
You can view the contents of the private profile file used by the current instance of
TeemTalk by displaying the Startup Options dialog box from the File menu and
clicking the Edit... button.
The private profile file will already contain entries similar to the following, where
commands are grouped under headings enclosed by square brackets:
[Untitled.ses]
Wsp=tt07w.wsp
Nv=tt07w.nv
[Sessions]
Default=Untitled.ses
[Startup]
Dialog=1
SaveAsDefault=1
Editor=notepad.exe
Unless specified otherwise, all the initialization commands described in this chapter
must be entered under a new heading called:
[startup,default]
for a set of commands to be used by default,
or
[startup,name]
for a set of commands that can be used instead of the default

set, as specified by a command line option.
Each command must be entered on a separate line under this heading. Note that the
commands are not case sensitive.
The following default command group example will cause TeemTalk to attempt to
connect to a network host called neoware using the TCP/IP protocol and display two
levels of soft buttons.
[startup,default]
host=neoware
protocol=tcpip
buttonlevels=2
You can specify more than one set of startup commands in the private profile file.
Each set of commands other than the default set must have the following heading:
[startup,name]
where name can be any unique identifying name. You can specify which set of
startup commands TeemTalk is to use by including the following on the command line
for loading TeemTalk, where name is substituted with the actual name of the startup
group required:
-nname
If this command is not present then TeemTalk will use the startup commands under the
[startup,default] heading.
11-4
Command Line Option Format

The command line is entered in the Microsoft Windows Program Item Properties
dialog box, which is displayed by selecting File then Properties in the Program
Manager window when the TeemTalk icon is selected.
Options are entered after the name of your TeemTalk program and each option must
be preceded by a space. An option is immediately followed by its setting if one is
required, without a space in between.
The following example will load TeemTalk-07W with the session configuration
assigned to the description MYSETUP and disable the scroll bar.
C:\TEEMTALK\TT07W.EXE -se"MYSETUP" -sb
11-5
Command Summary
indicates the command does not apply to TeemTalk-05W or TeemTalk-05W32.
Network Connection
Command Function
Initialization File
Network host name

Network protocol
Load Winsock on startup
NetBIOS version
TSR identifier (Windows 3.1x)
Input queue size
New session warning message
Exit on connection close/fail
No exit on connection close/fail
Reconnect on close/fail
Close connection on exit
host=name
host/protocol
protocol=protocol
host/protocol
LoadWinsockOnStartup=on -lw
UngBassExtendedNetBIOS=no/yes
netid=identifier
-iidentifier
InputQueue=0-4096
-q0-4096
sessionWarning=off
-os
exitOnClose=on
-e
exitOnClose=off
-e1
exitOnClose=connect
-e2
warnExit=off
-j
Command Line
Telnet
Command Function
TeemTalk Private Profile File
Suppress Telnet echo option

Telnet binary options
Telnet EOR options
Telnet break send TM
Telnet break send CR
TelnetEchoSuppress=yes/no
TelnetBinary=yes/no
TelnetEOR=yes/no
TelnetSendBreakTM=yes/no
TelnetSendBreakCR=yes/no
Session Configuration
Command Function
Initialization File
Command Line
Startup command group to action

Private profile file to use
Path for emulation settings file
Path for workspace settings file
Connection template to use
Run script file
Return script values in uppercase
Hide script parameters
ZModem startup
Disable bell
none
none
NVPath=directory path
WSPath=directory path
none
scriptfile=filename
ScriptUppercase=on
scriptparameter=off
zmodemStartup=on
bell=off
-ngroupname
-pffilename
none
none
-se"description"
-scfilename
-su
-hs
-zm
-be
Initialization File
windowSize=minimized
windowSize=maximized
Command Line
-mi
-ma
Display
Command Function
Window minimized on start-up
Window maximized on start-up
11-6
Command Function
Window fills screen on start-up
Disable copyright message
Disable Control menu & min/max
Disable Control menu
Disable close window menu item
Disable minimize button
Disable maximize button
Disable window frame
Disable title bar
Disable menu bar
Disable toolbar
Disable scroll bar
Title to display in title bar
Subtitle to display in title bar
Soft button levels displayed
Disable status bar
Crosshair cursor size
Font size displayed by default
Bold font in full screen workspace
Flashing enabled in all sessions
Text redraw delay
Support multiple surfaces
Alpha off during redraw
No graphics show-thru alpha
Segment memory size
Maximum number of segments
Initialization File
windowSize=fullScreen
quiet=on
SystemMenu=none
SystemMenu=off
MenuCloseItem=off
MinimizeBox=off
MaximizeBox=off
windowFrame=off
titlebar=off
menubar=off
toolbar=off
scrollbar=off
title="title"
subTitle="subtitle"
buttonlevels=0-4
statusline=off
CrosshairSize=1-4096
defaultFontIndex=index
UseBoldFont=on
FlashInBackground=on
TextRedrawDelay=ms
planeMasking=on
hideAlpha=on
hideGraphics=on
SegmentMemorySize=#
MaxSegments=#-16000
Command Line
-f
-qt
-sy
-ms
-mt
-mn
-mx
-fr
-tb
-mb
-l
-sb
-t"title"
-st"subtitle"
-bl0-4
-v
-x1-4096
-dfindex
-bf
-fb
-rdms
-pm / -pmindex
-h
-g
-sm256-#
-sn#-16000
Initialization File
LK450keyboard=yes
mouseCursor=0-10
mouseEdit=off/disabled
mouseEdit=on/enabled
none
Command Line
-kblk450
-mc0-10
-me2
-me1
-me0
Command Function
Initialization File
Command Line
Default TeemTalk printer

Use Windows default printer
Send data direct to print port
Send data to print manager
Send print data to file
Disable remote printing sequences
device=printer details
UseWindowsPrinter=yes
UsePrintManager=0
UsePrintManager=1
printtofile=filename
remotePrinting=off
none
-wp
none
none
-prfilename
-rp
Keyboard & Mouse

Command Function
LK450 keyboard
Mouse cursor style
Disable all editing functions
Enable all editing functions
Enable highlighting only
Printing
11-7
Network Connection
Network Host Name
Initialization File: host=name
Command Line: hostname/protocol
Default Setting:
Not applicable
You can make TeemTalk automatically connect to a network host node each time it is
loaded or reset by specifying the host name, protocol and, if necessary, a different
default TSR identifier in the initialization file or on the command line. The host=
command is used to specify the name of the host. The communications protocol must
be specified on the line below the host= command using the protocol= command.
On the command line, the host name is immediately followed by a forward slash (/)
then the protocol (as listed in the next section). For example, to specify the host as
pericom and the protocol as CTERM, the command line for TeemTalk-07W32
would look like this:
C:\PROGRAM FILES\TEEMTALK\TT07W.EXE pericom/cterm
Network Protocol
Initialization File: protocol=protocol
Command Line: hostname/protocol
Default Setting:
Not applicable
You can make TeemTalk automatically connect to a network host node each time it is
loaded or reset by specifying the host name, protocol and, if necessary, a different
default TSR identifier in the initialization file or on the command line.
In the initialization file, the protocol must be specified on the line immediately below
the host= command.
The protocol setting can be any one of the following:
bapi
bwtcp
cterm
doslanti
eiconx25
11-8
infoconn
int6B
int14
ipxspx
isdn
lanman
lanwp
lat
multilan
ncsi
netbios
netwlat
newt
oslan
pathway
pcnfs
pctcp
TeemTalkosi
telapi
winsock
TeemTalk for Windows 95 & NT:
CTERM
LAT
MULTILAN
NETBIOS
TCPIP
TEEMTALKOSI
WINSOCK2
Refer to the Network Connection chapter in the Networking Guide for a description
of these protocols.
Note that if you only specify the host name on the command line then TeemTalk will
assume you are using TCP/IP.
If you are using the NetBIOS protocol, refer to the NetBIOS Version section in the
Network Connection chapter of the Networking Guide for an additional initialization
file command that has to be included.
Load Winsock On Startup

Initialization File: LoadWinsockOnStartup=on
Command Line: -lw
Default Setting:
Off
These commands will initialize the Winsock stack immediately when TeemTalk is
started, enabling dialup over PPP or SLIP to gain a connection to a service provider.
NetBIOS Version
Initialization File: UngBassExtendedNetBIOS=No/Yes
Command Line: Not applicable
Default Setting:
No
This command is used to specify the version of NetBIOS being used when you select
NetBIOS for network communications. If you are using the Ungermann Bass NetOne NetBIOS, set this command to Yes, otherwise set it to No.
11-9
TSR Identifier
WIN.INI File:
Command Line:
Default Setting:
netid=identifier
-iidentifier
5A
TeemTalk for Windows 3.1x communicates with its TSR programs and the network
kernel software via interrupt 63 (hex). A unique TSR identifier is used to link an
instance of TeemTalk to a particular TSR. This enables two or more instances of
TeemTalk to use different network protocols, and also allows other software in the
system to use interrupt 63.
The default TSR identifier is 5A (hex). You can specify a different default identifier
by including the netid= command in the WIN.INI file. For example, to specify the
new default TSR identifier as 48 (hex), you would enter the following line:
netid=48
If you want to use a different TSR identifier than the default specified in the
WIN.INI file (to enable another instance of TeemTalk to use a different network
protocol, for example), you need to include the -i command line option immediately
followed by the new TSR identifier when loading the TSR program and when
loading TeemTalk (as specified in the Microsoft Windows Program Item Properties
dialog box).
For example, to run FTPTSR using the identifier 48 (hex), the line entered at the
DOS prompt would be:
FTPTSR -i48
Input Queue Size

Initialization File: InputQueue=0-4096
Command Line: -q0-4096
Default Setting:
255
These commands enable you to set the input queue size for network data. The size of
the input queue will determine how quickly an interrupt command takes effect. For
example, pressing the keys Ctrl + Q while receiving a long listing will only cause
data input to stop once the input queue is empty. The larger the input queue, the
longer the interrupt command will take to stop incoming data.
11-10
Disable 'Closed Connection' Message Box

Initialization File: exitOnClose=on
exitOnClose=off
exitOnClose=connect
Command Line:
Default Setting:
TeemTalk exits immediately

TeemTalk does not exit
TeemTalk attempts to
reconnect
-e TeemTalk exits immediately
-e1 TeemTalk does not exit
-e2 TeemTalk attempts to reconnect
Message box displayed
When the host closes the connection or the connection fails, TeemTalk normally
displays a message box giving you the option to reconnect, cancel or exit. These
commands will disable the message box and cause TeemTalk to immediately perform
the required option.
Disable New Session Warning Message Box

Initialization File: sessionWarning=off
Command Line: -os
Default Setting:
Enabled
A warning message is displayed by default when you attempt to open a new session
while a session is currently open. These commands enable you to disable the
message box so that TeemTalk automatically closes the current session and opens the
new session.
Disable 'Exit TeemTalk' Message Box

Initialization File: warnExit=off
Command Line: -j
Default Setting:
Enabled
A message box will be displayed if you attempt to exit TeemTalk while a network
session is still active. These commands will disable the message box so that TeemTalk
automatically closes the network connection when it is exited.
11-11
Telnet Commands
Suppress Telnet Echo Option
Private Profile File: TelnetEchoSuppress=Yes
Command Line:
Not applicable
Default Setting:
No
This command will suppress TeemTalk generation of the Telnet echo option on
connection. It must be placed under the [Sessions] heading in the TeemTalk private
profile file.
Telnet Binary Options

Private Profile File: TelnetBinary=Yes or No
Command Line:
Not applicable
Default Setting:
Not applicable
This command will force generation of Telnet do (Yes) or dont (No) Binary options
to be sent to the host. It must be placed under the [Sessions] heading in the TeemTalk
private profile file.
Telnet EOR Options

Private Profile File: TelnetEOR=Yes or No
Command Line:
Not applicable
Default Setting:
Not applicable
This command will force generation of Telnet do (Yes) or dont (No) EOR options to
be sent to the host. It must be placed under the [Sessions] heading in the TeemTalk
private profile file.
Telnet Break Settings

Private Profile File: TelnetSendBreakTM=Yes or No
TelnetSendBreakCR=Yes or No
Command Line:
Not applicable
Default Setting:
TM only
These commands enable you to specify whether or not a timing mark (TM) and/or
carriage return (CR) is sent with a Telnet break. They must be placed under the
[Sessions] heading in the TeemTalk private profile file.
11-12
Session Configuration
Startup Command Group To Action
Initialization File: Not applicable
Command Line: -nname
Default Setting:
Windows 3.1x:
tt*w (* is either 05, 07, or 11)
Windows 95 & NT: default
You can specify more than one set of startup commands in the Windows 3.1x
WIN.INI file or the Windows 95 or NT TT*W.INI private profile file. This enables
you to configure each instance of TeemTalk differently.
Windows 3.1x
The heading of the command group to action for a specific instance of TeemTalk is
specified on the command line using the -n command line option. For example, if the
group of TeemTalk-07W commands was headed [window1] in the WIN.INI file, the
command for actioning this set of commands instead of the default [tt07w] set would
be:
-nwindow1
When entering groups of TeemTalk commands in the WIN.INI file, make sure that
each heading is unique and not duplicated elsewhere in the file.
Windows 95 & NT
Each set of commands other than the default set must have the following heading in
the TT*W.INI private profile file:
[startup,name]
where name can be any unique identifying name. You can specify which set of
startup commands TeemTalk is to use by including the following on the command line
for loading TeemTalk, where name is substituted with the actual name of the startup
group required:
-nname
If this command is not present then TeemTalk will use the startup commands under the
[startup,default] heading.
11-13
Private Profile File To Use

Command Line: -pffilename
Default Setting:
TT*W.INI (* is either 05, 07 or 11)
This command line option enables you to specify a different private profile file for
TeemTalk to use instead of the default.
Path For Emulation Settings File

WIN.INI File:
Command Line:
Default Setting:
NVPath=directory
Not applicable
\TEEMTALK
This command applies to TeemTalk for Windows 3.1x. If you have chosen a different
destination directory for the emulation settings file TT*W.NV to the default directory
\TEEMTALK, you must specify the full directory path using this command.
Path For Workspace Settings File

WIN.INI File:
Command Line:
Default Setting:
WSPath=directory
Not applicable
\TEEMTALK
This command applies to TeemTalk for Windows 3.1x. If you have chosen a different
destination directory for the workspace settings file TT*W.WSP to the default
directory \TEEMTALK, you must specify the full directory path using this command.
Connection Template To Use

Command Line: -se"description"
Default Setting:
Untitled
This command enables you to override the default connection template used when
TeemTalk is loaded, as specified in the Open Session dialog box. The description
must exactly match the description assigned to a connection template already saved
using the Save Session As dialog box and must be enclosed by double-quotes.
11-14
Run Script File

Initialization File: scriptfile=filename
Command Line: -scfilename
Default Setting:
Not applicable
TeemTalk provides a script language which can be used to automate certain activities
such as logging into remote computers. These commands enable you to specify the
name (and directory path if necessary) of the script file to initialize. The format of the
script file is explained in the chapter Creating A Script File.
Return Script Values In Uppercase

Initialization File: ScriptUppercase=on
Command Line: -su
Default Setting:
Values returned in upper and lowercase
By default, script PGET values are returned unabbreviated with essential characters
in uppercase and non-essential characters in lowercase as shown in the Set & Get
Parameters & Values section in the Creating A Script File chapter. For example, the
value "Yes" is returned with the essential character "Y" in uppercase, while the other
characters are in lowercase. If your script requires the entire value to be returned in
uppercase, use this initialization file command or command line option.
Hide Script Parameters

Initialization File: scriptparameter=off
Command Line: -hs
Default Setting:
Parameters displayed
These commands will cause the values typed in the Parameters box in the Run
Script dialog box to be displayed as asterisks instead of normal text. This is useful
for security purposes if you need to enter sensitive data such as a password.
ZMODEM Startup
Initialization File: zmodemStartup=on
Command Line: -zm
Default Setting:
Off
When ZMODEM startup is enabled, TeemTalk will check incoming data for a remote
ZMODEM startup sequence then automatically start a file transfer using the settings
11-15
specified in the ZModem Settings dialog box. Note that the transfer protocol selected
in the Initiate File Transfer dialog box will be ignored. Refer to the File Transfer
chapter for more information.
Disable Bell
Initialization File: bell=off
Command Line: -be
Default Setting:
Enabled
These commands enable you to turn off the terminal bell.
11-16
Display
Window Minimized When Loaded
Initialization File: windowSize=minimized
Command Line: -mi
Default Setting:
Not applicable
These commands will cause the window to be displayed as an icon when TeemTalk is
loaded.
Window Maximized When Loaded

Initialization File: windowSize=maximized
Command Line: -ma
Default Setting:
Not applicable
These commands will cause the window to be displayed at the maximum size
possible when TeemTalk is loaded, while retaining the default number of lines and
columns and including all window elements if enabled (title bar, soft buttons etc.).
Workspace Fills Screen When Loaded

Initialization File: windowSize=FullScreen
Command Line: -f
Default Setting:
Not applicable
These commands will cause the emulation workspace to fill the entire display when
TeemTalk is loaded, while retaining the default number of lines and columns. Note
that the title bar, menu bar, scroll bar and soft buttons will not be displayed even if
they are enabled. You can use the -bf or UseBoldFont=On commands to make the
font bolder if required.
Disable Copyright Message

Initialization File: quiet=on
Command Line: -qt
Default Setting:
off (copyright message displayed)
These commands will stop the copyright message from being displayed when
TeemTalk is loaded.
11-17
Disable Control Menu & Min/Maximize Buttons

Initialization File: SystemMenu=none
Command Line: -sy
Default Setting:
on
These commands will remove the Control (System) menu icon and the minimize and
maximize buttons from the TeemTalk window.
Disable Control Menu

Initialization File: SystemMenu=off
Command Line: -ms
Default Setting:
on
These commands will remove the Control (System) menu icon from the TeemTalk
window.
Disable Close Window Items

Initialization File: MenuCloseItem=off
Command Line: -mt
Default Setting:
on
These commands will remove the Close window option from the Control (System)
menu and, in Windows 95 and NT, disable the close window (X) button at the top
right corner of the TeemTalk window.
Disable Minimize Button

Initialization File: MinimizeBox=off
Command Line: -mn
Default Setting:
on
These commands will remove the minimize button from the TeemTalk window.
Disable Maximize Button

Initialization File: MaximizeBox=off
Command Line: -mx
Default Setting:
on
These commands will remove the maximize button from the TeemTalk window.
11-18
Disable Window Frame

Initialization File: windowFrame=off
Command Line: -fr
Default Setting:
on
These commands will disable the window frame.
Disable Title Bar

Initialization File: titlebar=off
Command Line: -tb
Default Setting:
on
These commands will remove the title bar from the window.
Disable Menu Items

The following initialization file commands will disable individual menu items:
File Menu:
FileMenu=Off
Factory=Off
Reset=Off
NewConnection=Off
OpenSession=Off
CloseSession=Off
SaveSession=Off
SaveSessionAs=Off
StartupOptions=Off
Capture=Off
Replay=Off
FileTransfer=Off
FTP=Off
PrintSetup=Off
PrintScreen=Off
PrintBuffer=Off
AutoPrint=Off
CancelPrint=Off
EjectPage=Off
RunScript=Off
ScriptRec=Off
Exit=Off
Edit Menu:
EditMenu=Off
ClipboardText=Off
ClipboardGraphics=Off
DDERowCopy=Off
DDEColumnCopy=Off
Copy=Off
Paste=Off
SelectAll=Off
ClearBuffer=Off
Settings Menu:
SettingsMenu=Off
Emulation=Off
Serial=Off
Terminal=Off
Dialog=Off
Gin=Off
Attributes=Off
KeyboardMacros=Off
SoftButtons=Off
MouseButtons=Off
ButtonTools=Off
Help Menu:
Helpmenu=Off
Window Size:
<<=Off
>>=Off
11-19
Disable Menu Bar

Initialization File: menubar=off
Command Line: -mb
Default Setting:
on
These commands will remove the menu bar from the window. The File, Edit and
Settings menus and the << and >> window resize commands will be unavailable.
Disable Toolbar
Initialization File: toolbar=off
Command Line: -l
Default Setting: on
These commands will remove the toolbar from the window.
Disable Scroll Bar

Initialization File: scrollbar=off
Command Line: -sb
Default Setting:
on
These commands will remove the scroll bar from the window.
Window Title
Initialization File: title="title"
Command Line: -t"title"
Default Setting: TeemTalk TT*W where * is 05, 07 or 11
These commands enable you to specify the title that is to be displayed in the title bar.
This is useful when you are running more than one instance of TeemTalk.
When specifying the title on the command line you must enclose it within double
quotes. For example, to use the command line option to specify the title as New
Data, you would enter the following:
-t"New Data"
If no title is specified then the name of your version of TeemTalk will be displayed.
11-20
Window Subtitle
Initialization File: subTitle="subtitle"
Command Line: -st"subtitle"
Default Setting:
Untitled
These commands enable you to specify a subtitle for display in the title bar of a
specific TeemTalk window. By default the subtitle is the name of the session.
Soft Buttons Displayed

Initialization File: buttonlevels=0-4
Command Line: -bl0-4
Default Setting:
1
of twelve programmable buttons, providing a combined total of 48 buttons. You can
display all four levels (48 buttons) at the same time if required. All levels are
view by clicking the Level button.
You can specify how many soft button levels are actually displayed by using this
initialization file command or command line option. All four levels can be displayed
by specifying 4. Specifying 0 will cause no soft buttons to be displayed.
Disable Status Bar

Initialization File: statusline=off
Command Line: -v
Default Setting:
on
These commands will remove the status bar at the bottom of the window.
Default Font Size

Initialization File: defaultFontIndex=index
Command Line: -dfindex
Default Setting:
Depends on the display adaptor
The size of the font used by default when TeemTalk is loaded usually depends on the
type of display adaptor in your system. However, you can specify a different default
11-21
font size by using one of these commands where index is the index of the font as
defined in the following tables.
The size of the font for a particular index will vary depending on the terminal emulation. Specifying an index outside the range for the emulation will cause the highest
valid index number for that emulation to be used. The font sizes are defined in pixels.
Font
Index
DEC VT Modes
80 Cols 132 Cols
Tek 4205 & 4207

80 Cols 132 Cols
24 x 12
24 x 7
23 x 12
23 x 7
16 x 8
19 x 10
19 x 6
21 x 11
21 x 6
14 x 7
18 x 9
18 x 5
19 x 10
19 x 6
12 x 6
17 x 8
17 x 4
17 x 9
17 x 5
10 x 5
16 x 8
16 x 4
15 x 8
15 x 4
8x4
15 x 8
15 x 4
13 x 7
13 x 4
7x3
14 x 7
14 x 4
12 x 7
12 x 4
7x3
13 x 6
13 x 3
12 x 6
12 x 3
7x3
12 x 5
12 x 3
11 x 6
11 x 3
7x3
10 x 5
10 x 3
9x5
9x3
7x3
10
8x5
8x3
7x4
7x2
7x3
11
7x5
7x3
6x3
6x2
7x3
Tek 4111
128 Cols
Bold Font In Full Screen Workspace

Initialization File: UseBoldFont=on
Command Line: -bf
Default Setting:
off
These commands will make the font bolder when the window size is set to full screen
using the -f or windowSize=fullScreen command.
Flashing Characters Enabled In All Sessions

Initialization File: FlashInBackground=on
Command Line: -fb
Default Setting:
off
These commands enable characters with the flashing attribute to be displayed as such
in all session windows in addition to the currently focused window.
11-22
Text Redraw Delay

Initialization File: TextRedrawDelay=milliseconds
Command Line: -rdmilliseconds
Default Setting:
1000
These commands enable you to specify the delay period before text is redrawn after
terminal inactivity. The numeric value specifies the time in milliseconds. The
minimum delay period is 250 milliseconds.
Support Multiple Surfaces

Initialization File: planeMasking=on
Command Line: -pmindex (index is optional)
Default Setting:
Disabled
These commands affect the Tek terminal emulation. If you are using an application
that uses multiple surfaces then you can use these commands to enable TeemTalk to
support them. Note that your PC must have a display adaptor that supports 256
colour mode and your system must be running in this mode in order for multiple
surfaces to be supported.
The command line option can also be used to specify an alternative colour index for
the crosshair cursor by entering the decimal value immediately after -pm.
Alpha Off During Redraw

Initialization File: hideAlpha=on
Command Line: -h
Default Setting:
Alpha is on during redraw
These commands enable you to prevent display flicker which is noticeable with some
applications when a segment redraw is being performed. (The commands do not
apply to TeemTalk-05W or TeemTalk-05W32.)
Crosshair Cursor Size

Initialization File: CrosshairSize=size
Command Line: -xsize
Default Setting:
4096
These commands enable you to specify the size of the graphics cursor, where size is
a numeric value in the range 1 to 4096, i.e. world coordinates.
11-23
Disable Graphics Show Through

Initialization File: hideGraphics=on
Command Line: -g
Default Setting:
Graphics shows through alpha
These commands will prevent graphics from showing through dialog area data that
has a background colour index other than 0. (The commands do not apply to
TeemTalk-05W or TeemTalk-05W32.)
Segment Memory Size

Initialization File: SegmentMemorySize=size
Command Line: -smsize
Default Setting:
256 (kilobytes)
These commands specify the amount of available segment memory in 1 kilobyte
blocks. The minimum segment memory size that can be specified is 256 kilobytes,
the maximum is 2048 kilobytes. (The commands do not apply to TeemTalk-05W or
TeemTalk-05W32.)
Maximum Number Of Segments In Memory

Initialization File: MaxSegments=#
Command Line: -sn#
Default Setting:
8000
These commands specify the maximum number of segments that can be stored in
segment memory. The maximum number cannot exceed 16000. (The commands do
not apply to TeemTalk-05W or TeemTalk-05W32.)
11-24
Keyboard & Mouse

LK450 Keyboard
Initialization File: LK450keyboard=yes
Command Line: -kblk450
Default Setting:
Not applicable
These commands enable you to specify that an LK450 keyboard is being used.
Mouse Cursor Style

Initialization File:
Command Line:
Default Setting:
mouseCursor=0-10
-mc0-10
I-beam cursor
These commands enable you to specify the style of the mouse cursor displayed by
default in the TeemTalk window. The values 0 through 10 correspond to the styles
shown in the table below.
Default Cursor
(I-Beam)
10
No Cursor
Disable Editing Functions

Initialization File: mouseEdit=off or mouseEdit=disabled
Command Line: -me0 allows highlighting but no copy/paste
except via menus
-me1 all editing functions enabled
-me2 all editing functions disabled
Default Setting:
All functions enabled
11-25
In some cases it may be necessary to disable the copy and paste function of the mouse
buttons to prevent accidental editing. This can be achieved by using one of these
commands.
When the editing functions are disabled, use the Edit menu options or the numeric
keypad keys Shift + . (i.e. Del) to copy and Shift + 0 (i.e. Ins) to paste instead.
11-26
Printing
Default TeemTalk Printer
Initialization File: device=printer details
Default Setting:
As specified in the Control panel
This command enables you to specify a different printer which TeemTalk will use by
default instead of that specified in the Control panel.
Use Windows Default Printer

Initialization File: UseWindowsPrinter=yes
Command Line: -wp
Default Setting: TeemTalk default printer used.
These commands will cause TeemTalk to use the Windows default printer by default,
instead of its own default printer.
Use Print Manager

Initialization File: UsePrintManager=0/1
Default Setting:
0
This command enables you to specify that data is sent to the print manager instead of
directly to the port when in Auto Print or Printer Controller mode.
To specify that data is to be sent to the print manager, you would enter the following:
UsePrintManager=1
Data will be spooled to the printer but will not be printed until either Auto Print
mode is disabled or the Eject Page option in the File menu is selected.
To specify that data is to be sent directly to the port instead of the print manager, you
would enter the following:
UsePrintManager=0
11-27
Send Print Data To File

Initialization File: printtofile=filename
Command Line: -prfilename
Default Setting:
Not applicable
These commands enable you to direct print data to a specified file instead of the
printer.
Disable Remote Printing Sequences

Initialization File: remotePrinting=off
Command Line: -rp
Default Setting:
Remote printing sequences enabled
These commands will disable all remote printing sequences.
11-28
Creating A Script File
12
This chapter describes TeemTalk's scripting language.
Introduction
TeemTalk provides a comprehensive script language which allows all aspects of the
emulator to be controlled via user written command files. Operating in real time, the
script language can be used to create customised environments, detect and act upon
host events, and simulate user input. A script file can be written using any text editor.

The script file can be initiated in any of five ways: using an initialization file
command, command line option, from the File menu, user defined key or button, or
remotely using an escape sequence.
Using An Initialization File Command
TeemTalk for Windows 3.1

To specify the name of the script file in the WIN.INI initialization file, use a text editor
to insert the following line under the command group headed [tt07w] (i.e. for
TeemTalk-07W), separating it from the next command group by a blank line:
scriptfile=filename
For example, to initiate the script file named LOGON, the command group for
TeemTalk-07W would include the following lines:
[tt07w]
scriptfile=LOGON
12-1
TeemTalk for Windows 95 & NT

To specify the name of the script file in the TT*W.INI private profile file (where * is
your version of TeemTalk, e.g. 07 for TeemTalk-07W) , use a text editor to insert the
following line under the command group headed [startup,default] , separating it
from the next command group by a blank line:
scriptfile=filename
For example, to initiate the script file named LOGON, the session command group
would include the following line:
scriptfile=LOGON
Using A Command Line Option

To specify the name of the script file in the Program Item Properties dialog box,
click the TeemTalk icon once to select it, then select File and Properties in the
Program Manager window. In the Command Line text box, type a space after
TT07W.EXE, then the characters -sc immediately followed by the name of the script
file. For example, to initiate the script file named LOGON, the command line for
TeemTalk-07W would read as follows:
C:\TEEMTALK\TT07W.EXE -scLOGON
Using The File Menu

The Run Script option in the File menu displays a dialog box in which you specify
the name of the script file to run. Note that any parameters (refer to the section
entitled Assigning Values To Variables) are not enclosed by parentheses. Clicking
the Ok button after entering the name of the file will close the dialog box and the
script file will be initiated.
You can cancel the initiated script file by selecting the Cancel Script option which
replaces Run Script while a script is running.
Refer to the description of the File menu in the Setup Menus chapter for more
information.
Using A Key Or Button Definition

You can program a key or button to run a script file when pressed by enclosing the
name of the script file plus any parameters (refer to the section entitled Assigning
Values To Variables) within the <' (left angle bracket and single quote) and '>
12-2

For example, to program a key or button so that it will run the script file myscript.scr
and assign the values value1 to variable ArgV1 and value2 to ArgV2, you would
enter the following in the key/button definition text box:
Refer to the Keyboard Macros and Soft Buttons sections in the Setup Menus chapter
for information on programming keys and buttons.
Using An Escape Sequence

A script file can be initiated remotely by using the following escape sequence:
ESC P 2 z filename ESC \
where filename can include arguments as described in the next section.
Assigning Values To Variables

You can specify the value of specific variables within the script file by using the ( )
combination immediately following the name of the script file to be run. For
example:
myscript.scr(value1,value2,etc)
Each value within the parentheses must be separated by a comma with no spaces in
between. The script decoder stores the number of values specified, also treating the
name of the script file as a value, in the integer variable ArgC. The values
themselves are assigned to the following ArgV string variables: ArgV0 contains the
name of the script file ("myscript.scr" in the example above), ArgV1 contains
"value1", ArgV2 contains "value2", and so on.
The ArgC and ArgV# variables are predefined by the script language and so are not
defined by the var command. Just use the variable names in the program where
applicable, remembering that the number of the ArgV# variable name must match
the location number of the value that will be entered on the command line.
It is up to the user to ensure that the values specified on the command line are in the
right order so that they are assigned to the correct ArgV# variables.
12-3
Script File Examples

Log On Script
To introduce scripting, here is an example of probably the most obvious task to
automate - logging on to a host computer over a network:
hrcv hold
pset network protocol "protocol" nodename "nodename" connect
hcmp 0,"login: "
put "dave_r"
hcmp 0,"password:"
put "pericom_r"
hcmp 0,"$ "
exit
The hrcv command on the first line will be necessary in most cases when checking
data from the host. Because characters (usually 1 only) from the host are normally
processed between lines of the script file, it is normally necessary to include a hrcv
hold command to stop this, i.e. to HOLD characters from being processed. This will
be in force EXCEPT during hcmp and hget commands, until another hrcv command
is encountered.
The pset command enables you to change most items on the Settings menus, and
also CURRENT settings usually set by ESCape sequences. In this case it is
imitating what you would do in the New Connection dialog box in order to connect
to a remote host.
The hcmp command allows you to wait until specific character(s) are received
EXACTLY from the host. The number before the string specifies how many seconds
to wait for the characters. The 0 as used here is an unlimited wait. (In practice it
would be better to use a non-zero value and check the system flag to see if the string
was received.)
The put command sends the specified characters to the host. The exit command
terminates the script file but does not QUIT TeemTalk.
Within this outline script it is necessary to provide the relevant entries for the system to
which connection is required. The second line defines the particular network interface
protocol and nodename being used and initiates the connection.
The put lines define the userid and password to be used as 'dave' and 'pericom'
respectively. The hcmp lines define the particular prompts provided by the host
system, at which points the userid and password can be sent to the host. It is vitally
important to ensure that the string to be waited for in each hcmp command is
EXACTLY what will be received from the host, otherwise the log-on will fail. It is
12-4

also sometimes necessary to ensure that the LAST character received from the host is
the LAST character of the string, to ensure that the host is ready to accept what is
sent by the put command. You can use the Display Controls option in the Terminal
Settings dialog box to find this out.
The script could now be attached to a soft button (or key, mouse button, hotspot, etc.)
so that you could simply click on the relevant button to attach to a different host
computer. Indeed, several buttons could be set up in this way to allow attachment to a
variety of different host computers on the network.
Programming Soft Buttons

The LOGON script described in the previous section can be attached to a soft button
as follows:
pset buttons name SB1L1 "log on"
pset buttons command SB1L1 "<'logon'>"
exit
This will label the first button on the top row of soft buttons Level 1 as 'log on' and
cause the script logon to be invoked when the left mouse button is clicked on this soft
button. This is because the command which we programmed into this button
included the delimeters <' and '>, which signify that a script file should be invoked
with the filename specified.
To enable connection to more than one host you can program a separate button for
each required connection as follows:
pset buttons L1TITLE "CONNECT"
pset buttons name SB1L1 "TEK"
pset buttons command SB1L1 "<'logon1'>"
pset buttons name SB2L1 "W3220"
pset buttons name SB3L1 "VAX 1"
pset buttons name SB4L1 "VAX 2"
exit
Now we have configured four soft buttons for connection to four different services
("TEK", "W3220", "VAX 1", "VAX 2"), using four different LOGON files. We have
also added the TITLE CONNECT to the Level 1 soft buttons, which will be shown
in the box under Level 1.
You can specify a different terminal emulation for each connection by adding
another line to each LOGON script file as follows:
12-5

LOGON1:
LOGON2:
LOGON3:
LOGON4:
pset emul mode tek

pset emul mode w3220
pset emul mode vt2207
pset emul mode vt2208
Programming Keyboard Macros

What we have now achieved using soft buttons could also be done using keyboard
macros. What you will achieve is less apparent, however, because you have no
visible indication like the 'name' displayed on each soft button. However, we would
attach a LOGON as above to Alt + F1 for example with:
pset macro A VK_F1 "<'logon1'>"
You may also want to change the functions normally assigned to specific keys, where
these are expected to return specific values for your application. For example, the
following lines are from a script that will redefine an Enhanced AT 102 key keyboard
for WordPerfect.
pset macro VK_F1
pset macro s VK_F1
pset macro c VK_F1
pset macro a VK_F1
"<vt__f7>"
"<vt__pf1><vt__f7>"
"<vt__pf2><vt__f7>"
"<vt__pf3><vt__f7>"
pset macro c VK_PRIOR

pset macro VK_HOME
pset macro VK_ESCAPE
"<vt__pf2><vt__f18>2"
"<vt__pf4>"
"<vt__f6>"
pset macro c VK_END

pset macro c VK_NEXT
pset macro c VK_BACK
pset macro VK_END
pset macro c VK_HOME
pset macro c VK_OEM_MINUS
pset macro s VK_TAB
pset macro c VK_RETURN
pset macro c VK_ADD
pset macro c VK_LEFT
pset macro c VK_RIGHT
pset macro c VK_SEPARATOR
"<vt__pf2><vt__remove>"
"<vt__pf4><vt__pf4>"
"<vt__find>"
"<vt__f20>"
"<vt__pf1><vk__tab>"
"<vt__pf1>_013"
"<vk__subtract>"
"<vt__pf1>_027[D"
"<vt__pf1>_027[C"
"<vt__pf1>_013"
pset macro a VK_a
"<vt__pf3>+A"
Note: The underscore character in each virtual key name within a

string has to be entered twice because a single underscore
character is used to introduce an ASCII decimal value or
equivalent.
12-6

Similar definitions can also be applied to soft buttons to allow frequently used
sequences to be accessible with one mouse click.
Key combinations are also possible to define by including the complete combination
within angle brackets (< and >). For example, to program the A key so that it
performs the same function as ALT + F4 :pset macro VK_A "<ALT+VT__F4>"
Launching An Application
& Changing The Window Focus
There are 2 additional special sequences which can be programmed into soft
buttons or keyboard macros:
To launch an application, include the 'command line' within round brackets:
PSET MACRO VK_F1 "(c:\TeemTalk\tt07w.exe)"
To change the window focus (window class name), include it within quotes within
angle brackets:
PSET MACRO VK_F2 "<_034tt07w_034>"
Note: The decimal value of the double quote character is used
within the string to prevent the script program assuming
that it terminates the string.
Initiating A DDE Conversation

The following script file example will attempt to initiate a DDE conversation with the
application Excel and display various informative messages.
var $dummy
var %channel1
var %channel2
var $RequestedSelectInfo
var %int=0
var $RequestedInformation
var $ddelist
var $title "TT07W Script to Excel DDE interface_n_r"
pset curr dht, bg blue, fg yellow
wrt title
pset curr dhb
wrt title
pset curr clr
lab5:
DDE initiate "Excel", "system", channel1, ddelist
12-7

if (errno)
goto lab1:
DDE initiate "Excel", "sheet1", channel2
if (errno)
goto lab2:
wrt "DDE initiation with Excel succeeded_n_r"
wrt "Excel Supports the following Clipboard formats:_n_r_t"
dde request "Formats" RequestedInformation, channel1
dde request "Selection" RequestedSelectInfo, channel1
wrt RequestedInformation"_n_r"
wrt RequestedSelectInfo"_n_r"
wrt "About to open the Excel Spreadsheet Expenses.xls_n_r"
dde execute '[open("h:\excel\excelcbt\expenses.xls")]', channel1
if (errno)
{
wrt "Open spreadsheet failed_n_r"
goto lab2:
}
dde poke RequestedInformation, "R1C1:R1C6", channel2
dde cancel channel2
lab2:
dde cancel channel1
goto lab3:
lab1:
if (channel1 < 0)
goto lab4:
if (int == 1)
goto lab4:
launch "h:\excel\excel.exe", "min"
if (errno == 0)
{
inc int
goto lab5:
}
wrt "Unable to launch Excel"
lab3:
inp "_n_rHit Enter to Exit" dummy
exit
lab4:
wrt "Unable to establish dde link with Excel_n_r"
if (channel1 < 0)
{
channel1 = - channel1
wrt "Had "channel1" multiple sessions_n_r"
wrt ddelist
}
goto lab3:
12-8
Initiating A File Transfer

The following script file example will attempt to initiate a file transfer and display
various informative messages.
******************************
* Transfer a file using Kermit *
******************************
VAR %reply
VAR %success = 1
VAR $files = ""
VAR $message
HRCV HOLD
GOSUB lab2:
IF (success == 0)
GOTO lab1:
GOSUB lab3:
IF (success == 0)
GOTO lab1:
DIALOGUE "File Transfer","Send Filename ?",files
IF (errno)
GOTO lab1:
IF (files == "")
GOTO lab1:
GOSUB lab4:
IF (success == 0)
GOTO lab1:
GOSUB lab5:
HRCV PROC
EXIT
*******************
* Initiate Kermit *
*******************
lab2:
PUT "kermit_r"
HCMP 60,"C-Kermit>"
IF (errno)
{
MSGBOX "'kermit' did not get 'C-Kermit>' prompt",1,reply
LET success = 0
RETURN
}
PUT "set file type binary_r"
HCMP 60,"C-Kermit>"
12-9

IF (errno)
{
MSGBOX "'set file type binary' did not get 'C-Kermit>' prompt",1,reply
LET success = 0
RETURN
}
RETURN
****************************
* Setting Kermit to 'server' *
****************************
lab3:
LET success = 1
PUT "server_r"
HCMP 60,"reconnect._n_r_n"
IF (errno)
{
LET success = 0
MSGBOX setting remote Kermit to server failed,1,reply
}
RETURN
****************************************
* Remote Send a 'filename' using Kermit *
****************************************
lab4:
LET success = 1
FTU INITIATE
FTU SET TRANSFER KERMIT
IF (errno)
{
LET success = 0
MSGBOX "Could not set 'TRANSFER' mode to 'KERMIT'",1,reply
GOTO lab6:
}
FTU SET HOW SEND
IF (errno)
{
LET success = 0
MSGBOX "Failed to set 'HOW' parameter to 'SEND'",1,reply
GOTO lab6:
}
FTU START files
IF (errno)
{
LET success = 0
LET message = "'KERMIT remote SEND' failed (errno = " + errno + ")"
MSGBOX message,1,reply
GOTO lab6:
12-10

}
ELSE
{
MSGBOX "'KERMIT remote SEND' successful",1,reply
}
lab6:
FTU CANCEL
RETURN
***********************************
* Take Kermit out of 'server' mode *
***********************************
lab5:
LET success = 1
FTU INITIATE
FTU SET TRANSFER KERMIT
IF (errno)
{
LET success = 0
MSGBOX "Could not set 'TRANSFER' mode to 'KERMIT'",1,reply
GOTO lab7:
}
FTU SET REMOTE FINISH
IF (errno)
{
LET success = 0
MSGBOX "Failed to set 'REMOTE' parameter to 'FINISH'",1,reply
GOTO lab7:
}
FTU SET HOW REMOTE
IF (errno)
{
LET success = 0
MSGBOX "Failed to set 'HOW' parameter to 'REMOTE'",1,reply
GOTO lab7:
}
FTU START
IF (errno)
{
LET success = 0
LET message = "'KERMIT REMOTE FINISH' failed (errno = " + errno + ")"
MSGBOX message,1,reply
GOTO lab7:
}
lab7:
FTU CANCEL
RETURN
12-11
Syntax Conventions
This section explains the rules for writing a script program.
Program Lines
The first text entry of each line must be a script command or a line label, which may be
preceded by any number of spaces from the beginning of the line. The command can
be entered in upper or lower case. Command parameters may be separated by a comma
or/and a space.
Comments
You can enter comments on separate lines or on the same line as a script command. In
both cases the comment must be prefixed by a semicolon (;). For example:
; This is a comment line
pset emul mode vt2207 ; This is a comment on a command line
Labelling Lines
You can assign a label to a line to indicate the start of a subroutine. Labels do not
have to be entered on a separate line, they can be placed anywhere.
A label consists of alphanumeric characters immediately followed by a colon, but
note that the label must not begin with a number otherwise it will be treated as a line
number by the program. For example:
start:
pset:
subroutine1: are valid labels, whereas
2start: start : :start
are not valid.
Note that the label may include the same characters as a script command (such as
pset: above), but will not be treated as a command as long as it is immediately
followed by a colon. References to labels (e.g. by gosub or goto) must include the
colon.
Strings & Variables

Strings should normally be enclosed by double quote characters unless specified
otherwise. You can include double quote characters within a string by entering each
character twice with no space in between. The maximum size of a string or variable
is 256 characters.
Underline Characters In Strings

To include an underline character in a string so that it is treated as such and not as a
control character introducer, enter the character twice with no space in between.
12-12

Decimal Value Of ASCII Characters In Strings
You can enter the decimal value of ASCII characters within character strings. A
decimal value is entered as a three digit number preceded by an underline character.
Decimal values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero.
For example:
_027
_010
_095
means ESC (the Escape character)

means LF (the Line Feed character)
means _ (the underline character)
So "User Identity: _010_013" specifies the string User Identity: followed by a line
feed then carriage return.
ASCII Control Character Abbreviations

As some ASCII control characters are used frequently within a script file, for
example LF (line feed) and CR (carriage return), special abbreviations may be used
instead of their decimal values. The list of valid abbreviations for control characters
is as follows:
_b
_f
_n
_r
_t
Backspace (0x08 hex), the equivalent of _008.

Form feed (0x0c hex), the equivalent of _012.
New line (line feed) (0x0A hex), the equivalent of _010.
Carriage return (0x0D hex), the equivalent of _013.
Tab (horizontal) (0x09 hex), the equivalent of _009.
So "User Identity: _010_013" may be entered as "User Identity: _n_r"
Boolean Values
When a command requires a boolean value, this can be any of the following where
the value may be abbreviated to the UPPERCASE characters: 0 or 1, No or Yes,
False or True, OFF or ON.
12-13
Script Operators
The script language supports various arithmetic operators to facilitate calculations and
manipulations on numeric variables and discrete numeric values. Some of the
operators are also extended to provide some useful manipulations on strings and
string variables. Operators such as + and * are straight forward. Those that are not so
intuitive will be described with the aid of script examples.
The valid operators are as follows:
( ) * / % + - < <= > >= == != = += -= *= /= %=
Numeric Operators
Subtraction (-)
The - operator takes on one of two guises, depending on how it is used. It is
interpreted as a simple subtraction operator in a command such as:
Data = 4 - 2
which would set the value stored in Data to 2. However, it can also be used as a
negate or "unary minus" operator when used in the following way:
Data = 4 * -2
which would set the value stored in Data to -8.
Less Than, Greater Than (< <= > >=)

These provide a test allowing the comparison of two numeric values, of use within an
IF statement. For example:
var %Input
inp "Input a number, between 1 and 10", Input
if (Input <= 0)
goto routine1:
else if (Input > 10)
goto routine1:
else
{
wrt "Input value = ", Input, "_n_r"
goto routine2:
}
routine1:
wrt "You gave an invalid input_n_r"
routine2:
exit
12-14

Equivalence Testing (== !=)
The == and != operators allow you to check that a variable is set to a particular value.
For example, the following lines could be inserted between the 6th and 7th lines in
the above sample code to provide a check for a specific value:
else if (Input == 5)
wrt "That's the value I wanted_n_r"
or alternatively, replace the 7th and 9th lines with the following:
else if (Input != 5)
wrt ("That's not the value I wanted_n_r)
Division Operators (/ %)
The / operator performs a straight forward division operation on two numerics. If the
variable receiving the result of the operation is a float then the defined variable would
hold the exact value, otherwise, with an integer variable, the result would be rounded
down to the nearest integral value. For example:
var %Int
var !Float
Int = Float = 5.0 / 2
wrt "Float result of 5.0 / 2 = ", Float, "_n_r"
wrt "Int result of 5.0 / 2 = ", Int, "_n_r"
exit
would print the two lines:
Float result of 5.0 / 2 = 2.50000
Int result of 5.0 / 2 = 2
Note that the expression 5.0 / 2 is specified, and not 5 / 2. This is to ensure that the
language interpreter performs the arithmetic operation using floats instead of the
default of integers. So if the third line was Int = Float = 5 / 2 the result would be:
Float result of 5 / 2 = 2.00000
Int result of 5 / 2 = 2
The % operator will only work on integer operations. If a floating point operation
contains this operator, the system flag will be set to FALSE, indicating an error, and
the rest of the line will be ignored. The operator is provided as a means to achieve the
remainder of the result of an integral divide. For example:
var %Int
Int = 5 % 2
wrt "result of 5 % 2 = ", Int, "_n_r"
exit
would print the line:
result of 5 % 2 = 1
12-15

Arithmetic Modifiers (+= -= *= /= %=)
These operators all act as per their usual function (if the = was ignored), but have the
effect that they substitute the resultant value back into the variable upon which they
were operating. For example:
var %Int = 9
Int += 1
wrt "Int = ", Int, "_n_r"
exit
would print the line:
Int = 10
String Operators
There are a limited number of operators that will successfully manipulate strings.
These are as follows:
+ += = == != < <= > >=
Copying Strings (= + +=)

These operators will copy one string either onto the end of another, or copy one
string to another.
For example:
var $String = "Hello"
var $Result
Result = String + " Everybody"
would set Result to contain the string "Hello Everybody"
Or alternatively:
var $String = "Hello"
String += " Everybody"
would change String to contain the string "Hello Everybody"
String Comparison (== != < <= > >=)

These operators enable strings to be compared.
The == operator will check that two strings are the same, whereas the != operator will
check that they are not the same.
12-16

For example:
var $String
while (String != "Exit")
inp "Give me a string", String
exit
would keep requesting for input until the string equals Exit.
The < and <= operators compare the decimal values of each character in the string in
turn to see if the values are less than that of the equivalent characters in the string to
which it is compared. In a similar way, the > and => check whether the decimal
values are greater.
Precedence & Order Of Evaluation

Operator
Associativity
( )
! - (unary)
* / %
+ < <= > >=
== !=
= += -= *= /= %=
Left to Right
Right to Left
Left to Right
Left to Right
Left to Right
Left to Right
Right to Left
The above table summarises the rules for precedence and associativity of operators
available in the script language. Operators on the same line have the same
precedence; lines are in order of decreasing precedence. So, for example, * / and %
have the same precedence, which is higher than that of + and -.
Note that the brackets have the highest priority and are used to override the default
precedences assumed by the script decoder.
For example:
var %Data
Data = 1 + 2 * 3 + 4
wrt "Data = ", Data, "_n_r"
would output Data = 11, whereas
var %Data
Data = (1 + 2) * (3 + 4)
wrt "Data = ", Data, "_n_r"
would output Data = 21.
12-17
Command Descriptions
The commands that can be used in the script file are described in alphabetical order on
the following pages.
Conventions
Character Case
Each command description begins by showing the basic command followed by the
command format with any parameters. The command itself is shown in uppercase
though it is not case sensitive. Commands referred to within the main text, and
program examples, are generally shown in lowercase.
Parameters
If a command requires one or more parameters then an indication of the entry
required is enclosed in angle brackets. For example:
DIALOGUE <title> <caption> <variable>
Each parameter indicator must be substituted with the relevant information as
specified by the description for the command. So for the example above you could
enter the following:
DIALOGUE "Name" "Please enter your name here" name
If a command includes parameters that may be omitted, these will be enclosed by
square brackets. For example:
HCMP,<time> <string1> [<string2>...]
where <string2> is optional.
Do not include the angle or square brackets as part of the command unless you are
specifically told to do so in the command description.
Boolean Values
When a command requires a boolean value, this can be any of the following where
the value may be abbreviated to the UPPERCASE characters: 0 or 1, No or Yes,
False or True, OFF or ON.
12-18
Command Summary
PROGRAM COMMANDS
BRF
BRT
ELSE
EXIT
GOSUB
GOTO
IF
LAUNCH
LET
QUIT
RAND
RETURN
SEED
SWITCH
WHILE
Branch to specified label line if system flag is false.

Branch to specified label line if system flag is true.
Do the following if previously specified if condition not true.
Exit script program but not TeemTalk.
Go to subroutine at specified label line.
Go to specified label line.
Perform the following if specified condition is true.
Launch specified application.
Let the following be true.
Exit script program and TeemTalk.
Put next random number into floating point number variable.
Return to line following gosub.
Reset the random number generator seed.
Compare value with cases & perform command if matched.
Perform the following while specified condition is true.
CLIPBOARD
CLIPBD APPEND
CLIPBD EMPTY
CLIPBD READ
CLIPBD WRITE
Append specified string to the clipboard.

Clear all data from the clipboard.
Place clipboard contents in variable.
Write data to clipboard.
COMMUNICATIONS
BREAK
CAPTURE
CLR
REPLAY
WAIT
Break for specified time.

Log all data received from host to specified file.
Clear communications buffer.
Replay host data log file created by capture.
Host waits for specified time period.
DYNAMIC DATA EXCHANGE

DDE CANCEL
DDE EXECUTE
DDE INITIATE
DDE POKE
DDE REQUEST
Cancel a DDE conversation.

Partner to perform specified instructions.
Start a DDE conversation.
Send data to specified item.
Request information on specified item.
DISPLAY
CLB
CLS
Clear display buffer.

Clear display and home cursor.
12-19

DIALOGUE
DSP
INP
MSGBOX
PASSWORD
RDPXY
RDT
RDTXY
SUBTITLE
SYSERR
TCMP
TITLE
TOOLBAR ADD
TOOLBAR DEL
TOOLBAR FIX
TOOLBAR FLOAT
TOOLBAR HIDE
TOOLBAR INS
WRT
Display dialog box with text box, Ok & Cancel buttons.

Display and action following lines.
Display prompt & place entered characters in variable.
Display message box incorporating specified buttons.
Display dialog box for password entry.
Read characters from display buffer position & place in variable.
Read characters from cursor position & place in variable.
Read characters from screen position & place in variable.
Display specified text as a subtitle in the title bar.
Enable/disable display of error message boxes.
Wait for specified string to appear on the display.
Display specified text as a title in the title bar.
Add a button tool to end of current toolbar set.
Delete a button tool or space from toolbar.
Fix toolbar under menu bar.
Toolbar displayed as floating palette.
Remove toolbar from display.
Insert button tool or space at specified position.
Display variable or string at cursor position.
ERROR TRAPPING
ERRORCODE
ERRORLINE
ONERROR
Return program error code ID or message.

Return number of line containing program error.
Perform specified action when program error encountered.
FILE OPERATIONS
DIRFIRST
DIRNEXT
FILE CLOSE
FILE COPY
FILE DELETE
FILE OPEN
FILE READ
FILE RENAME
FILE RGET
FILE SEEK
FILE STAT
FILE WPUT
FILE WRITE
Get first entry in working directory.

Get next entry in working directory.
Close specified file.
Copy specified file.
Delete specified file.
Open specified file.
Read file characters & assign to variable.
Rename the specified file.
Get single file character & assign to variable.
Specify location in file for read/write operation.
Get statistics for specified file.
Write single character from variable to file.
Write variable contents to file.
FILE TRANSFER
FTU CANCEL
FTU GET
FTU INITIATE
12-20
Release current links to the file transfer utility.

Get the value of the specified parameter.
Link up to the file transfer utility.

FTU SET
FTU START
Set the value of the specified parameter.

Start the file transfer.
FTP FILE TRANSFER

FTP CD
FTP CONNECT
FTP COPYDLG
FTP DIRFIRST
FTP DIRNEXT
FTP DISCONNECT
FTP GET
FTP PUT
FTP RM
FTP SET
FTP TOOL
FTP WD
Change current local/remote directory.

Connect to specified host.
Display message box during file transfer.
Get first entry in local/remote directory.
Get next entry in local/remote directory.
Close connection with host.
Get the specified file from the remote host.
Send the specified file to the remote host.
Remove the specified local/remote file.
Set the transfer mode to ASCII, binary or Tenex.
Display FTP dialog box.
Get the local/remote working directory.
HOST CHARACTERS
HCMP
HGET
HRCV
Enter terminal emulation and wait for string from host.

Get character from host and place in variable.
Specifies treatment of received host characters.
KEYBOARD CHARACTERS & FUNCTIONS

INP
KACT
KBD
KGET
KINTERCEPT
KPRESS
KRAW
KRCV
KSTR
Display prompt and place entered characters in variable.

Perform function of key as if pressed by terminal operator.
Type string from keyboard to host.
Get character from keyboard and place in variable.
Intercept & store keystrokes in queue.
Perform function of specified key.
Retrieve keystroke from intercept queue.
Specifies treatment of received keyboard characters.
Treat following as macro command(s).
SETUP
FACT
GETINI
PGET
PSET
RST
SAVESET
SETINI
Assert factory default settings.

Get setting from initialization file.
Get setup parameter or attribute value.
Set setup parameter or attribute value.
Reset TeemTalk.
Save current setup configuration.
Set setting in initialization file.
12-21
STRING OPERATIONS
DECRYPT
ENCRYPT
FSTR
LEN
LOW
LSTR
MSTR
PARSE
PACK
PACKTAB
PUT
RSTR
UPP
WRT
Decrypt encrypted string and place in variable.

Encrypt string and place in variable.
Format string to specified length and alignment.
Count characters and spaces in variable.
Convert uppercase characters to lowercase & place string in variable.
Copy number of characters from left of string & place in variable.
Copy number of characters from middle of string & place in variable.
Parse string using specified item and place in variables.
Remove redundant spaces in string.
Reduce multiple spaces/tabs to a single tab.
Send variable or string to host.
Copy number of characters from right of string & place in variable.
Convert lowercase characters to uppercase & place string in variable.
VARIABLES
CONV
DEC
INC
LEN
PUT
VAR
WRT
12-22
Convert data from one variable type to another.

Decrement value of specified variable by 1.
Increment value of specified variable by 1.
Count characters and spaces in variable.
Send variable or string to host.
Specify variable type and name.
Commands
BREAK
Syntax: BREAK <time>
Places a break signal on communications line for the specified time in milliseconds.
If no time is specified then the break will be for 250 milliseconds.
BRF
Syntax: BRF <label>
If the system flag is set to FALSE, the program branches to the line with the specified
label. If the label does not exist, the program continues with the next line.
BRT
Syntax: BRT <label>
If the system flag is set to TRUE, the program branches to the line with the specified
label. If the label does not exist, the program continues with the next line.
CAPTURE
Syntax: CAPTURE <filespec>
CAPTURE CANCEL
This will cause all data received from the host to be stored in the specified file until a
capture cancel command is issued. The file can be replayed later using the replay
emul or replay host command.
CLB
Syntax: CLB
This will cause the contents of the TeemTalk display buffer to be cleared.
CLIPBD APPEND
Syntax: CLIPBD APPEND <string>
This command will append the specified string to the clipboard.
12-23
CLIPBD EMPTY
Syntax: CLIPBD EMPTY
This command will open the clipboard, clear all the data contained in the clipboard,
then close it. Refer to the Error Numbers section later in this chapter for a list of
possible error numbers for this command.
CLIPBD READ
Syntax: CLIPBD READ <variable>
This command will open the clipboard, read all the data contained in the clipboard
and place it in the specified string variable, then close the clipboard. Note that the
data placed in the variable could potentially contain carriage returns, line feeds and
tabs.
CLIPBD WRITE
Syntax: CLIPBD WRITE <string>
This command will open the clipboard, write the data contained in the string or
variable to the clipboard, then close it. The string or variable can contain carriage
returns, line feeds and tabs.
CLR
Syntax: CLR
Clears the communications buffer.
CLS
Syntax: CLS
Moves the cursor to home and clears the screen.
CONV
Syntax: CONV <destvar> <sourcevar>
This copies data from <sourcevar> and converts its variable type (string, integer or
floating point number) to that of <destvar>, which will store the result as follows:
<destvar>
<sourcevar>
string
integer
12-24
Result
<destvar> will contain the ASCII character that
has the decimal value given by <sourcevar>.

<destvar>
<sourcevar>
Result
integer
string
<destvar> will contain the ASCII decimal value

of the first character in <sourcevar>.
integer
float
<destvar> will contain the result of rounding

the floating point number in <sourcevar> to
the nearest integer.
float
integer
<destvar> will contain the floating point number

equivalent of the integer in <sourcevar>.
DDE CANCEL
Syntax: DDE CANCEL [<channel>]
Cancels the DDE conversation on the channel specified by the <channel> variable
(as defined by the dde initiate command). If no channel variable is specified then the
channel ID is assumed to be 1. More than one channel variable may be specified on
the same line. The system flag will be set to TRUE if the command is successful, or
FALSE if failed.
DDE EXECUTE
Syntax: DDE EXECUTE <instructions> [<channel>]
This command specifies a list of instructions that the DDE partner should perform,
where
<instructions> is either a string delimited by single quote characters containing the
instructions, or a string variable (excluding single quotes).
<channel>
is the name of the integer variable identifying the particular channel

for the DDE link if specified by the dde initiate command, otherwise this is omitted.
The following example will cause an Excel file called expenses.xls to be opened on
channel 1:
dde execute '[open("h:\excel\excelcbt\expenses.xls")]' channel1
DDE INITIATE
Syntax: DDE INITIATE <app> <topic> [<channel> <ddelist>]
This command starts a dynamic data exchange (DDE) conversation between
TeemTalk and an application, where
<app>
is a string specifying the name of the DDE partner (i.e. the

application).
<topic>
is a string specifying the name of a topic for the DDE partner.
12-25

<channel>
is the name of an integer variable (see var) into which an ID will be

placed reflecting the particular channel for the initiated DDE link. A
maximum of four channels may be used at any one time, each must
have a different variable name. This may be omitted if only one channel is to be used (i.e. only one DDE conversation is to be initiated),
and the channel ID will be set to 1.
<ddelist>
is the name of a string variable into which a list of topics found for
the DDE partner will be placed. This may be omitted, but if included
it must be used in conjunction with <channel>.
The system flag will be set to TRUE and the errno (error number) variable will be
set to 0 if the command is successful, or FALSE and an error number other than 0 if
the command failed.
Up to four DDE conversations will be permitted if a <channel> variable is specified.
When a DDE connection is successfully made, the <channel> variable will contain
the ID of the conversation. If the connection was unsuccessful, <channel> will have
a value of 0 or -#, where # indicates the number of multiple sessions that would have
been started.
If <ddelist> is specified and the <channel> variable is -#, then <ddelist> will contain
a list of strings relating to each individual session that would have been started. Each
entry in the list will be separated by a comma, as follows:
szAppName1|szTopic1,szAppName2|szTopic2
You can list the available topics for an application by specifying an empty string for
the <topic> entry and including the <channel> and <ddelist> variable names. The
following example will cause a list of available topics for the application Excel to be
stored in the variable ExcelTopics:
dde initiate "Excel" "" channel ExcelTopics
DDE POKE
Syntax: DDE POKE <variable> <item> [<channel>]
Sends a poke to the DDE partner, placing data contained in a variable into a specified
item, where
<variable>
is the name of the variable which contains the information to be

placed.
<item>
is a string containing the name of the item where the information is to

be placed.
<channel>
is the name of the integer variable identifying the particular channel

for the DDE link if specified by the dde initiate command, otherwise
this is omitted.
12-26

The following example will place data contained in the variable data1 into cells
located at row 1 column 1 through row 2 column 3 inclusive, with no channel
specified (assuming the DDE partner is an Excel spreadsheet):
dde poke data1 "R1C1:R2C3"
DDE REQUEST
Syntax: DDE REQUEST <item> <variable> [<channel>]
Requests that information relating to an item is assigned to a variable name, where
<item>
is a string containing the name of the item from which information is

requested.
<variable>
is the name of a string variable (see var) in which the information is to

be stored.
<channel>
is the name of the integer variable identifying the particular channel for
the DDE link if specified by the dde initiate command, otherwise this
is omitted.
The following example will request that data contained in cells located at row 1
column 1 through row 2 column 3 inclusive is to be placed in the variable data1,
with no channel specified (assuming the DDE partner is an Excel spreadsheet):
dde request "R1C1:R2C3" data1
DEC
Syntax: DEC <variable> [<variable>...]
Decreases the integer or floating point number assigned to the specified variable(s)
by one.
DECRYPT
Syntax: DECRYPT <result> <string> <key>
Decrypts a string previously encrypted by the encrypt command, where
<result>
is a previously defined string variable (see var) which will store the
decrypted string.
<string>
is a string or string variable containing the hexadecimal characters to

decrypt.
<key>
is one or more characters that were used to define the original

encryption.
The Error Numbers section lists the possible error numbers for this command.
12-27
DIALOGUE
Syntax: DIALOGUE <title> <caption> <variable> [<x> <y>]
This command enables you to display a simple dialog box with a specified title,
containing two buttons (Ok and Cancel) and a single line text box with a specified
caption, where
<title>
is the text to be displayed in the title bar of the dialog box, as specified
by a string delimited by double quotes or a string variable.
<caption>
is the text that will appear to the left or above the text box, as specified
by a string delimited by double quotes or a string variable.
<variable>
is a previously defined string variable (see var) which is used to store

the text entered in the text box by the user, but only if the Ok button is
pressed, otherwise the variable is set to NULL. Text stored in this
variable will be displayed in the text box by default when the dialog is
viewed again later.
<x> <y>
specify the horizontal and vertical position of the top left corner of the
dialog box in relation to the top left corner of the screen in pixels.
These can be integers or variables.
The following example will display a dialog box titled User containing a text box
with the prompt Enter your name:, and cause the text entered in the text box by the
user to be stored in the string variable name when the Ok button is pressed.
dialogue "User" "Enter your name: " name 100 100
DIRFIRST
Syntax: DIRFIRST <filename> [<size> <mode> <modtm> <uname> <gname>]
This will get the first entry in the working directory and place it in the previously
defined string variables, where
<filename> is a previously defined string variable (see var) which will store the
name of the file. This is the only variable that must be specified, the
others are optional.
<size>
is a previously defined string or integer variable which will store the

size of the file.
<mode>
is a previously defined string variable which will store the mode.
<modtime> is a previously defined string variable which will store the time of the
last modification.
<uname>
12-28

user name (UNIX only).

<gname>

group name (UNIX only).
Note that if you require a value which follows one or more that are not required, you
will still need to supply variables for them. For example, if you only wanted the time
that the file was last modified, you would need to specify a variable for <size> and
<mode> as well as <modtime>.
Note that on a UNIX system the first entry is always ".". This command can be
followed by one or more dirnext commands to work through the directory listing.
If the command is invalid then the variable will be set to "" (zero length).
DIRNEXT
Syntax: DIRNEXT <filename> [<size> <mode> <modtime> <uname>
<gname>]
This will get the next entry in the working directory following a dirfirst command
and place it in the previously defined string variables, where
<size>

size of the file.
<mode>
last modification.
<uname>

user name (UNIX only).
<gname>

group name (UNIX only).
This command can be followed by more dirnext commands to work through the
directory listing.
If the command is invalid or there are no more directory entries then the variable will
be set to "" (zero length).
12-29
DSP
Syntax: DSP <integer>
If the integer is 1, all the program lines that follow are displayed and actioned. If the
integer is 0, all following lines are actioned but not displayed.
ELSE
Syntax: ELSE
This command is used in conjunction with the if command and informs the program
to perform the command(s) on the following line(s) if a previously specified if
condition was not true.
For example:
if (integer > 3)
goto routine1:
else
goto routine2:
If more than one command line is to be associated with else, insert a line containing
the { (open curly brace) character before the first command line and a line containing
the } (close curly brace) character following the last command line.
For example:
if (integer > 3)
goto routine1:
else
{
inc integer
goto routine2:
}
The if command may be used on the same line as else, for example:
if (N == 1)
X=2
else if (N == 2)
X=4
else
X=1
12-30
ENCRYPT
Syntax: ENCRYPT <result> <string> <key>
Encrypts a string, where
<result>
encrypted string.
<string>
is a string or string variable containing the string to encrypt.
<key>
is one or more characters that are used to define how the string is
encrypted. These can be any characters except nulls.
Each character in the string will be represented as two hexadecimal characters in the
resulting encryption. The hexadecimal characters will vary according to the <key>
characters specified. You can use the decrypt command to convert the encrypted
string back to normal characters.
ERRORCODE
Syntax: ERRORCODE <variable>
This command specifies the type of error code that will be returned when an error is
encountered in the script program. Specifying an integer variable will return an error
ID number, while a string variable will return an error message. Refer to the Script
Error Trapping Functions section later in this chapter for details.
ERRORLINE
Syntax: ERRORLINE <variable>
This command will return the line number of the last script program error. Refer to
the Script Error Trapping Functions section later.
EXIT
Syntax: EXIT
Terminates the script program but does not exit TeemTalk.
FACT
Syntax: FACT
This will cause TeemTalk to reassert the original setup configuration it had when you
first installed it.
12-31
FILE CLOSE
Syntax: FILE CLOSE <handle>
Closes the file with the specified handle where <handle> is the name of the integer
variable assigned by the file open command.
FILE COPY
Syntax: FILE COPY <filename> <destname>
This will copy the file specified by the <filename> string or string variable to the
specified destination, where the <destname> string or string variable can be a full
path name, just a filename, or just a path. For example:
file copy "myfile.tmp" "/distrib/source/work/newfile.tmp"
will create the file newfile.tmp in the directory /distrib/source/work. The Error
Numbers section lists the possible error numbers for this command.
FILE DELETE
Syntax: FILE DELETE <filespec>
Deletes the file specified by the string or string variable <filespec>. Refer to the
Error Numbers appendix for a list of possible error numbers for this command.
FILE OPEN
Syntax: FILE OPEN <variable> <filespec> <operation>
This command is used to open a specified file, assign an integer to identify the file,
and specify whether the file is to be created, read, written to, or any combination of
these, where
<variable>
is a previously defined integer variable (see var) which will be used to

store an integer which will identify the file for future commands. (This
will be referred to as the <handle> in other file command descriptions.)
<filespec>
is a string or string variable containing the name of the file on which

operations will be performed. This can be a file which already exists or
a new file which will be created if C is specified in the following <operation> string.
<operation> is a string or string variable containing any of the following characters

which define the type of operation that is to be performed on the file: R
12-32

(read) W (write) and C (create). If this string is omitted the program will
assume that the file will have read and write operations performed on it.
For example, to create the file myfile.doc and enable characters to be written to it, the
following line would be entered, specifying that the integer identifying the file is to
be stored in the variable called id:
file open id myfile.doc "cw"
FILE READ
Syntax: FILE READ <handle> <variable> <length>
This will read a specified number of characters from a file and assign them to a
variable, where
<handle>
is the integer variable specified by the file open command and used to
identify the file.
<variable>
is a previously defined variable (see var) which will be used to store

the characters. Note that if the variable was created in the integer format, the decimal value of the first two characters will be assigned to it.
<length>
is the number of characters to be read if the variable is in string format.

If the variable is in integer format the number of characters that will be
read is two, and if in floating point number format the number of characters that will be read is four.
More than one variable (and length specifier if a string variable) may be specified to
store successive blocks of characters from the file.
The following example will read ten characters from the file identified by the handle
id and assign them to the string variable char1, then read the next six characters and
assign them to the string variable char2, and finally read the next 2 characters and
place them in the integer variable number:
file read id char1 10 char2 6 number
FILE RENAME
Syntax: FILE RENAME <filename> <newname>
This will rename the file specified by <filename> to that of <newname>. Both
filenames can be specified as strings or string variables.
12-33
FILE RGET
Syntax: FILE RGET <handle> <variable>
This will get a single character from a file and assign it to a variable, where
<handle>
identify the file.
<varname> is a previously defined variable (see var) which will be used to store
the character. Note that if the variable was created in the integer format, the decimal value of the character will be assigned to it.
More than one variable may be specified to store successive characters from the file.
Refer to the Error Numbers section later in this chapter for a list of possible error
numbers for this command.
FILE SEEK
Syntax: FILE SEEK <handle> <position> [<count>]
This command specifies the location within a file at which character read and write
operations are to occur, where
<handle>
identify the file.
<position>
defines the approximate position in the file as start, current or end

(which may be abbreviated to S, C and E, respectively).
<count>
defines the particular character location as the number of characters

from the <position> setting, which is entered as a minus or plus figure
(e.g. +6 or -25). This parameter may be omitted.
The following example will move the location to twelve characters from the end of
the file identified by the handle id:
file seek id e -12
FILE STAT
Syntax: FILE STAT <filename> [<size> <mode> <modtime> <uname> <gname>]
This will get the statistics of the specified file and place them in the previously
defined string variables, where
<filename> is a string or string variable that specifies the name of the file. This is
the only entry that must be specified, the others are optional.
12-34

<size>
is a previously defined string or integer variable (see var) which will

store the size of the file.
<mode>
last modification.
<uname>

user name.
<gname>

group name.
You can use this command to check for the existence of a file. For example, to check
the existence of the file myfile.tmp, you could specify the following:
file stat "myfile.tmp"
if errno == 13
wrt "did not find myfile.tmp"
FILE WPUT
Syntax: FILE WPUT <handle> <variable>
This will write the character assigned to a variable to a file, where
<handle>
identify the file.
<variable>
is a previously defined variable (see var) which contains the character

to be written.
More than one variable may be specified to write successive characters to the file.
FILE WRITE
Syntax: FILE WRITE <handle> <variable> <length>
This will write characters assigned to a variable to a file, where
<handle>
identify the file.
12-35

<variable>
is a previously defined variable (see var) which contains the characters

to be written to the file.
<length>
is the number of characters to be written if the variable is in string format. If the variable is in integer format the number of characters that will
be written is two, and if in floating point number format the number of
characters that will be written is four.
More than one variable may be specified to write successive blocks of characters to the
file.
FSTR
Syntax: FSTR <align> <new> <orig> <length>
This command enables you to format a string of characters to a required length by
adding spaces and aligning the text to the left, right or centre, where
<align>
is a single character that indicates the text alignment:

C
centred
L
left aligned
R
right aligned
<new>
is a predefined string variable (see var) which will contain the

formatted string.
<orig>
is a string or variable containing the text to be formatted.
<length>
is the length of the string required. If this is shorter than the length of
the source string then the entire source string will be copied to the
destination variable without formatting.
The following example will copy the string contained in the variable orig to the
variable new, add spaces to make it 20 characters long and make the text right
aligned:
fstr r new orig 20
FTP CD
Syntax: FTP CD LOCAL <directory path>
FTP CD REMOTE <directory path>
This FTP file transfer command enables you to change the current local or remote
directory. The directory path must be enclosed by double quotes. The following
entries are also valid: '.' and '..'. Note that ftp cd local will not affect the user's
working directory. Refer to the Error Numbers section later in this chapter for a list
of possible error numbers for this command.
12-36
FTP CONNECT
Syntax: FTP CONNECT <system> <host> [<login> <password> <account>]
This enables you to make a host connection for FTP file transfer.
The <system> entry specifies the type of operating system used by the remote host
and must be one of the following entered exactly as shown and enclosed by double
quotes:
Auto
VAX UCX V1
VAX UCX V2
VAX UCX V3
VAX MultiNet
NT
UNIX
Tandem
VAX TCPWare
Prime
IBM (MVS)
Dos
HP3000
AS400
KNET/MVS
IBM (Interlink)
Other
Auto will cause FTP to automatically select the appropriate operating system and this
setting will be suitable in most cases. Note that some DOS based FTP servers cannot
automatically be resolved, so it is advisable to select DOS when you know the target
server is based on a DOS machine. VAX UCX applies to versions higher than V2.
Only choose Other if none of the other selections work.
Any of the <login>, <password> and <account> parameters may be omitted, but if a
specified parameter follows then an empty string must be entered for the omitted
parameter(s). The following example specifies the host as pericom, omits the login
parameter, specifies a password and omits the account:
ftp connect "Auto" "pericom" "" "password"
FTP COPYDLG
Syntax: FTP COPYDLG <ON/OFF>
When set to ON, this command will cause a message box to be displayed when a file
is being transferred indicating that the transfer is in progress. The box will be cleared
from the display once the transfer is completed.
12-37
FTP DIRFIRST
Syntax: FTP DIRFIRST LOCAL <filename> [<size> <mode> <modtime>
<uname> <gname>]
FTP DIRFIRST REMOTE <filename> [<size> <mode> <modtime>
<uname> <gname>]
This FTP file transfer command will get the first entry in the current local or remote
directory and place it in the previously defined string variables, where
<size>

size of the file.
<mode>
last modification.
<uname>

user name.
<gname>

group name.
On a UNIX system the first entry is always ".". This can be followed by one or more
ftp dirnext commands to work through the directory listing.
If the command is invalid then the variable will be set to "" (zero length).
Refer to the Error Numbers section for a list of possible error numbers.
12-38
FTP DIRNEXT
Syntax: FTP DIRNEXT LOCAL <filename> [<size> <mode> <modtime>
<uname> <gname>]
FTP DIRNEXT REMOTE <filename> [<size> <mode> <modtime>
<uname> <gname>]
This FTP file transfer command will get the next entry in the working directory
following an ftp dirfirst command and place it in the previously defined string
variables, where
<size>

size of the file.
<mode>
last modification.
<uname>

user name.
<gname>

group name.
This can be followed by more ftp dirnext commands to work through the directory
listing.
If the command is invalid or there are no more directory entries then the variable will
be set to "" (zero length).
Note: Both the local and remote directories can be listed at the
same time, but the process will be slow as the language will
have to constantly swap between them.
Refer to the Error Numbers section for a list of possible error numbers.
FTP DISCONNECT
Syntax: FTP DISCONNECT <boolean>
This will close an FTP connection between TeemTalk and the host previously initiated
by the ftp connect command. The optional boolean parameter can be used to shut the
FTP module down. By default (false) it keeps running.
12-39

FTP GET
Syntax: FTP GET [<mode>] <remote file> [<local file>]
This will transfer a file from the currently connected host, as initiated by the ftp
connect command, where
<mode>
sets the transfer mode to ASCII, BINARY or TENEX. This

can be omitted if the correct mode is already set.
<remote file>
is the name of the remote file to be transferred, which can

include the full directory path.
<local file>
can be used to specify a local filename and directory path for

the transferred file. This should be specified if you are
transferring a file from a VAX system.
The following example will set the transfer mode to binary and transfer the file
yourfile.tmp:
ftp get binary "yourfile.tmp"
FTP PUT
Syntax: FTP PUT [<mode>] <local file> [<remote file>]
This will transfer a file to the currently connected host, as initiated by the ftp connect
command, where
<mode>
sets the transfer mode to ASCII, BINARY or TENEX. This

can be omitted if the correct mode is already set.
<local file>
is the name of the local file to be transferred.
<remote file>
can be used to specify a remote filename for the transferred

file.
The following example will set the transfer mode to ASCII and send the file
myfile.tmp:
ftp put ascii "myfile.tmp"
12-40
FTP RM
Syntax: FTP RM LOCAL <filespec>
FTP RM REMOTE <filespec>
This FTP file transfer command will remove the specified local or remote file. Refer
to the Error Numbers section later in this chapter for a list of possible error numbers
for this command.
FTP SET
Syntax: FTP SET <mode>
This sets the file transfer mode to ASCII, BINARY or TENEX. Refer to the Error
Numbers section later in this chapter for a list of possible error numbers for this
command.
FTP TOOL
Syntax: FTP TOOL <boolean>
This will display or close the FTP dialog box.
FTP WD
Syntax: FTP WD LOCAL <variable>
FTP WD REMOTE <variable>
This FTP file transfer command will get the local or remote working directory and
place it in a previously defined string variable. Refer to the Error Numbers section
later in this chapter for a list of possible error numbers for this command.
FTU CANCEL
Syntax: FTU CANCEL
This will release the current links between TeemTalk and the file transfer utility
initiated previously by the ftu initiate command. Refer to the Error Numbers section
later in this chapter for a list of possible error numbers for this command.
FTU GET
Syntax: FTU GET <variable> <groupID> <paramID> [<subparamID>]
This command enables you to get information on a particular setting, where
<variable>
information.
12-41

<groupID>
identifies a group of parameters.
<paramID>
identifies a particular parameter, or in the case of Parameter settings

a sub-group of parameters.
<subparamID> identifies a particular parameter when the <groupID> is specified as

Parameter, otherwise this is omitted.
For example, to get the current retry limit setting and place it in the previously defined
variable called limit you would enter the following:
ftu get limit parameter general retrylimit
where parameter is the group ID, general is the parameter ID for a sub-group of
parameters, and retrylimit is the sub-parameter ID. Refer to the section entitled FTU
SET & GET Parameters later in this chapter for a complete list of valid group and
parameter IDs.
If the setting of a parameter under investigation is a control character, the decimal
value of the character will be stored in the variable. For example, if the setting is
DEL (i.e. decimal 127), then "127" will be returned.
FTU INITIATE
Syntax: FTU INITIATE
Initiates a link to the file transfer utility. If it cannot get a link, then it will try to
launch the utility and re-initiate the link. Once a link is established, TeemTalk will be
in file transfer mode and normal data transmission with the host will not be possible
until the ftu cancel command is sent. Refer to the Error Numbers section later in this
chapter for a list of possible error numbers for this command.
FTU SET
Syntax: FTU SET <groupID> <paramID> [<subparamID> <value>]
This command enables you to set file transfer setup parameters and specify
operations to perform on a remote host, where
<groupID>
identifies a group of parameters.
<paramID>
identifies a particular parameter, or in the case of Parameter settings a sub-group of parameters.
<subparamID> identifies a particular parameter when the <groupID> is specified

as Parameter, otherwise this is omitted.
<value>
12-42
is the value to be set if required.

For example, to specify that the Kermit protocol end of line character for outbound
packets is DEL, you would enter the following:
ftu set parameter kermit seol "del"
where parameter is the group ID, kermit is the parameter ID, seol is the subparameter ID, and "del" is the value.
To specify that you are to receive files you would enter the following, where how is
the group ID and receive is the parameter ID:
ftu set how receive
Refer to the section entitled FTU SET & GET Parameters later in this chapter for a
complete list of valid group IDs, parameter IDs and values.
Remote Operations
The following is an example of how you would get a file from a remote host:
ftu set remote get
ftu set how remote
ftu start "my.txt"
- this sets the remote option

- this sets the transfer method
This requires that the remote host kermit is running in server mode, which can be
achieved by using the put command as follows:
put "kermit_n_r"
put "server_n_r"
To change the directory on the remote host you will need to include a password
following the name of the directory within the string, separating it from the directory
name by the | (vertical line) character, with no spaces before or after it (unless a space
character is part of the password). For example:
ftu set remote change dir
ftu set how remote
ftu start "\ipc\textfiles|password"
If the | character is not included the command will fail.
Note: Only the remote operation commands listed in the FTU SET
& GET Parameters section of this chapter are valid.
12-43
FTU START
Syntax: FTU START <command>
This will start a file transfer where <command> can either be a variable or a string
which usually relates to the name of the file to send or receive.
The ftu set command is used prior to ftu start to specify whether you are sending or
receiving a file. For example:
ftu set how send
ftu start "fred.doc"
If how is set to remote or local, this would invoke the limited operations available.
For example:
ftu set how local
ftu start "c:\transfer\files"
would change the local directory to that specified, and:
ftu set remote change dir
ftu set how remote
ftu start "\sparc\transfer_files|password"
would change the remote directory to that specified.
Note: The remote finish, bye and logout commands will ignore
the string associated with ftu start.
GETINI
Syntax: GETINI <section> <entry> <variable> [<ini file>]
This enables you get a setting from an initialization file, where
<section>
is a string or string variable (see var) which specifies the heading of

the command group, for example tt07w for TeemTalk-07W initialization commands in the WIN.INI file, or startup,default for
TeemTalk-07W32 initialization commands in the TT07W.INI file.
<entry>
is a string or string variable which specifies the initialization command,

for example protocol.
<variable>
is the name of a previously defined string or integer variable which will

be used to store the setting.
<ini file>
is a string or string variable which specifies the name of the initialization file. This may be omitted if it is the default file WIN.INI (Windows
3.1) or TT07W.INI (Windows 95/NT).
12-44

The following example will get the current protocol setting from the Windows 3.1
WIN.INI file and place it in the string variable netprot.
getini "tt07w" "protocol" netprot
The following example will get the current protocol setting from the Windows 95 or
NT TT07W.INI file and place it in the string variable netprot.
getini "startup,default" "protocol" netprot "tt07w.ini"
The Error Numbers appendix lists the possible error numbers for this command.
GOSUB
Syntax: GOSUB <label>
The program goes to the subroutine beginning at the line with the specified label. If it
does not exist, the program continues with the next line. The program returns to the
line following the gosub when a return command is encountered.
GOTO
Syntax: GOTO <label>
The program unconditionally goes to the line with the specified label. If the label
does not exist, the program continues with the next line.
HCMP
Syntax: HCMP <delay> <string1> [<string2>...]
Enter the terminal emulation and wait for the first occurance of any of the specified
strings from the host, where
<delay>
is the number of seconds to wait for a string to be matched. This must be

an integer value, not a variable. If a matching string is received within
the time period, the system flag is set to TRUE, otherwise the flag is set
to FALSE. The program then continues with the next line. If the time
delay value is zero, the terminal emulation will be maintained indefinitely until a string is matched.
<string#> can be a literal string or a variable (including integer and floating point).
Any number of strings can be entered. There is no case sensitivity.
The errno (error number) variable will indicate the number of the string matched
according to its position after the hcmp command. Use the brf and brt commands to
test for success or failure.
12-45
HGET
Syntax: HGET <variable> [, <count> [, <timeout>]]
This gets one or more characters from the host and assigns them to the specified variable, where
<count>
is the number of characters to get from the host. If omitted then one
character will be returned.
<timeout>
is the maximum number of seconds during which the operation has to

take place before timing out.
If the format of the variable is not a string (as defined by the var command) then the
ASCII decimal value of the character(s) will be placed in the variable (e.g. A will be
65).
Note: You can use the conv command to convert the decimal
value to an ASCII character.
Examples:
hget char
Gets one character from the host.
hget str, 5
Gets five characters from the host.
hget str, 5, 10
Gets five characters from the host, timeout after 10 seconds.
The system flag will be set to FALSE and the errno (error number) variable will be
set to 0 if a timeout occurs, or TRUE and errno set to 1 if the command was
successful.
HRCV
Syntax: HRCV IGNORE
HRCV PROCESS
HRCV HOLD
This command specifies what happens to characters received from the host while the
script program is running.
When set to ignore, characters will be thrown away. When set to process, characters
will be processed as normal. When set to hold, characters will be held but not
actioned until an hrcv process command is received, except for the hget or hcmp
commands, which will be processed. The ignore, process and hold settings can be
abbreviated to I, P, and H, respectively.
12-46
IF
Syntax: IF <condition>
Informs the program to perform the command(s) on the following line(s) if the
specified condition is true. The else command may be used in conjunction with if.
For example:
if (integer > 3)
goto routine1:
else
goto routine2
If more than one command line is to be associated with if, insert a line containing the
{ (open curly brace) character before the first command line and a line containing the
} (close curly brace) character following the last command line. For example:
if (integer > 3)
{
inc integer
goto routine1:
}
else
goto routine2:
The if command may be used on the same line as else, for example:
if (N == 1)
X=2
else if (N == 2)
X=4
else
X=1
If and associated else commands may be nested up to 32 times.
INC
Syntax: INC <variable> [<variable>...]
Increases the integer or floating point number assigned to the specified variables by
one.
INP
Syntax: INP <string> <variable>
Displays the string as a prompt and causes all following characters typed from the
keyboard to be assigned to the specified variable until the Enter or Return key is
pressed. All future references to the string may be made using the variable name.
12-47

For example, to ask the user to enter his name and cause the name to be assigned to the
variable UserID, the following line would be entered:
inp "Please Enter Your Name: " UserID
KACT
Syntax: KACT <string>
This command will cause the script program to perform the function of a key as if a
terminal operator had pressed the key on the keyboard. This can be used on its own
or in conjunction with the kraw command to accept and perform an intercepted
keystroke. The <string> must contain the virtual key name of the key to be actioned.
For example:
KACT "VK__RETURN"
will cause the script program to perform the function of the Return key. Refer to the
Virtual Key Names appendix for a list of key names that can be used.
KBD
Syntax: KBD <integer> [<string>]
Sends all following characters typed from the keyboard to the host until the Enter or
Return keys are pressed, where
<integer>
is an actual integer or an integer variable which enables or disables the

keyboard-entered characters from being displayed. When the integer is
0 the characters will not be displayed. Any integer higher than 0 will
cause the characters to be displayed.
<string>
enables a prompt to be displayed so that you can indicate what the user
has to enter from the keyboard. This may be omitted.
The following example will ask the user to enter his name and will display and send
the input to the host:
kbd 1 "Please Enter Your Name: "
KGET
Syntax: KGET <variable>
This gets a character from the keyboard and assigns it to the specified variable. If the
format of the variable (defined by var) is not a string then the decimal value of the
character will be placed in the variable (e.g. A will be placed as 65). You can use the
conv command to convert the format of the variable if required.
12-48
KINTERCEPT
Syntax: KINTERCEPT <boolean>
When enabled, this command will cause all keystrokes entered by the terminal
operator to be intercepted and stored in a queue so that the script program can take
action on them using the kraw and kact commands. You should disable this function
before the script program is exited.
KPRESS
Syntax: KPRESS <key identifier>
This command will cause the script program to perform the function of the key
identified by its reference number or virtual key name. Refer to the Key Reference
Numbers appendix for a list of valid key reference numbers, and the Virtual Key
Names appendix for a list of key names that can be used.
KRAW
Syntax: KRAW <string>
When keyboard intercept is enabled by kintercept, the kraw command is used to
retrieve each keystroke in turn from the input queue so that it can either be processed,
accepted or rejected by the script program. A string can be intercepted by placing this
command in a loop.
Keystrokes are represented as virtual key names in the same format as a key macro.
For example:
"VK__F1"
the F1 key has been pressed.
"A VK__F1" the F1 key has been pressed with the Alt key held down.
If a key has not been pressed then kraw will return a null string.
KRCV
Syntax: KRCV IGNORE
KRCV PROCESS
KRCV HOLD
This command specifies what happens to characters received from the keyboard
while the script program is running.
When set to ignore, characters will be thrown away. When set to process, characters
will be processed as normal. When set to hold, characters will be held but not
actioned until a krcv process command is received, except for the kget and kbd
commands, which will be processed. The ignore, process and hold settings can be
abbreviated to I, P, and H, respectively.
12-49
KSTR
Syntax: KSTR <string>
This command will treat the characters contained in the string or string variable as
macros to be performed. Refer to the Macros Settings dialog box description in the
Setup Menus chapter for the macro definition format.
More than one macro definition can be specified in the same string or variable. The
string example below will perform the function of the keys Alt + F4 pressed together
followed by the A key:
kstr "<ALT+F4><A>"
LAUNCH
Syntax: LAUNCH <application>
This command enables you launch an application, where
<application>
is either the name of the application (and directory path if required)

enclosed by double quotes, or the name of a string variable
containing the application name.
You can cause the application to run in a minimized state when launched by
including the string "min" after <application>.
The following example will launch the application Excel so that it runs in a
minimized state:
launch "h:\excel\excel.exe" "min"
LEN
Syntax: LEN <length> <string>
This command will count the number of characters including spaces contained in a
string and store the result in a variable, where:
<length>
is a predefined variable (see var) which will store the length of the
string.
<string>
is the string of characters and spaces to be counted.
LET
Syntax: LET <expression>
This is an assignment statement which enables you to specify a value or change one
value to another. For example:
let X = Y
12-50
LOW
Syntax: LOW <result> <string>
This command will convert all uppercase characters in a string to lowercase and
place the resulting string in a variable, where
<result>
is a predefined string variable (see var) which will store the converted
string.
<string>
is the string or variable containing the characters to be converted to

lowercase.
LSTR
Syntax: LSTR <variable> <string> <end>
This command will copy a number of characters from the start of a string and place
them in a variable, where
<variable>
is a predefined string variable (see var) which will store the copied
characters.
<string>
is the source string from which characters are to be copied.
<end>
is the numeric position of the last character to be copied, where the first
character in the string is 1. If this value is greater than the number of
characters in the string then the destination variable will include padded spaces so that it matches the number of characters requested.
MSGBOX
Syntax: MSGBOX <message> <buttons> <result>
This command enables you to display a simple message box with buttons, where
<message> is the message as specified by a string delimited by double quotes or
the name of a previously defined string variable (see var).
<buttons>
is an integer or integer variable containing a value which specifies the

buttons to be displayed (see following table).
<result>
is a previously defined integer variable which is used to store the value

of the button that is pressed by the user.
The value of the <buttons> integer is found by adding together the value of each
button required from the following table:
Ok:
Cancel:
Yes:
No:
1
2
4
8
Retry:
Abort:
Ignore:
16
32
64
12-51

For example, to specify that the Cancel and Retry buttons are to be displayed, the
<buttons> integer would be 18.
Only the following combinations of buttons are allowed:
Ok
Ok & Cancel
Yes & No
Yes, No & Cancel
Retry & Cancel
Abort, Retry & Ignore
The following example will display a message box containing the message Do you
wish to continue? and the buttons Yes and No, and cause the value of the button
pressed by the user to be stored in the integer variable result.
msgbox "Do you wish to continue?" 12 result
MSTR
Syntax: MSTR <variable> <string> <start> [<end>]
This command will copy a number of characters from within a string and place them
in a variable, where
<variable>
characters.
<string>
<start>
is the numeric position of the first character to be copied, where the

first character in the source string is 1. This value must be a number
greater than 0.
<end>
is the numeric position of the last character to be copied, where the first
character in the source string is 1. If this is omitted then all the characters to the end of the string will be copied. If this value is greater than
the number of characters in the source string then the destination
variable will include padded spaces so that it matches the number of
characters requested. If this value is less than the <start> value then it
will result in an empty string.
12-52
ONERROR
Syntax: ONERROR <action>
This command will perform the specified action when it encounters an error while the
script program is running, where <action> can be one of the following:
REPORT
will display a message box indicating the type of error and the
program line that caused it.
IGNORE
will ignore any errors encountered in the program.
GOTO <label>
will cause the program to go to the line with the specified label
when an error is encountered.
GOSUB <label> will cause the program to go to the line with the specified label
when an error is encountered and then return to the line following the error.
Refer to the Script Error Trapping Functions section later in this chapter.
PACK
Syntax: PACK <result> <string>
This command will remove redundant spaces between ASCII characters in a string,
together with any spaces and tabs before and after the string, and place the resulting
string in a variable.
<result>
is a previously defined string variable (see var) which will contain the
modified string.
<string>
is the string or variable containing the string to be packed.
This is useful to prevent an otherwise valid user response becoming invalid due to
extra spaces. See also packtab.
PACKTAB
Syntax: PACKTAB <result> <string>
This command will reduce multiple spaces and/or tabs in a string into a single tab,
convert single spaces into tabs if a digit follows, and place the resulting string in a
variable.
<result>
is a previously defined string variable (see var) which will contain the
modified string.
<string>
is the string or variable containing the string to be packed.
This is useful for making data suitable for a spreadsheet. See also pack.
12-53
PARSE
Syntax: PARSE <string> <variable1> <key> <variable2>
This command enables you parse a string using a specified key (e.g. a single
character or a string of characters), where
<string>
is the string or variable containing the string to be parsed.
<variable#> are two previously defined string variables (see var) into which
characters from the string will be placed.
<key>
is a single character or a string of characters which signifies that all

following characters in the string are to be placed in the second
variable.
If the string contains the key, then all the characters preceding the first instance of the
key will be placed in the string variable specified by <variable1>, and all following
characters will be placed in the second variable. If the key is not found in the string,
then all the characters will be placed in the first variable.
PASSWORD
Syntax: PASSWORD <title> <caption> <entry> [<x> <y>]
This command enables you to display a simple dialog box for password entry where
keyboard entered text is displayed as asterisks. The box will have a specified title,
contain two buttons (Ok and Cancel) and a single line text box with a specified
prompt. The command parameters are as follows:
<title>
is the text to be displayed in the title bar of the dialog box, as specified
by a string delimited by double quotes or the name of a previously
defined string variable (see var).
<caption>
is the text that will appear to the left or above the text box, as specified
by a string delimited by double quotes or the name of a previously
defined string variable.
<entry>
is a previously defined string variable which is used to store the text

entered in the text box by the user, but only if the Ok button is pressed,
otherwise the variable is set to NULL.
<x> <y>
specify the horizontal and vertical position of the top left corner of the
dialog box in relation to the top left corner of the screen in pixels.
These can be integers or variables.
The following example will display a dialog box with the title Password containing a
text box with the prompt Enter your password:, and cause the text entered in the
12-54

text box by the user to be stored in the string variable result when the Ok button is
pressed.
password "Password" "Enter your password:" result 100 100
The Error Numbers section later in this chapter lists possible error numbers.
PGET
Syntax: PGET <variable> <groupID> <paramID>
This command enables you to get most terminal emulation setup parameters and the
current values of some attributes, where
<variable>
is a previously defined variable (see var).
<groupID> identifies a group of parameters (e.g. host settings).

<paramID> identifies the particular parameter (e.g. baud rate).
For example, to get the current baud rate setting and place it in the previously defined
variable called speed you would enter the following:
pget speed host baud
where host is the group ID and baud is the parameter ID.
Refer to the section entitled PGET & PSET Parameters & Values at the end of this
chapter for a complete list of group ID's, parameter ID's and values that will be
returned. Note that the values will be returned in their full, non-abbreviated versions,
with the abbreviation characters in uppercase and the remainder in lowercase. If you
require the value to be returned entirely in uppercase, use the -su command line
option or ScriptUppercase=on initialization file command.
PSET
Syntax: PSET <groupID> <paramID> <value>
This command enables you to set most terminal emulation setup parameters and the
current values of some attributes, where
<groupID> identifies a group of parameters (e.g. host settings).
<paramID> identifies the particular parameter (e.g. baud rate).
<value>
is the value to be set (e.g. 9600).
For example, to specify that the baud rate is to be set to 4800 you would enter the
following:
pset host baud 9600
where host is the group ID, baud is the parameter ID, and 9600 is the value.
12-55

More than one setting within the same group of parameters can be specified on the
same line. For example, to set the baud rate to 9600 and the serial port device to /dev/
ttya you would enter the following:
pset host baud 9600 port "/dev/ttya"
In this case the group ID only has to be entered once at the beginning of the line,
followed by each set of parameter IDs and values.
You can also use the pset command to define key macros. The following example
will define the F1 key so that when it is pressed in conjunction with the Shift and
Ctrl keys (s c) it will send the string in the double quote characters:
pset macro s c XK_F1 "logon_n_r"
Note that when you want to enter a control character in a definition you must use the
three digit decimal value of the ASCII character preceded by an underscore
character. Values with only two digits must be preceded by a zero. For example, the
decimal value of CR is 13, so this would be entered as _013. You cannot use a
control key character equivalent (e.g. ^M for CR) in a PSET definition.
Refer to the section entitled PGET & PSET Parameters & Values at the end of this
chapter for a complete list of group ID's, parameter ID's and values, and the
abbreviations that can be used.
PUT
Syntax: PUT <string>
PUT <variable>
Send the string(s) within double quote characters or variable(s) to the host.
QUIT
Syntax: QUIT
The script program terminates and TeemTalk is exited.
RAND
Syntax: RAND <variable>
This will put the next random number into the variable, which can be a floating point
number or string variable. The number will be less than 1. If an integer variable is
used then the variable will always be 0 (zero). See also the description of the seed
command.
12-56
RDPXY
Syntax: RDPXY <variable> <row> <column> <count>
This causes the program to read a specified number of characters from the specified
row and column position in the display buffer and assign them to a previously
defined string variable. Note that the row and column position is relative to the
display buffer, not the current screen display. The top row in the display buffer
designated as row 0. For example, to read twenty characters beginning at row 3 and
column 18 and place them in the variable called name you would enter the
following:
rdpxy name 3 18 20
RDT
Syntax: RDT <variable> <count>
This causes the program to read a specified number of characters from the current
cursor position (wherever it is in the display buffer) and assign them to a previously
defined variable. For example, to cause twelve characters from the cursor position to
be assigned to the variable called name you would enter the following:
rdt name 12
RDTXY
Syntax: RDTXY <variable> <row> <column> <count>
This causes the program to read a specified number of characters from the specified
row and column position on the current screen display and assign them to a
previously defined string variable. Note that the row and column position is relative
to the current screen display, not the display buffer. The top row displayed on the
screen is designated as row 0.
For example, to read twenty characters beginning at row 3 and column 18 and place
them in the variable called name you would enter the following:
rdtxy name 3 18 20
REPLAY
Syntax: REPLAY EMUL <filespec>
REPLAY HOST <filespec>
REPLAY CANCEL
The replay command is used to replay the contents of a file previously created using
the capture command. The replay can be directed to both the emulator and host
(replay emul) or just to the host (replay host). To cancel the replay, issue a replay
cancel command.
12-57
RETURN
Syntax: RETURN
Terminates a gosub command, returning the program to the line following the most
recently encountered gosub which has not yet been terminated.
RST
Syntax: RST
This will reset TeemTalk and cause it to assert the last saved setup configuration.
RSTR
Syntax: RSTR <variable> <string> <number>
This command will copy a number of characters from the end of a string and place
them in a variable, where
<variable>
characters.
<string>
<number>
is the number of characters to be copied. If this value is greater than the

number of characters in the string then the whole string will be copied.
SAVESET
Syntax: SAVESET
This will save the current setup configuration so that it can be reasserted when
TeemTalk is subsequently reset or loaded.
SEED
Syntax: SEED <integer>
This will reset the random number generator seed to the integer specified as a string or
variable. See also the description of the rand command.
12-58
SETINI
Syntax: SETINI <section> <entry> <setting> [<ini file>]
This enables you set a setting in an initialization file, where
<section>
is a string or string variable which specifies the heading of the

command group, for example tt07w for TeemTalk-07W initialization
commands in the WIN.INI file, or startup,default for TeemTalk07W32 initialization commands in the TT07W.INI file.
<entry>
is a string or string variable which specifies the initialization command,

for example protocol.
<setting>
is the setting of the command, which may be a string, integer, or variable.
<ini file>
is a string or string variable which specifies the name of the initialization file. This may be omitted if it is the default file WIN.INI
(Windows 3.1) or TT07W.INI (Windows 95 or NT).
The following example will set the protocol setting in the Windows 3.1 WIN.INI
file to cterm.:
setini "tt07w" "protocol" "cterm"
The following example will set the protocol setting in the Windows 95 or NT
TT07W.INI file to tcpip:
setini "startup,default" "protocol" "tcpip" "tt07w.ini"
The Error Numbers appendix lists the possible error numbers for this command.
SUBTITLE
Syntax: SUBTITLE <string>
This enables you to change the subtitle portion of the title bar in the main window.
The subtitle will be separated from the main title by a hyphen.
The specified subtitle can be a string delimited by double quotes or a variable. If no
string is specified, the current contents of the title bar will remain unchanged. No
error numbers will be generated.
12-59
SWITCH
Syntax: (See below)
This is used to compare the value of a variable with a list of possible values and
perform the commands specified for the matching case. The format is as follows:
SWITCH <variable>
{
CASE <value1>
<commands>
CASE <value2> [<value3>...]
<commands>
[DEFAULT
<commands>]
}
where
<variable>
can be a string, integer or floating point variable containing the

value to be matched.
{ and }
mark the beginning and the end of the switch sequence. These
must not be omitted.
CASE <value#> specifies a possible value for the variable, which can be a literal
string, a variable or a number. Note that you can specify more than
one value on the same line by separating each value by a comma
and/or space. If the value of the variable matches the case value
then the <commands> on the following line(s) will be performed.
<commands>
specifies what the program must do if the case value on the

previous line matches the variable value. On a successful match the
program performs the specified commands and exits the switch
process.
DEFAULT
this is an optional entry which will cause the program to perform

the following commands and exit the switch process if the variable
value was not matched with any of the case values.
SYSERR
Syntax: SYSERR <boolean>
This is used to enable or disable the display of error message boxes. The boolean
value may be 0 or 1, No or Yes, False or True, OFF or ON. The value may be
abbreviated to the characters shown in uppercase.
12-60
TCMP
Syntax: TCMP <delay> <row> <column> <string>
This will wait for the specified <string> to appear on the screen at the start location
specified by <row> and <column>, where
<delay>
is the number of seconds to wait for the specified string. If the string is
received within the time period, the system flag is set to TRUE,
otherwise the flag is set to FALSE. The program then continues with the
next line. If the time delay value is zero, the program will wait
indefinitely until the string is matched.
<string>
can be a literal string or a variable (including integer and floating point).

There is no case sensitivity.
Use the brf and brt commands to test for success or failure.
TITLE
Syntax: TITLE <string>
This enables you to change the title displayed in the title bar of the main window.
The specified title can be a string delimited by double quotes or a variable. An invalid
title will set the errno (error number) variable to 1.
TOOLBAR ADD
Syntax: TOOLBAR ADD <bitmap> <command>
This will add a button tool to the end of the current set of displayed buttons, where
<bitmap>
is either a string containing the name of the bitmap file to use, or an

integer which relates to the standard defined toolbar bitmaps in the
order displayed in the Button Tools dialog box, the first being 0, the
second 1, etc.
<command> can be a key macro string (as described in The Toolbar chapter), or an
integer that relates to a standard command that is listed in the Button
Tools dialog box as follows:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
New Connection dialog box

Open Session dialog box
Save Session As dialog box
Copy command
Paste command
File Transfer dialog box
Run Script dialog box
Printer Setup dialog box
Print Screen dialog box
12-61

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
12-62
Attributes dialog box

Keyboard Macros dialog box
Soft Buttons dialog box
Mouse Button Actions dialog box
>> Increase window size command
<< Decrease window size command
Button Tools dialog box
GErase command
DErase command
DVisib command
Zoom command (except TeemTalk-05W & -05W32)
Setup command
Dialog Settings dialog box
GIN Settings dialog box
Patterns command
View Up command (except TeemTalk-05W & -05W32)
View Down command (except TeemTalk-05W & -05W32)
Rst View command (except TeemTalk-05W & -05W32)
Def View command (except TeemTalk-05W & -05W32)
Overview command (except TeemTalk-05W & -05W32)
Reset command
Clear command
Help Index dialog box
Capture File dialog box
Replay File dialog box
Factory Default command
Save Session command
Startup Options dialog box
Cancel Capture command
Cancel Replay command
FTP file transfer dialog box
Print Buffer command
Auto Print command
Cancel Print command
Eject Page command
Cancel Script command
Exit command
Clipboard Text command
Clipboard Graphics command
Copy Rows command
Copy Columns command
Select All command
Emulation Settings dialog box
Host Settings dialog box
Terminal Settings dialog box
How To Use Help dialog box

55
56
57
58
59
60
About TeemTalk message box

Copy Reverse command
Copy Mono command
Copy Mono Reverse command
Close Session command
Copy Reverse command
TOOLBAR DEL
Syntax: TOOLBAR DEL <position>
This will delete the tool button or space at the specified position in the toolbar, where
<position>
is an integer that specifies the position in the toolbar where the button
or space for deletion is located. The first item in the toolbar, whether it
is a button or a space, is at position 1. You must include any spaces in
the count.
TOOLBAR FIX
Syntax: TOOLBAR FIX
This will fix the toolbar under the menu bar.
TOOLBAR FLOAT
Syntax: TOOLBAR FLOAT
This will cause the tool buttons to be displayed in a floating window.
TOOLBAR HIDE
Syntax: TOOLBAR HIDE
This will remove the toolbar from the display.
TOOLBAR INS
Syntax: TOOLBAR INS <position> <bitmap> <command>
TOOLBAR INS <position> [space]
This enables you to insert a tool button or space immediately before the specified
position in the toolbar, where
<position>
is an integer that specifies the position in the toolbar before which the
button or space is to be inserted. The first item in the toolbar, whether
it is a button or a space, is at position 1. You must include any spaces
in the count.
12-63

<bitmap>
is either a string containing the name of the bitmap file to use, or an

integer which relates to the standard defined toolbar bitmaps in the
order displayed in the Button Tools dialog box, the first being 0, the
second 1, etc.
<command> can be a key macro string (as described in The Toolbar chapter), or an
integer that relates to a standard command that is listed in the Button
Tools dialog box. Refer to the Button Tool Command Selection
section later for a list of standard commands and related integers.
[space]
entered as shown will insert a space before the specified position.
UPP
Syntax: UPP <result> <string>
This command will convert all lowercase characters in a string to uppercase and
place the resulting string in a variable, where
<result>
is a predefined string variable (see var) which will store the converted
string.
<string>
is the string or variable containing the characters to be converted to

uppercase.
VAR
Syntax: VAR $<name> [<string>]
VAR %<name> [<integer>]
VAR !<name> [<floating point number>]
Specifies one or more variable names for storing one of three types of variable. The
value of the variable may be defined as part of the command or omitted for entering
later, in which case the value will be zero or an empty string.
The name specified for a string variable must be immediately preceded by the $
(dollar) character. For example, to specify an empty string variable with the name
Identity you would enter the following:
var $Identity
The name specified for an integer variable must be immediately preceded by the %
(percent sign) character. For example, to specify an integer variable with the name
number and with a value of 3 you would enter the following:
var %number 3
The name specified for a floating point number (e.g. 0.45) variable must be
immediately preceded by the ! (exclamation mark) character. For example, to specify
a floating point number variable with the name float and with a value of 0.45 you
would enter the following:
12-64

var !float 0.45
All future references to a variable are made by using its name without the $, % or !
variable type identifying characters.
Note: You can convert the type of data (string, integer, floating
point number) from one variable to another using conv.
You can specify more than one variable name (and value) on the same line. Variable
names are linked to their assigned values by an equals sign (spaces are optional), and
each variable name (with value) is separated from the next by a comma or/and space.
For example:
var %integer1 = 32, %integer2, $string1 = "Hello", $string2
Variables that are not assigned a value will be given NULL for strings or 0 (zero).
You can incorporate a special variable called errno in your script file which will be
used to store a number indicating the result of a command (i.e. success or type of
failure). The errno variable is an integer variable which is already defined as part of
the script language, that is, you do not need to use the var command to include it in
your script file. When the command is successful, the number 0 will be assigned to
errno. Refer to the section entitled Error Numbers later in this chapter for more
details.
WAIT
Syntax: WAIT <time>
Causes the host to wait for the specified time in seconds. The default time is one
second.
WHILE
Syntax: WHILE <condition>
Informs the program to perform the command(s) on the following line(s) while the
specified condition is true. For example:
while (integer < 10)
inc integer
If more than one command line is to be associated with while, insert a line containing
the { (open curly brace) character before the first command line and a line containing
the } (close curly brace) character following the last command line.
For example:
while (integer < 10)
{
inc integer
12-65

wrt "Amount = " integer
}
While commands may be nested up to 32 times.
WRT
Syntax: WRT <string(s)>
Displays string(s) delimited by double quote characters at the current cursor position.
Variables (such as identity in the example below) can also be included.
The following example will display User = followed by the contents of the variable
identity and then perform a line feed (_n) and carriage return (_r).
wrt "User = ", identity, "_n_r"
12-66
Error Numbers
You can incorporate a special variable called errno in your script file which will be
used to store a number indicating the result of a command (i.e. success or type of
failure). The errno variable is an integer variable which is already defined as part of
the script language, that is, you do not need to use the var command to include it in
your script file. When the command is successful, the numeric value 0 will be
assigned to errno.
The following list shows the possible error numbers for various commands and their
meaning.
CLIPBD EMPTY
0
1
2
3
The command was successful.

Invalid parameter in the command string.
Cannot empty the clipboard, possibly because someone else has opened it.
Failed to close the clipboard.
CLIPBD READ
0
1
2
3
4
5

Cannot read the data in the clipboard.
Cannot open the clipboard, possibly because someone else has opened it.
Clipboard data in unrecognisable format.
CLIPBD WRITE
0
1
2
3
4

Cannot write the data to the clipboard.
Cannot open the clipboard, possibly because someone else has opened it.
DDE
0
-1

The command failed.
DECRYPT & ENCRYPT

0
1

The command failed.
12-67

DIALOGUE
0
1
2
3

Cancel button pressed.
Unable to create the dialog box.
FILE
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

Invalid sub-command (e.g. must be file read and not file fred, etc.).
Invalid variable for handle.
Invalid integer for handle.
File copy, delete, open, or rename command failed.
File close command failed.
Invalid variable for the file read or rget command.
Invalid string size for file read or rget command.
The end of the file has been reached - file read or rget command.
Invalid string size for file write command.
Write error - file write or wput command.
Invalid position type for file seek command.
Seek error - file seek command.
Could not supply statistics for file - file stat command.
FTP
0
1
2
3

Failed to connect - ftp connect command.
Failed to disconnect - ftp connect or disconnect command.
Failed to determine file system (UNIX/VAX) - ftp connect command.
(Note that UNIX is the default.)
4 Not connected.
5 Invalid remote file - ftp get, put, or rm command.
6 Invalid local file - ftp get, put, or rm command.
7 Invalid remote directory - ftp cd command.
8 Invalid local directory - ftp cd command.
9 dirnext requires dirfirst beforehand.
10 Invalid local drive name.
11 Unknown mode specified.
12 Memory allocation failed.
12-68

FTU
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
17
18
19
20
35
36
37
41
42
43
44
Transaction done.
Unknown packet.
Cancelled.
Too many retries.
File open error.
File read error.
File write error.
File close error.
Sending.
Send initialize error.
Send filename error.
Send data error.
Send end of file error.
Send end of transmission error.
Cannot initiate file transfer utility.
File transfer quitted.
Remote dialog open error.
Send command error.
Send error.
Cancelled (all transfer protocols except Kermit).
Timed out (all transfer protocols except Kermit).
Receive error (all transfer protocols except Kermit).
Packet sequence error (all transfer protocols except Kermit).
No files to send.
Printer open error (Kermit).
Transfer aborted (XMODEM, YMODEM, ZMODEM).
GET
0
1

Timeout.
GETINI & SETINI

0
1

LAUNCH
0
1

Error.
12-69

MSGBOX
0
1
2
3

Invalid button combination specified.
PARSE
0
1
2

Item not located in the string.
PASSWORD
0
1
2
3

Cancel button pressed.
TITLE
0
1
12-70

No title was specified.
Script Error Trapping Functions

The integrity of a script program can be checked by using the onerror, errorline and
errorcode commands. These enable you to quickly find any syntax errors within the
program. The following program lines provide an example of their use:
var %integer1, $string1
onerror gosub errorhandler:
(put your program here)
** Error Handler **
errorhandler:
errorline string1
errorcode integer1
wrt "Error: ", integer1, " - ", string1, "_r_n"
return
ONERROR
Syntax: ONERROR <action>
This command will perform the specified action when it encounters an error while
the script program is running, where <action> can be one of the following:
REPORT
will display a message box indicating the type of error and the
program line that caused it.
IGNORE
will ignore any errors encountered in the program.
GOTO <label>
will cause the program to go to the line with the specified label
when an error is encountered.
GOSUB <label> will cause the program to go to the line with the specified label
when an error is encountered and then return to the line following the error.
ERRORLINE
Syntax: ERRORLINE <variable>
This command will return the line number of the last error.
ERRORCODE
Syntax: ERRORCODE <variable>
This command specifies the type of error code that will be returned when an error is
encountered. Specifying an integer variable will return an error ID number, while a
string variable will return an error message. The following list shows the ID codes
and error messages that can be displayed, and their meanings.
12-71

ID
Message Displayed
Meaning
Syntax error
Illegal command or unrecognisable element.
Variable expected
Script expected a predefined variable (see var).
Integer expected
Script did not receive an integer or integer

variable.
String expected
Script did not receive a string or string variable.
Boolean expected
Script did not receive any of the following:

0 or 1, No or Yes, False or True, OFF or ON.
String variable expected
Script expected a string type variable (see var).
Invalid expression
Script could not evaluate the expression given.
Invalid parameter
The command has a missing or incorrect

parameter. Refer to the command description
for the correct format.
Label not found
A command specified a label that had not

been assigned to a program line, or the label
was invalid. Refer to the description of labels
in the Syntax Conventions section.
10
Index out of range
An index given to a string command (e.g. lstr)

was out of range.
11
Illegal RETURN statement
There are no incompleted gosubs to return to.
12
Illegal button combination A button combination passed to a dialogue

command was invalid.
13
Invalid key name
A key name or code was invalid or missing.
14
Invalid subcommand
An invalid subcommand was encountered

(e.g. after file or ftu).
15
Invalid GroupID
An invalid GroupID was specified for a

pget, pset, ftu set or ftu get command.
16
Invalid ParamID
An invalid ParamID was specified for a

pget, pset, ftu set or ftu get command.
17
Invalid SubParamID
An invalid SubParamID was specified for an

ftu set or ftu get command.
18
Invalid button name
Invalid soft-button name specified in pget or

pset command.
19+ Undefined error
12-72
Error has no definition.
PSET & PGET Parameters & Values

This section lists the parameters available for the PSET and PGET commands,
together with the values they will accept or return. Abbreviations are allowed in
many cases, the essential characters being shown in UPPER CASE, with the rest of
the value in lower case. The actual value may be specified in upper or lower case,
may have double quotes to delimit it as a string, or may be a predefined variable.
Note that the PGET values will be returned in their full, non-abbreviated versions,
with the abbreviation characters in uppercase and the remainder in lowercase as
shown in the listings. If you require the value to be returned entirely in uppercase, use
the -su command line option or ScriptUppercase=on initialization file command.
The list of parameters and values are shown under the following headings:
GroupID
ParamID
Value
Qualifiers
identifies a group of parameters (default is CURRent).

identifies the particular sub-parameter.
is the value to be set or returned.
qualifies the following Parameter ID.
The Value will be in one of the following formats if not specifically given:
immediate
boolean
string
range
no value required, 0 or 1 returned.

0 or 1, No or Yes, True or False, OFF or ON.
any characters, with the maximum number given.
one of a range of integers as shown (e.g. range 0 -15).
Network Settings
Host Name:
Protocol (Windows 3.1):
GroupID
ParamID
Value
NETwork
NETwork
NODEname
PROTocol
"string" max 80 chrs

NONE
SERIAL
BAPI
BWTCP
CTERM
DOSLANTI
EICONX25
INFOConn
INT6B
INT14
IPXSPX
ISDN
LANMAn
LANWP
LAT
MULTILAN
12-73

GroupID
ParamID
(Windows 95/NT):
NETwork
PROTocol
Port Number:
Connect To Host:
Close Host Connection:
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
PORT
CONNect
CLOSE
Value
NCSI
NETBIOS
NETWLAT
NETWTCP
NEWT
NSVT
NWSAA
OSLAN
PATHWay
PCNFS
PCTCP
TEEMTALKOSI
TELAPI
WINSOCK
NONE
SERIAL
CTERM
LAT
MULTILAN
NETBIOS
TCPIP
TEEMTALKOSI
WINSOCK
WINSOCK2
range 0 - 65535
immediate
immediate
Telnet Options
Telnet Port Number:
Telnet Name:
Suppress Echo:
Force Binary Mode:
Force EOR Mode:
For Break Send TM:
For Break Send CR:
12-74
GroupID
ParamID
Value
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
TELNETPORT
TELNETNAME
ECHOSUPPRESS
FORCEBINARY
FORCEEOR
BREAKTM
BREAKCR
range 0 - 65535
"string" max 80 chrs
boolean
NO, DONT, DO
NO, DONT, DO
boolean
boolean
ISDN Settings
Remote Dial Number:
Remote Dial Sub Address:
Controller Card Number:
B1 Physical Layer:
B2 Data Layer:
B3 Network Layer:
Local Dial Number:
Local Dial Sub Address:
Channel:
B1 Baud Rate:
B1 Data Bits:
B1 Parity Bits:
B1 Stop Bits:
B2 Address A:
B2 Address B:
B2 Modulo (8/128):
B2 Window Size:
B2 XID:
B3 Lowest Incoming Ch.:
B3 Highest Incoming Ch.:
B3 Lowest 2-Way Ch.:
B3 Highest 2-Way Ch.:
B3 Lowest Outgoing Ch.:
B3 Highest Outgoing Ch.:
B3 Modulo (8/128):
B3 Window Size:
GroupID
ParamID
Value
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
NETwork
ISDNDIAL
ISDNDIALSUBADDRESS
ISDNCONTROL
ISDNB1
ISDNB2
ISDNB3
ISDNLOCALNUMBER
ISDNLOCALSUBADDRESS
ISDNUSECHAN
ISDNB1RATE
ISDNB1LEVEL
ISDNB1PARITY
ISDNB1STOPS
ISDNB2ADDRESS_A
ISDNB2ADDRESS_B
ISDNB2MODULO
ISDNB2WINDOWSIZE
ISDNB2XID
ISDNB3LIC
ISDNB3HIC
ISDNB3LTC
ISDNB3HTC
ISDNB3LOC
ISDNB3HOC
ISDNB3MODULO
ISDNB3WINDOWSIZE
"string"
"string"
1 - 127
0-5
0-5
0-3
"string"
"string"
0-2
0 - 65535
0 - 65535
0-2
0-2
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 or 1
0 - 255
0 - 65535
0 - 65535
0 - 65535
0 - 65535
0 - 65535
0 - 65535
0 - 65535
0 or 1
0 - 65535
Printer Settings
Printer Device:
Default Printer:
Print Buffer
FormFeed Terminator:
Use Print Manager:
Print Man. Pass Through:
Translate National Chrs:
Seconds Close Delay:
GroupID
ParamID
Value
PRINTer
PRINTer
PRINTer
PRINTer
PRINTer
PRINTer
PRINTer
PRINTer
DEVice
DEFault
BUFFER
FFTerm
USEPrintman
PASSthru
TRANSlate
CLOSEDELAY
"string"
"string"
immediate
boolean
boolean
boolean
boolean
range 0 - 65535
12-75

GroupID
ParamID
Value
Print Screen Method:

Use Printer Resolution:
Auto Wrap:
Centre Image On Paper:
Graphics Scaling:
Graphics Image:
PRINTer
PRINTer
PRINTer
PRINTer
PRINTer
PRINTer
SCReen
USERESolution
AWRAP
CENTRE
SCALE
GRMODE
Auto Print Mode:

Cancel Print:
Eject Page:
PRINTer
PRINTer
PRINTer
AUTO
CANCEL
EJECTpage
TEXT, GRaph
boolean
boolean
boolean
range 1 - 100
NORMal, SWAP,
MONO, MONOSwap
boolean
not applicable
not applicable
Serial Settings
GroupID
ParamID
Value
Use Serial Port:

Host Port:
HOST
HOST
USE
PORT
Baud Rate:
HOST
BAUDrate
Parity:
HOST
PARity
Flow Control:
HOST
FLOWcontrol
Data Bits:
Stop Bits:
Transmit Rate:
On Line:
Local Echo:
Detect Carrier:
Test for DCD:
Test for CTS:
HOST
HOST
HOST
HOST
HOST
HOST
HOST
HOST
DATAbits
STOPbits
TXLimit
ONLine
HALFduplex
DCDDetect
DCDTest
CTSTest
immediate
COM1 - COM4 (16-bit)
COM1 - COM8 (32-bit)
None
16-bit: 50, 75, 110, 134,
150, 200, 300, 1200,
1800, 2400, 4800, 9600
9600, 19200, 38400
32-bit: 110, 300, 600,
1200, 2400, 4800,
9600, 19200, 38400,
57600, 115200
None, Odd, Even,
Mark, Space
None, INPut, OUTput
INOUT, HARDware,
DTR
6, 7, 8
1, 1.5, 2
range 0 - ?
boolean
boolean
boolean
boolean
boolean
12-76
NCSI Settings
GroupID
ParamID
Value
Baud Rate:
NCSi
BAUDrate
Parity:
NCSi
PARity
Flow Control:
NCSi
FLOWcontrol
Data Bits:
Stop Bits:
Show Port Details:
NCSi
NCSi
NCSi
DATAbits
STOPbits
PORTdetail
50, 75, 110, 134, 150,

300, 600, 1200, 1800,
2000, 2400, 3600,
4800, 7200, 9600,
19200, 38400, 57600,
115200
None, Odd, Even,
Mark, Space
None, DTR, RTS
DTRRts
Xonxoff
5, 6, 7, 8
1, 1.5, 2
boolean
Save Session Settings

Save Keyboard Macros:
Save Soft Buttons:
Save Attributes:
Save Window Metrics:
Save Text Rows:
Save Buffer Rows:
Save Connection:
Save Terminal Settings:
GroupID
ParamID
Value
SESSion
SESSion
SESSion
SESSion
SESSion
SESSion
SESSion
SESSion
SAVEMacros
SAVESoftbuttons
SAVEAttrs
SAVEWindow
SAVERows
SAVEBuffer
SAVEConnection
SAVETerminal
boolean
boolean
boolean
boolean
boolean
boolean
boolean
boolean
Emulation Settings
GroupID
ParamID
Value
Emulation:
EMULation
MODe
Code 1 Selects:
EMULation
CODe
Terminal ID:
EMULation
ID
VT52, VT100
TEK, EDit
VT2207, VT2208
W3220
ANSI, VT2207
VT2208
VT100
VT220
12-77

GroupID
ParamID
Value
EMULation
EMULation
MULTinational
CTRLdisplay
boolean
boolean
GroupID
ParamID
Value
Keyboard Language:
TERMinal
KEYBoard
LF Implies CR:
CR Implies LF:
Ignore Deletes:
Application Keypad:
Application Cursor Keys:
Scroll Bar on Maximize:
Report Max. Line Length:
Bypass Cancel Character:
End Of Line Characters:
End Of Message Characters:
End Of Message Frequency:
TERMinal
TERMinal
TERMinal
TERMinal
TERMinal
TERMinal
TERMinal
TERMinal
TERMinal
TERMinal
TERMinal
NEWLine
AUTOLF
IGNoredeletes
APPLKEYpad
APPLCURSor
MAXSCrollbar
REPLength
BYpass
EOLChar
EOMChar
EOMFReq
Terminal:
TERMinal
TYPe
Answerback String:
Answerback Concealed:
TERMinal
TERMinal
ANSWerback
CONCEAL
AMerican / USa
BRitish / UK
FLemish
CAnadian
DAnish
FInnish
GErman
DUtch / HOlland
ITalian
SWFrench
SWGerman
SWEdish
NOrwegain
FRench / BElgian
SPanish
POrtuguese
boolean
boolean
boolean
boolean
boolean
boolean
range 0 - 65535
"string" max 2
"string" max 4
"string" max 4
Low
High
4207
4105
4111
"string" max 32
boolean
Multinational:
Display Controls:
Terminal Settings
12-78
Dialog Settings
GroupID
ParamID
Burst Scroll:
Auto Wrap:
Dialog Indices Locked:
Dialog Area Visible:
Cursor Origin:
DIALog
DIALog
DIALog
DIALog
DIALog
BURSTscroll
WRAPeol
LOCKINDices
DAVISible
ORIGin
Cursor Style:
DIALog
Columns:
Resize Font:
Rows:
DIALog
DIALog
DIALog
Dialog Area Lines:

Dialog Area Buffer:
Dialog Area Enabled:
DIALog
DIALog
DIALog
Value
boolean
boolean
boolean
boolean
ABSolute
RELative
CURSortype
UNDerline
BLOCK
COLumns
80, 132
NOFONTRESize boolean
ROWS
range depends on
font size & resolution
DALines
range 2 - rows
DABuffer
range 2 - 100
DAENable
tt05w: boolean
tt07w: boolean
tt11w: range 0 - 1
Gin Settings
GroupID
ParamID
Value
Tablet Type:
GIN
TABLet
Serial Port Device:
GIN
PORT
Gin Tablet Characters:

Map Mouse To Joystick:
GIN
GIN
TABChars
MAPmouse
MM1201
MM1812
BITPad
CALcomp
MOUse
COM1, COM2
COM3, COM4
None
"string" max 4 chars
boolean
12-79
Attribute Settings
Colour Selection
GroupID
ParamID
Map Value Red:
ATTRibutes
Map Value Green:

Map Value Blue:
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
MAP##Red
range 0 - 100
(where ## is colour index in range 00 to 15)
MAP##Green
range 0 - 100
MAP##Blue
range 0 - 100
Value
Screen Index:
ATTRibutes
BCKINDSCRN
range 0 - 15
Preferences
Inverse Colours:
AutoColour:
GroupID
ParamID
Value
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
INVColour
AUTOcolour
boolean
boolean
ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY
You can disable one or more attributes associated with the following text foreground
or background index commands by entering the following characters immediately
after the colour index:
B Disable bold attribute
F Disable flashing attribute
I Disable inverse attribute

U Disable underline attribute
For example, to make characters with the underline and bold attributes appear on the
screen with the colour assigned to index 3 but not underlined or bold, you would
issue the following command:
PSET ATTRIBUTES FRGINDUNDBOLD 3UB
Characters with the bold attribute can be displayed as true bold instead of highlighted
by including the + (plus) character immediately after the colour index.
The Value in the following tables consists of an integer in the range 0 to 15,
specifying the colour index, which may be followed by any of the disable attribute
characters described above if relevant.
Foreground Indices Normal Display

GroupID
Normal Index:
Bold Index:
Underline Index:
12-80
ParamID
ATTRibutes FRGINDNORM
ATTRibutes FRGINDBOLD
ATTRibutes FRGINDUNDER
Value
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
Underline & Bold Index:

Flashing Index:
Flash & Bold Index:
Flash & Underline:
Flash, Under. & Bold:
GroupID
ParamID
Value
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
FRGINDUNDBOLD
FRGINDFLASH
FRGINDFLBOLD
FRGINDFLUNDER
FRGINDFLUNDBOLD
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
Foreground Indices Inverse Display

Normal Index:
Bold Index:
Underline Index:
Underline & Bold:
Flashing Index:
Flash & Bold Index:
Flash & Underline:
Flash, Under. Bold:
GroupID
ParamID
Value
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
FRGINDINV
FRGINDINVBOLD
FRGINDINVUNDER
FRGINDINVUNDBOLD
FRGINDINVFLASH
FRGINDINVFLBOLD
FRGINDINVFLUNDER
FRGINDINVFLUNDBOLD
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
Background Indices Normal Display

Normal Index:
Bold Index:
Underline Index:
Underline & Bold:
Flashing Index:
Flash & Bold Index:
Flash & Underline:
Flash, Under. & Bold:
GroupID
ParamID
Value
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
BCKINDNORM
BCKINDBOLD
BCKINDUNDER
BCKINDUNDBOLD
BCKINDFLASH
BCKINDFLBOLD
BCKINDFLUNDER
BCKINDFLUNDBOLD
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
Background Indices Inverse Display

Normal Index:
Bold Index:
Underline Index:
Underline & Bold:
Flashing Index:
Flash & Bold Index:
Flash & Underline:
Flash, Under. Bold:
GroupID
ParamID
Value
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
ATTRibutes
BCKINDINV
BCKINDINVBOLD
BCKINDINVUNDER
BCKINDINVUNDBOLD
BCKINDINVFLASH
BCKINDINVFLBOLD
BCKINDINVFLUNDER
BCKINDINVFLUNDBOLD
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
0 - 15[char]
12-81
Keyboard Macros
Keyboard macros may be specified using Tektronix key reference numbers or virtual
key names. A variable can also be specified for the ParamID.
GroupID Qualifier
Delete All Macros:
ParamID
MACROs DELALL
Value
immediate
The following commands use the Tektronix key reference numbers listed in the Key
Reference Numbers appendix.
Program Key:
Non-Volatile:
Default Setting:
GroupID Qualifier
ParamID
Value
MACROs
MACROs NV
MACROs DEFault
key ref #
key ref #
key ref #
"string" max 80
boolean
immediate
The following commands use the virtual key names listed in the Virtual Key Names
appendix.
GroupID Qualifier
ParamID Value
Normal Key:
Shifted Key:
Control + Key:
Control + Shift Key:
Alt + Key:
MACROs
MACROs
MACROs
MACROs
MACROs
COMmand
Shift
Ctrl
Ctrl Shift
Alt
key name
key name
key name
key name
key name
"string" max 80
"string" max 80
"string" max 80
"string" max 80
"string" max 80
Non-Vol. Normal:
Non-Vol. Shifted:
Non-Vol. Control :
Non-Vol. Ctrl + Shift:
Non-Vol. Alt:
MACROs
MACROs
MACROs
MACROs
MACROs
NV
NV Shift
NV Ctrl
NV Ctrl Shift
NV Alt
key name
key name
key name
key name
key name
boolean
boolean
boolean
boolean
boolean
Default Normal:
Default Shifted:
Default Control :
Default Ctrl + Shift:
Default Alt:
MACROs
MACROs
MACROs
MACROs
MACROs
DEfault
DEfault Shift
DEfault Ctrl
DEfault Ctrl Shift
DEfault Alt
key name
key name
key name
key name
key name
immediate
immediate
immediate
immediate
immediate
European Currency Symbol

Sends:
Received As:
Printed As:
12-82
GroupID
ParamID
Value
EURosign
EURosign
EURosign
SENds
RECeived
PRInts
"string"
"string"
"string"
Soft Buttons
The ParamID setting SB#L# specifies the soft button number (SB#) which can be
any number between 1 and 12 inclusive, and the level number (L#) which can be 1 to
4. For example, SB4L2 specifies soft button 4 on level 2.
GroupID
Buttons Visible:
Program Button:
Button Name:
Action Locally:
Default Setting:
No. Of Levels Displayed:
Top Level:
Level Title:
Qualifier
ParamID
BUTTons
VISible
BUTTons COMmand SB#L#
BUTTons NAMe
SB#L#
BUTTons LOCal
SB#L#
BUTTons DEFault
SB#L#
BUTTons
SHOWlevel
BUTTons
LEVel
BUTTons
L#TITle
Value
boolean
"string" max 80
"string" max 10
boolean
immediate
1 to 4
1 to 4
"string" max 7
Note: The Program Button qualifier 'COMmand' is optional.

The asterisk in the ParamID settings below must be substituted with the button or
button and key combination identifiers as follows:
Normal:
Shift:
Control:
Control + Shift:
Alt:
Double Click:
User Defined String:

Standard Function:
Left Button
Right Button
L
LS
LC
LCS
LA
LDC
R
RS
RC
RCS
RA
RDC
GroupID
ParamID
Value
MOUSE
MOUSE
*_STRing
*_ACTion
"string"
see below
The Standard Function Values are as follows:

UNAssigned
SELecttext
EXTendsel
EDITCopy
EDITPaste
SHOWhotspots
ACTionhot
MOVEcursor
SENDCR
SENDKEYword
MIDdlebutt
RECTselect
WORDselect
COPYselect
12-83
Current Operating System Settings

GroupID
ParamID
Value
Current Disk Drive:

Current Directory:
CURRent
CURRent
"string" A - ?
Current Environment:
CURRent
DRIVE
DIRectory
PWD
CWD
ENVironment
Get Current Time:

Get Current Day:
Get Current Date:
Get Milliseconds Elapsed
Since Windows Started:
CURRent
CURRent
CURRent
TIMe
DAY
FULLDATE
"string" 255 chrs

"string","string"
max 255 chars.
"string" HHMM
"string" 3 chars
"string" YYYYMMDD
CURRent
TICKcount
integer (See note.)
Note: When using the Get Milliseconds command, the value will
return to 0 (zero) after approximately 49.7 days.
Current Display & Keyboard Settings

GroupID
Test If Keyboard Locked:
Test If Screen On Hold:
Screen Visible:
Menu Bar Visible:
Scroll Bar Visible:
Cursor Visible:
Mouse Cursor Style:
Cursor Row Position:
Cursor Column Position:
Reverse Video:
Double Width Characters:
Single Width Characters:
Double Height Top Chars:
Double Height Bottom Chars:
Clear All Attributes:
Underline Attribute:
Inverse Video Attribute:
12-84
ParamID
Value
CURRent KBDLock
(boolean)
CURRent HLDSCR
(boolean)
CURRent SCReen
boolean
CURRent MENU
boolean
CURRent SCROLL
boolean
CURRent CURSor
boolean
MOUSE
TYPE
0 - 10
(See table in Initialization Commands)
CURRent ROW
range 0 - ?
CURRent COLumn
range 0 - ?
CURRent REVersevideo boolean
CURRent DWline
immediate
CURRent SWline
immediate
CURRent DHTop
DOUBLE
immediate
CURRent DHBottom
immediate
CURRent CLR
immediate
CURRent UL
UNDERline
immediate
CURRent IV
INVerse
immediate

GroupID
ParamID
Invisible Attribute:
CURRent
Flashing Attribute:
Highlight (Bold/Dim) Attribute:
CURRent
CURRent
Normal (No Attributes):

Line Drawing Character Set
(VT Modes)
Character Colour:
CURRent
CURRent
CURRent
BLank
SECurity
FLashing
BD
BOLD
HB
HALFBright
NORMal
LD
LINEdrawing
FG
Character Cell Colour:
CURRent
BG
Value
immediate
immediate
immediate
immediate
boolean
BLAck
BLUe
RED
GREen
MAGenta
CYAn
YELlow
WHite
BLAck
BLUe
RED
GREen
MAGenta
CYAn
YELlow
WHIte
12-85
FTU SET & GET Parameters

This section lists the parameters available for the script language FTU SET and FTU
GET commands, together with the values they will accept or return. The actual value
may be specified in upper or lower case, may have double quotes to delimit it as a
string, or may be a previously defined variable.
The list of parameters and values are shown under the following headings:
GroupID
ParamID
identifies a group of parameters (default is CURRent).

identifies a particular parameter, or in the case of Parameter
settings a sub-group of parameters.
SubParamID identifies a particular parameter for Parameter settings.
Value
is the value to be set or returned.
The Value will be in one of the following formats if not specifically given:
immediate
boolean
string
range
integer
no value required, 0 or 1 returned.

0 or 1, No or Yes, True or False, OFF or ON.
a control character (e.g. CR) or its decimal value
enclosed by double quotes.
one of a range of integers as shown (e.g. range 1 -3).
any number.
Transfer Protocol Settings

Kermit:
XMODEM:
XMODEM-1K:
YMODEM Batch:
ZMODEM
ASCII
GroupID
ParamID
Value
TRANSFER
TRANSFER
TRANSFER
TRANSFER
TRANSFER
TRANSFER
KERMIT
XMODEM
XMODEM-1K
YMODEMBATCH
ZMODEM
ASCII
immediate
immediate
immediate
immediate
immediate
immediate
General Parameter Settings

Timer:
Warning Bell:
Discard Partial:
D. File Warning:
Send Delay:
Retry Limit:
12-86
GroupID
ParamID
SubParamID Value
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
GENERAL
GENERAL
GENERAL
GENERAL
GENERAL
GENERAL
TIMer
BELl
DIScard
FILEWarn
SENDDelay
RETRYlimit
boolean
boolean
boolean
boolean
range 0 - 63
range 1 - 63
Kermit Parameter Settings

Start Of Packet (S):
Start Of Packet (R):
Timeout Secs (S):
Timeout Secs (R):
Padding Count (S):
Padding Count (R):
Padding Char (S):
Padding Char (R):
EOL Char (Send):
EOL Char (Receive):
Quote Char (S):
Quote Char (R):
Packet Size (S):
Packet Size (R):
Checksum Type:
Prompt For Filename:
Local File Name:
GroupID
ParamID SubParamID
Value
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
KERMIT
KERMIT
KERMIT
KERMIT
KERMIT
KERMIT
KERMIT
KERMIT
KERMIT
KERMIT
KERMIT
KERMIT
KERMIT
KERMIT
KERMIT
KERMIT
KERMIT
"string"
"string"
integer
integer
integer
integer
"string"
"string"
"string"
"string"
"string"
"string"
integer
integer
range 1 - 3
boolean
"string"
SMARK
RMARK
STIMEOUT
RTIMEOUT
SPADCOUNT
RPADCOUNT
SPADCHAR
RPADCHAR
SEOL
REOL
SQUOTE
RQUOTE
SMAXPKTLEN
RMAXPKTLEN
BLOCKCHECK
REQFILENAME
LOCALFILE
ASCII Parameter Settings

GroupID
CR Translation (S):
CR Translation (R):
LF Translation (S):
LF Translation (R):
Line Pacing C. (S):
Line Pacing C. (R):
L. Pacing Time (S):
Expand Blank L.:
ParamID
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
ASCII
ASCII
ASCII
ASCII
ASCII
ASCII
ASCII
ASCII
SubParamID
SENDCRTRANS
RECVCRTRANS
SENDLFTRANS
RECVLFTRANS
SENDPACECHAR
RECVPACECHAR
SENDPACETIME
EXPANDBLANKS
Value
"string"
"string"
"string"
"string"
"string"
"string"
integer
immediate
ZMODEM Parameter Settings

GroupID
ParamID
SubParamID
Data Conversion (S): PARAMETER ZMODEM SFILECONV
Data Conversion (R): PARAMETER ZMODEM RFILECONV
Value
NONE
BINARY
ASCII
RESUME
as above
12-87

GroupID
ParamID
SubParamID
Value
Transfer Action (S):
PARAMETER ZMODEM SFILEACTION NONE

NEWLONG
CRCDIFF
APPEND
REPLACE
NEWER
LENGTH
ABSENT
Transfer Action (R): PARAMETER ZMODEM RFILEACTION as above
Receive Existing (S): PARAMETER ZMODEM SFILEEXIST
boolean
Receive Existing (R): PARAMETER ZMODEM RFILEEXIST
boolean
Change . to /:
PARAMETER ZMODEM SDOTTOSLASH boolean
Send Full Pathname: PARAMETER ZMODEM SFULLNAME
boolean
Remote Cmd (S):
PARAMETER ZMODEM SSTARTCMD
"string"
Remote Cmd (R):
PARAMETER ZMODEM RSTARTCMD "string"
Window Size:
PARAMETER ZMODEM SWINDOW
integer
Escape Control Codes PARAMETER ZMODEM ESCCONTROLS boolean
Kermit Remote Operations

GroupID
ParamID
Value
How To Transfer:
HOW
Local Change Dir:

Remote Command:
Remote Change Dir:
Remote Get:
Remote Erase:
Remote Finish:
Remote Log Out:
Remote Bye:
LOCAL
REMOTE
REMOTE
REMOTE
REMOTE
REMOTE
REMOTE
REMOTE
SEND
RECEIVE
REMOTE
LOCAL
CHANGE DIR
COMMAND
CHANGE DIR
GET
ERASE
FINISH
LOGOUT
BYE
immediate
immediate
immediate
immediate
(see note below)
(see note below)
(see note below)
(see note below)
immediate
immediate
immediate
immediate
Note: The ftu set remote get, ftu set remote/local change dir and
ftu set remote command commands have their values
specified on the ftu start command line.
12-88
Dynamic Data Exchange
13
This chapter describes the support of dynamic data exchange (DDE) by
TeemTalk.
Introduction
With the adoption of a standard user interface within the Microsoft Windows
environment, personal computer users are becoming accustomed to the formalised
methods by which keystrokes and mouse actions have a common effect, making it
easier for users to become familiar with and switch between a whole range of
unrelated but important applications.
This commonality extends beyond just the look and feel of applications. The
ability to share data between totally independent applications must by now be a very
familiar operation to many Windows users. Generally this is achieved by using the
EDIT facilities of an application - either by copying, cutting or pasting portions of
required information. These operations make use of the Windows system
clipboard. The clipboard is a temporary repository of information that requires
direct involvement of the user to initiate and complete transfer of text or graphics
data. Such a means of transferring information is completely manual in its operation.
The user issues a command in an application to copy or cut selected data to the
clipboard, then in another application the user issues a command to paste the data
from the clipboard into that applications workspace.
Dynamic Data Exchange, or DDE, is an altogether more sophisticated means of
sharing data between applications and, as suggested by its name, the ability to make
on the fly links between applications becomes a reality. DDE is most appropriate
for data exchanges that do not require ongoing user interaction. Normally an
application provides a method for the user to establish the link between applications
exchanging data. But once that link is established, the data exchanges between
applications with no further user involvement. DDE can be used to implement a
broad range of application features including:
Linking to real-time data, such as stock market updates, scientific instruments,
or process control.
13-1

Creating compound documents, such as a word-processing document that
includes a chart produced by a graphics program. Using DDE, the chart will
change when the source data is changed, while the rest of the document remains
the same.
Performing data queries between applications, such as a spreadsheet querying
a database application for accounts past due.

The following hypothetical example illustrates two co-operating Windows DDE
applications, as seen from the user's point of view:
A Microsoft Excel spreadsheet user wishes to track the price of a particular stock on
the Stock Exchange. The user also has the "Quote" application which gives access to
Stock Exchange data. The DDE conversation between Excel and Quote takes place
as follows:
1. The user initiates the conversation by supplying the name of the application
(Quote) that will supply the data and the particular topic of interest (PRICES).
The resulting DDE conversation is used to request quotes on specific stocks.
2. Excel broadcasts the application and topic names to all DDE applications
currently running in the system. Quote will respond, recognising that the target
application name matches its own, establishing a conversation with Excel
relating to the PRICES topic.
3. The user can then request that the spreadsheet be automatically updated whenever a particular stock quotation changes by entering a spreadsheet formula in a
cell. For example, the user could request an automatic update whenever a change
in the selling price of EG's stock occurs by specifying the following Excel
formula:
='Quote'|'PRICES'!EG
4. The user can terminate the automatic updating of the EG stock quotation at any
time. Other data links that were established separately will still remain active
under the same PRICES conversation.
5. The user can also terminate the entire conversation between Excel and Quote on
the PRICES topic, so that no specific data links may be subsequently established
on that topic without initiating a new conversation.
13-2
DDE Terminology
In order to achieve a degree of understanding of the concepts of DDE, it is important
to have a grasp of some of the terminology used to describe the protocol. Two
applications co-operating in a DDE link are considered to be engaged in a DDE
conversation. The application that initiates the conversation is the client application;
and the responding application is the DDE server application. An application can be
engaged in several conversations at the same time and is capable of acting both as a
client in some conversations and as a server in others. The units of data that are
passed between client and server DDE applications are identified by a three level
hierarchy of item, topic and application name.
Each DDE conversation can be uniquely defined by the application name and topic.
As discussed in the previous example, at the beginning of a DDE conversation the
client and server agree upon the application name and topic. The application name is
usually the name of the server application. The topic is a general classification of
data within which multiple data items may be exchanged during conversation. For
applications that operate on file-based documents, the topic is usually a file name.
For other applications the topic is an application-specific name.
A DDE data item is the actual information related to the conversation topic that is
exchanged between applications. Values for the data item can be passed from the
server to the client, or from the client to the server.
Once a DDE conversation has begun, the client can establish one or more permanent
data links with the server. A data link is a communication mechanism by which the
server notifies the client that the value of a given data item has changed. The data
link is considered as permanent because this notification process continues until the
data link or the DDE conversation itself is terminated.
Hot & Warm DDE Links

There are two kinds of permanent data links, Hot and Warm. In the case of a Warm
data link, when the server application detects that the value of a data item has
changed, it will notify the client that a change has occurred, but will not actually send
the new value for that data item. The onus here is on the client application to decide
whether or not it will take the new value. Only upon receipt of a positive response
from the client will the server transmit the new value for the data item. In contrast to
this, with a Hot link the server will automatically pass onto the client the new value
for a data item immediately its value changes.
There are two methods acceptable to TeemTalk for setting up a link. The first is to use
the Edit menu Copy and Paste facility to copy DDE header information to the
clipboard, which a client application can then read and act upon appropriately. The
second is for the client application to directly transmit a WM_DDE_ADVISE
message to TeemTalk in the same format as defined for the clipboard copy.
13-3
Using The Edit Menu DDE Functions

The most apparent DDE support provided by TeemTalk are the two entries in
the Edit menu, DDE Row Copy and DDE Column Copy.
These two functions do not directly invoke a DDE link to another application. Instead,
they ensure all the information that Microsoft Excel would require to establish a
DDE link with TeemTalk is copied to the clipboard. This information consists of item,
topic and application names that TeemTalk would recognise when asked to invoke a
DDE link.
The reason why there are two DDE entries in the Edit menu is to provide the necessary
formatting information to enable data to be pasted into a Microsoft Excel
spreadsheet as a row or column of cells. When data is copied, the end of each line in
the highlighted area of the display is terminated by a TAB character when DDE Row
Copy is selected, and CR and LF characters when DDE Column Copy is selected.
Each line is then treated as a separate portion of data or string, which can then be
pasted into separate cells.
Excel recognises these strings as DDE formulae and more importantly as formulae that
would provide data links to TeemTalk. Negotiation then goes on in the form of hidden
windows messages between Excel and TeemTalk and eventually the link is established
(in this situation Excel is the DDE Client with TeemTalk the Server).
DDE permanent links with TeemTalk are not just limited to Excel, however. With the
knowledge of how to set up a permanent link, it is then possible to get TeemTalk to
converse with almost anything.
To establish a link, a client DDE application requires information in the form of
application name, topic name and item name. The application name is easy. If
youre running TeemTalk-07W, then the application name is TT07W. Similarly, for
TeemTalk-11W it is TT11W. The topic name is slightly more difficult as it varies
according to the instance(s) of TeemTalk currently running within the Windows
environment. By default the first instance has a topic of TTLK1, the second TTLK2,
and so on. The easiest way to determine this is to perform a DDE copy of data to the
clipboard within the instance of TeemTalk under question, then using the clipboard
viewer (usually located within the Main Group box), determine what data TeemTalk
has placed into the clipboard. The data is placed in the following form:
13-4

=szAppName|szTopicName!szItemName
Therefore the Topic for the particular instance of TeemTalk under question is given
between the | and the ! characters.
The last piece of information required to establish a permanent data link is the item
name itself. TeemTalk treats the item name as a direct reference to a position on the
display area. Each ItemName refers to a line on the screen and is sent in a string
representation of the screen coordinates (top left is 0,0) followed by the length of the
string. For example: '23,5,8' refers to the area of the screen located at column 24, row
6, and continues for 8 characters.
A typical copy to the clipboard, in the case of a DDE Column Copy, would look like
this:
=tt07w|'TTLK1'!'18,1,8'
=tt07w|'TTLK1'!'18,2,8'
=tt07w|'TTLK1'!'18,3,8'
=tt07w|'TTLK1'!'18,4,8'
=tt07w|'TTLK1'!'18,5,8'
When a potential client application (for example Microsoft Excel) has this
information pasted into its cells, a WM_DDE_INITIATE message is broadcast
using the szAppName and szTopicName fields. All applications that recognize the
two strings (this should be a particular instance of TeemTalk) will reply with a positive
WM_DDE_ACK message, assuming of course that the current TeemTalk document
name matches that of the DDE Topic Name.
Once the client receives the WM_DDE_ACK, it will send a WM_DDE_ADVISE
message to TeemTalk. Depending upon the information provided by the client, within
its ADVISE message's Data block, TeemTalk will then provide updates reflecting any
change to the data using the WM_DDA_DATA message, sending the ItemName as
an identifier to the particular area on the screen that has changed. Either a NULL data
item will be sent, informing the client that the particular piece of information has
changed and allowing it to transmit a WM_DDE_REQUEST message using the
ItemName to get the data from TeemTalk when it wants to (i.e. a Warm link), or the
data will be sent directly (Hot link).
Direct Initiation Of A DDE Link

An application that knows the area of the TeemTalk screen that contains data of
interest to it can directly initiate a DDE link to TeemTalk using the appropriate
szAppname and szTopicName. Data messages can then proceed as described in the
previous section, using szItemName(s) to reflect the area of the screen. This method
is adopted by Excel when a particular spreadsheet that contains these command
strings is recalled or reopened using the File menu. As long as the AppName and
DocName (TopicName) match, then TeemTalk can then start sending fresh updates to
Excel, once the initial (WM_DDE_ADVISE) preamble is successfully completed.
13-5
File Transfer
TeemTalk for Windows 3.1 (not Windows 95 or NT) supports DDE links with its file
transfer executable, TTFLER.EXE, distributed with the standard TeemTalk package.
Without getting too deep into the internal windows messages that are transmitted, the
link between TeemTalk and TTFLER can briefly be summarised as follows.
All data communications between the two applications are Cold links. That is, each
exchange of data needs to be invoked via an explicit request for it from one or the
other partners. TeemTalk in fact initiates the link and as such is considered to be the
Client. Once the link is established, TeemTalk does not try and display or act upon any
subsequent data it receives from the currently connected host. All data is deemed to
be of importance to the file transfer utility and so is just buffered up and sent across
the DDE link when requested to do so. In a similar fashion, the file transfer utility
also has a monopoly on the transmission of data, so all input to TeemTalk is ignored,
except for that sent to it via the DDE link, which will then be directed on to the host.
This situation continues until the File Transfer Utility sends a message to TeemTalk
that it has finished, which then allows TeemTalk to revert to its normal mode of
operation.
Slave Mode
TeemTalk for Windows 3.1 (not Windows 95 or NT) provides a Slave mode which
allows another Windows based application to send formatted data to be interpreted
by TeemTalk. For example, a Windows based package could be written to send
Tektronix 4207 escape sequences which could be interpreted by TeemTalk-07W, and
thereby the application could use the capabilities of TeemTalk-07W to display the
resultant image.
One way that a process can act as a DDE client to TeemTalk is by initiating a DDE
link specifying a particular topic of "Slave", coded as follows:
atomApplication = GlobalAddAtom("TT07W");
atomTopic = GlobalAddAtom("Slave");
SendMessage(
-1,
WM_DDE_INITIATE,
hwndClientDDE,
MAKELONG(atomApplication, atomTopic)
);
GlobalDeleteAtom(atomApplication);
GlobalDeleteAtom(atomTopic);
In this example, connection would be attempted between the client and the TeemTalk07W program, assuming that this was named TT07W.EXE.
13-6
Data Transmission Over A Slave DDE Link

Once initiated, TeemTalk enters Slave mode, diverting all input from the keyboard, for
example to the Client application, and permitting data to be sent to it from the Client.
Data coming from TeemTalk will be sent in the form of a DDE POKE message. A
suitable way of accepting this is outlined below.
DDEWndProc(HWND hWnd, unsigned message, WORD wParam, LONG lParam)
{
.
.
switch (message)
{
.
.
case WM_DDE_POKE:
ClientReceivedPoke(hWnd, (HWND)wParam, lParam);
break;
.
.
}
.
.
}
ClientReceivedPoke(
HWND hWnd,
HWND hWndPartnerDDE,
LONG lParam
)
{
HANDLE
hPokeData;
DDEPOKE FAR *
lpPokeData;
ATOM
atomItem;
char
szItemName[ITEM_NAME_MAX_SIZE];
hPokeData = LOWORD(lParam);
atomItem = HIWORD(lParam);
GlobalGetAtomName(atomItem, szItemName, ITEM_NAME_MAX_SIZE);
if (!(lpPokeData = (DDEPOKE FAR *)GlobalLock(hPokeData))
|| lpPokeData->cfFormat != CF_TEXT
|| (PartnerSentData(szItemName, lpPokeData->Value) == FALSE))
{
PostMessage(hWndPartnerDDE, WM_DDE_ACK, hWnd,
MAKELONG(0, atomItem));
return;
}
/* Save value of fRelease, since pointer may be invalidated
by GlobalUnlock */
bRelease = lpPokeData->fRelease;
13-7

GlobalUnlock(hPokeData);
if (bRelease)
{
GlobalFree(hPokeData);
}
PostMessage(
hWndPartnerDDE,
WM_DDE_ACK,
hWnd,
MAKELONG(0x8000, atomItem)
);
return;
}
The important call here is PartnerSentData, which actually does the processing of
the received data. The lpPokeData->Value parameter, although defined in the
DDE.H file as a character array containing 1 character, serves as a pointer to a larger
block of data defined as follows:
a) An INTEGER value reflecting the number of bytes of valid data sent,
followed by
b) The data.
This is done in clipboard CF_TEXT format, so each block of data is terminated with
a CR, a LF and a NULL.
The function returns TRUE if successful, or FALSE if not. Note that upon receipt of
a FALSE return, ClientReceivedPoke will send a negative DDE ACK message back
to TeemTalk to reflect the failure.
Sending data to TeemTalk requires the client to post a WM_DDE_POKE message,
with a pointer to the data as defined previously (i.e. the first 2 bytes constitute a
integer count of the number of bytes of data, followed by those bytes, and appended
with CR, LF, NULL). A possible way of doing this is as follows.
Note: This example does not contain any allowances for DDE
messages that are awaiting ACKnowledgement from the
partner, or provision of timeouts in the event of a DDE
message not being ACKnowledged. iData and iValcount
should be set to the same value, the reason for having these
two parameters will become clear later on.
13-8

SendPoke(
HWND hwnd,
char *szItem,
int iData,
char *szValue,
int iValCount
)
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
Our Window handle */

handle for partner in DDE */
String ID for transfer */
Value to be transferred */
Data to be transferred */
Number of bytes in transfer */
{
ATOM
atomItem;
HANDLE
hPokeData;
DDEPOKE FAR * lpPokeData;
LPSTR
pTemp;
/* Allocate size of DDE data header, plus the data: a string */
/* terminated by <CR> <LF> <NULL>. The <NULL> is counted by */
/* by DDEPOKE.Value[1]. */
if (!(hPokeData = GlobalAlloc(GMEM_MOVEABLE | GMEM_DDESHARE,
(LONG)sizeof(DDEPOKE) + iValCount + sizeof(int) + 2)))
return;
if (!(lpPokeData = (DDEPOKE FAR*)GlobalLock(hPokeData)))
return;
lpPokeData->fRelease = TRUE;
lpPokeData->cfFormat = CF_TEXT;
pTemp = lpPokeData-> Value;
*(int far *)pTemp = iData;
pTemp += sizeof(int);
if (iValCount)
_fmemcpy(pTemp, szValue, iValCount);
/* each line of CF_TEXT data is terminated by CR/LF */
lstrcpy((LPSTR)(pTemp + iValCount), (LPSTR)\r\n);
GlobalUnlock(hPokeData);
atomItem = GlobalAddAtom((LPSTR)szItem);
if (!PostMessage(
hWndPartnerDDE,
WM_DDE_POKE,
hWnd,
MAKELONG(hPokeData, atomItem))
)
{
GlobalDeleteAtom(atomItem);
}
return;
}
13-9
Reading & Setting Terminal Parameters

The TeemTalk for Windows 3.1 slave mode, or TeemTalk for Windows 95 or NT
session DDE topic, supports the ability to set and read the user definable setup
settings. The majority of settings require an integer value, but some require strings,
which are handled slightly differently. The following sample code gives an outline of
how to implement this. All values to identify the changeable setup parameters are
#defines.
Settings that refer to strings will return a GLOBAL ATOM value which, when
converted using the Windows SDK function GlobalGetAtomName will result in the
appropriate string. It is essential that, once converted to a string, the Atom is deleted
via a call to DeleteAtom in order to free up the resources, allocated by Windows, that
are associated with the atom.
Reading Parameter Settings

The following three examples assume that hWnd, the handle to the current windows
DDE message processing routine and hWndPartner, the handle to the DDE partner,
are set up accordingly.
Example 1
Get the serial communications port speed.
GetBaudRate()
{
int iBaud;
if ((BaudID = GetSetting(hWnd, hWndPartner, IDM_HOST,
BAUDGROUP, 0)) == -1)
return -1;
switch(BaudID)
{
case B110:
iBaud = 110;
break;
case B300:
iBaud = 300;
break;
case B600:
iBaud = 600;
break;
case B1200:
iBaud = 1200;
break;
13-10

case B2400:
iBaud =
break;
case B4800:
iBaud =
break;
case B9600:
iBaud =
break;
case B19200:
iBaud =
break;
}
return iBaud
}
2400;
4800;
9600;
19200;
Example 2
Read the currently defined Answerback string and place in given buffer.
GetAnswerback(LPSTR szAnswer, int iAnsLen)
{
ATOM aAnswer;
int iStrLen;
aAnswer = (ATOM)GetSetting(hWnd, hWndPartner, IDM_EMUL,
ANSSTRING, 0);
if (aAnswer == -1)
return -1;
iStrLen = GlobalGetAtomName(aAnswer, szAnswer, iAnsLen);
GlobalDeleteAtom(aAnswer);
return iStrLen;
}
13-11

Example 3
All key values are defined using key macro identifiers as documented in the Key
Reference Numbers appendix.
Read the keyboard macro assigned to the Shift + F6 key sequence.
Note: The highlighted characters Slave in hWndSlaveDDE are
only applicable to TeemTalk for Windows 3.1. They are not
to be included when using Windows 95 or NT.
.
.
char buf(128);
ReadKbdMacro(141, (LPSTR)buf,
.
.
ReadKbdMacro(
int iKeyMacro,
LPSTR szKbdMacro,
int iMacroLen
127);
/* Key to be redefined */
/* Pointer to redefinition string */
/* Max allowed Length of
szMacroString */
)
{
ATOM aMacro;
int iStrLen;
aMacro = (ATOM)GetSetting(
hWnd,
hWndPartner,
IDM_MACROS,
NKEYSTRING,
iKeyIndex
);
if (aMacro == -1)
return - 1;
/* Convert received Atom to string */
iStrLen = GlobalGetAtomName(aMacro, szKbdMacro, iMacroLen);
GlobalDeleteAtom(aMacro);
return iStrLen;
}
GetSetting(HWND hWndSlaveDDE, HWND hWndPartner, int MenuID, int
DataGroup, int iValue)
{
DWORD lSetting;
ATOM aItem;
char buf[16];
int data;
13-12

/* Treat Key macro request as a special case */
if (MenuID == IDM_MACROS)
lSetting = MAKELONG(-DataGroup,iValue);
else
lSetting = MAKELONG(DataGroup,MenuID);
ultoa(lSetting,buf,10);
aItem = GlobalAddAtom((LPSTR)buf);
if (!PostMessage(
hWndPartnerDDE,
WM_DDE_REQUEST,
hWndSlaveDDE,
MAKELONG(CF_TEXT,aItem)
)
)
{
GlobalDeleteAtom(atomItem);
return -1;
}
/* Wait for DDE_DATA message return with requested data */
Xfer.Parameter = TRUE;
WaitForParameter();
return Xfer.Data;
}
The WaitForParameter function is not documented but basically waits in a loop,

monitoring the windows messages until a WM_DDE_DATA message appears that
corresponds to the initial WM_DDE_REQUEST. This then enables the
RequestSetting procedure to return with the appropriate value, or will return -1 if the
request fails. (This would be caused as a result of the Client Slave process receiving a
negative ACKnowledgement from TeemTalk following receipt of the
WM_DDE_REQUEST message.)
The processing of the WM_DDE_DATA message is shown on the next page.
13-13

/*************************************************************
FUNCTION: ClientReceivedData
PURPOSE: Called upon receipt of a WM_DDE_DATA
*************************************************************/
void
ClientReceivedData(HWND hWndDDE, HWND hWndPartnerDDE, LONG
IParam)
{
DDEDATA FAR * lpDDEData;
BOOL bRelease;
char szItemName(ITEM_NAME_MAX_SIZE+1);
/*If this Data is in response to a request for data */
/*clear awaiting flags etc accordingly */
if (GetConvPendingAck(hWndDDE) == REQUEST)
{
SetConvPendingAck(hWndDDE, NONE);
KillTimer(hWndDDE, hWndPartnerDDE);
}
if (!(lpDDEData = (DDEDATA FAR *)GlobalLock(LOWORD(lParam)))
| | (lpDDEData->cfFormat != CF_TEXT))
{
/* Negative ACK */
PostMessage(hWndPartnerDDE,
WM_DDE_ACK,
hWndDDE,
MAKELONG(0, HIWORD(IParam)))
);
}
GlobalGetAtomName(HIWORD(IParam), szItemName,
ITEM_NAME_MAX_SIZE);
Xfer.Data = *(int far *)(IpDDEData->Value);
Xfer.Parameter = FALSE;
/* Clear flag for wait for
parameter to return */
if (IpDDEData->fAckReq)
PostMessage(hWndPartnerDDE,
WM_DDE_ACK,
hWndDDE,
MAKELONG(0x8000, HIWORD(IParam))
);
bRelease = IpDDEData->fRelease;
GlobalUnlock(LOWORD(IParam));
if (bRelease)
GlobalFree(LOWORD(IParam));
return;
}
13-14
Changing Parameter Settings

Example 1
Set the serial communications port speed to a required baud rate.
GetBaudRate(int Baud)
{
int BaudID;
switch(iBaud)
{
case 110:
BaudID
break;
case 300:
BaudID
break;
case 600:
BaudID
break;
case 1200:
BaudID
break;
case 2400:
BaudID
break;
case 4800:
BaudID
break;
case 9600:
BaudID
break;
case 19200:
BaudID
break;
default:
return
}
= B110;
= B300;
= B600;
= B1200;
= B2400;
= B4800;
= B9600;
= B19200;
-1;
return ChangeSetting(hWnd, hWndPartner, IDM_HOST,

BAUDGROUP, BaudID, NULL, 0);
}
13-15

Example 2
Redefine the Answerback to the given string.
SetAnswerback(LPSTR szAnswer, int iAnsLen)
{
ChangeSetting(
hWnd,
hWndPartner,
IDM_EMUL,
ANSSTRING,
iAnsLen,
szAnswer,
iAnsLen
);
}
Example 3
Set the keyboard macro assigned to the Shift + F6 key sequence to Hello World.
Note: The highlighted characters Slave in hWndSlaveDDE are
only applicable to TeemTalk for Windows 3.1. They are not
to be included when using Windows 95 or NT.
.
.
SetKbdMacro(141, "Hello World", 11);
.
.
SetKbdMacro(
int iKeyMacro,
/* Key to be redefined */
LPSTR szMacroString, /* Pointer to redefinition string */
int iMacroLen
/* Max allowed Length of szMacroString */
)
{
ChangeSetting(
hWnd,
hWndPartner,
IDM_MACROS,
NKEYSTRING,
iKeyIndex,
szMacroString,
iMacroLen
);
}
void
13-16

ChangeSetting(
HWND hWndSlaveDDE,
int MenuID,
int DataGroup,
int iValue,
LPSTR szChar,
int iCharCount
)
{
DWORD lSetting;
char buf[16];
lSetting = MAKELONG(DataGroup,MenuID);
Itoa(iSetting,buf,10);
SendPoke(hWndSlaveDDE, hWndPartnerDDE, buf, iValue, szChar,
iCharCount);
}
This time, the call to SendPoke assumes that all used strings are NULL terminated
therefore allowing the iValue parameter to reference an integer setting, as opposed to
the byte count as done previously. This is done to allow keyboard macros to be
wholly defined whilst at the same time limiting the number of functions required to
implement the Slave link.
Terminating The Slave DDE Link

To terminate the link requires a WM_DDE_TERMINATE message to be sent to
TeemTalk.
TerminateSlaveLink()
{
PostMessage(hWndPartner,WM_DDE_TERMINATE, hWnd, 0L);
}
Once received and actioned, TeemTalk will return to its normal state.
It is worth noting that any settings changed whilst in Slave mode will still apply. It is
therefore important that any parameters changed during the life of the slave link be
reset back to the values that were set prior to entry. This is best done by ensuring that
for every ChangeParameter call, a corresponding GetParameter call is made
beforehand.
13-17
Additional DDE Functions
13-18
TOPIC ITEM
DATA
DDE
RESULT
MESSAGE
System
SysItems
NONE
REQUEST
Provides a list of items, in

CF_TEXT format, that can be
used with the SYSTEM DDE
Topic (i.e. SysItems, Topics,
etc.).
System
Topics
NONE
REQUEST

CF_TEXT format, of the DDE
topics supported by teemtalk
(i.e. System, Session, etc.).
System
Formats
NONE
REQUEST

CF_TEXT format, of the Clipboard formats supported by
teemtalk (i.e. TEXT,
BITMAP, etc.).
System
Status
NONE
REQUEST
Returns with a string relating to

the current condition of teemtalk
(i.e. Online/Local).
System
SendMouse
X, Y coordinates &
button pressed.
POKE
Sends coordinates of a mouse

click to a remote application
(i.e. host).
SendMouseStr
X, Y coordinates &
button pressed.
POKE
Sends coordinates of a mouse

click to a remote application
(i.e. host) as a character string.
Session Send
String of data to be POKE

sent to host/remote
application.
Sends the given string of

characters to the host.
Session Receive
String of data
received from the
host.
Receive a character string from

the host. Delimited by CR/LF
(by default).
Session Escape
String of commands EXECUTE

for teemtalk to
execute.
Session CurPos
NONE
REQUEST
Returns coordinates of current

cursor position to calling
application.
Session CurPosStr
NONE
REQUEST
Returns coordinates of current

cursor position to calling
application in a string.
Session KeyStr
String containing
virtual key name.
POKE
String of characters, in
CF_TEXT format, that forms
command.
Session KeyPress
String containing
macro definition.
POKE
String of characters, in
CF_TEXT format, that forms
command.
REQUEST
ADVISE
Data gets interpreted by

teemtalk directly and is acted
upon accordingly.

The first four functions in the table enable interrogation of TeemTalk. The remaining
functions are described in the following sections.
All functions referenced with the "Session" topic can additionally be performed using
a topic name relating to the relevant TeemTalk instance, i.e. TTLK1, TTLK2, etc. as
discussed in the section Using The Edit Menu DDE Functions earlier.
If a TeemTalk session has been created other than Untitled, then that session name can
be used as the current session topic by an application conversing with TeemTalk. Note
that changing the session name will remove the link to the session.
SendMouse & SendMouseStr

SendMouse is used to send the coordinates of a mouse click to a remote application
(i.e. host).
The data structure passed across a DDE link between two co-operating applications
is defined in the DDE.H file (supplied as part of the Windows SDK) as follows:
typedef struct tagDDEPOKE
{
WORD
unused:13, /* Earlier versions of DDE.H incorrectly */
/* 12 unused bits. */
fRelease:1,
fReserved:2,
short cfFormat;
BYTE
Value[1]; /* This member was named rgb[1] in */
/* previous versions of DDE.H */
} DDEPOKE;
In order to supply the three values expected by TeemTalk, we have defined a

DDE_MOUSE_REPORT structure as follows:
typedef struct DDE_MOUSE_REPORT
{
int X;
int Y;
int ButtonID;
} DDEMOUSEREPORT, FAR *LPDDEMOUSERPORT;
This needs to be integrated with the DDEPOKE structure when allocating the
memory required to transfer this data to TeemTalk. One way of doing this is shown
below.
/* Allocate size of DDE data header, plus the mouse hit data: */
/* terminated by <CR> <LF> <NULL>. The <NULL> is counted */
/* by DDEPOKE.Value[1] */
if (!(hPokeData
= GlobalAlloc(GMEM_MOVEABLE | GMEM_DDESHARE,
13-19

(LONG)sizeof(DDEPOKE) + sizeof(DDEMOUSEREPORT) + 2)))
return;
if (!(lpPokeData = (DDEPOKE FAR*)GlobalLock(hPokeData)))
{
return;
}
MouseReport.X = Coord.x;
MouseReport.Y = Coord.y;
MouseReport.ButtonID = ButtonDown;
fmemcpy(lpPokeData->Value, &(BYTE far *)MouseReport,
sizeof(DDEMOUSEREPORT));
There is no limit checking on the values of X and Y, so the values passed through to
TeemTalk must be within the valid range for the application that is to receive the
mouse hit. Valid values for the button press (ButtonID) are shown below. Any values
out of this range will result in the DDE_POKE failing.
0
1
2
Left Mouse Button

Centre Mouse Button
Right Mouse Button
It is important to note that the host application receiving these "mouse hit reports"
must be able to recognize them. The reports will be sent in a format appropriate to
TeemTalk's current mode of operation. For example, when TeemTalk-07W is in
W3220 mode the reports would be in Westward 3220 format, whilst in Tek mode the
reports would be in Tek format.
The SendMouseStr function is an alternative string version of SendMouse. The
information sent with the data message is a string a decimal values in the form x,y,n
where n indicates the mouse button as listed earlier.
Send
Send is a straightforward POKE of data, which must be terminated with a CR LF
NULL sequence, to keep in line with the CF_TEXT data format. Note however that
these three characters will not get dispatched through to the host.
Receive
Receive is a WARM/HOT link function (via the WM_DDE_ADVISE and
subsequent WM_DDE_DATA messages).
All data received by TeemTalk once reception of the WM_DDE_ADVISE message
has been acknowledged will be acted upon as normal, but with one important
addition. The data will also be buffered until the specified termination character(s) is/
13-20

are received and then all of the buffered data will be dispatched to the Client DDE
application that established the link.
The termination characters are CR LF by default, but this can be overridden by
including the following WIN.INI command in the TeemTalk command group:
SessRecvTerm=character(s)
where character(s) can be CRLF (default), CR, or LF.
The link is terminated upon receipt of an appropriate WM_DDE_UNADVISE
message by TeemTalk.
Escape
The Escape function sends the given string which is interpreted by TeemTalk, and
nothing is dispatched to the host. This provides the ability for an application to
directly dispatch (for example) Tektronix 4207 specific escape sequences to
TeemTalk-07W, and have it act upon them appropriately. Note that this is specified to
accept strings of data, which means that NULL characters cannot be dispatched as
they are interpreted to terminate the string. The entire Execute string must be in the
form:
[Escape(String to send)]
An appropriate way for an application to do this is to make use of the Windows SDK
lstrcpy function. For example, to force TeemTalk to display red characters on a white
background, the following would be specified:
lstrcpy(lpszEscString, "[Escape(\e[31;47m)]");
The lpszEscString would then be attached to the standard DDEEXECUTE data

structure and be transmitted by posting it along with a WM_DDE_EXECUTE
message.
CurPos & CurPosStr

Curpos uses a DDE_DATA command to pass back data for the requested cursor
position. The data is held in the structure DDE_CURS_INF, as documented below,
and sent across to the calling program in CF_TEXT format.
typedef struct DDE_CURS_INF
{
int Column;
int Row;
}DDE_CURSINF, FAR * LPDDE_CURSINF;
13-21

This needs to be extracted from the DDEDATA message in order to read the
appropriate values. One way of doing this is shown below.
/
****************************************************************
FUNCTION: ClientReceiveData
PURPOSE: Called when client application receives WM_DDE_DATA message.
****************************************************************/
void
ClientReceiveData(hwndClientDDE, hwndServerDDE, lParam)
HWND hwndClientDDE;
HWND hwndServerDDE;
LONG lParam;
{
DDEDATA FAR * lpDDEData;
LPDDE_CURSINF lpDdeCursInf;
BOOL
bRelease;
BOOL
bAck;
if (!(lpDDEData = (DDEDATA FAR *)GlobalLock(LOWORD(lParam))) ||
(lpDDEData->cfFormat != CF_TEXT))
{
PostMessage(hwndServerDDE,
WM_DDE_ACK, hwndClientDDE,
MAKELONG(0, HIWORD(lParam))); /* Negative ACK */
}
else
{
/* Read Row/Column values in static vars */
lpDdeCursInf = (LPDDE_CURSINF)lpDDEData->Value;
CurrentCursRow = lpDdeCursInf->Row;
CurrentCursCol = lpDdeCursInf->Col;
if (lpDDEData->fAckReq)
{
/* return ACK or NACK */
PostMessage(hwndServerDDE,
WM_DDE_ACK,
hwndClientDDE,
MAKELONG( (bAck? 0x8000:0),
HIWORD(lParam)));
}
bRelease = lpDDEData->fRelease;
GlobalUnlock(LOWORD(lParam));
if (bRelease)
GlobalFree(LOWORD(lParam));
}
return;
}
13-22

The CurPosStr function is an alternative string version of CurPos. This returns a
string of two three-digit decimal values for the X and Y coordinates in the form
xxx,yyy.
KeyStr
KeyStr is a straightforward POKE of data that is treated as a key macro to be
performed.
More than one macro definition can be specified in the same string. The string example below will perform the function of the keys Alt + F4 pressed together followed
by the A key:
"<ALT+F4><A>"
KeyStr must be terminated with a CR LF NULL sequence to keep in line with the
CF_TEXT data format. Note however that these three characters will not get
dispatched through to the host.
KeyPress
Keypress is a straightforward POKE of data that will cause the function of a key to
be performed as if it had been pressed by an operator. The data is a string containing
the virtual key name of the required key. Refer to the Virtual Key Names appendix
for a list of key names that can be used.
This must be terminated with a CR LF NULL sequence to keep in line with the
CF_TEXT data format. Note however that these three characters will not get
dispatched through to the host.
13-23
DDE Link To A Visual Basic Application

The following example Visual Basic application DDEDEMO creates a DDE link to
two copies of TeemTalk. The link is created when the Start button is clicked. System
information can be gained by using the buttons at the bottom of the screen. You can
send information to TeemTalk by entering text in the box and clicking the Send
button. Various items are hardcoded into this, like the name of the TeemTalk
executable and the name of the script file.
Note: To make an executable file from Visual Basic, select Make

EXE File... in the File menu and enter a suitable file name.
13-24
DDEDEMO
VERSION 2.00
Begin Form Form1
Caption
=
spider network ag - TeemTalk DDE Demo
ClientHeight
=
6408
ClientLeft
=
1992
ClientTop
=
900
ClientWidth
=
6516
Height
=
6828
Left
=
1944
LinkTopic
=
Form1
ScaleHeight
=
6408
ScaleWidth
=
6516
Top
=
528
Width
=
6612
Begin CommandButton cls
Caption
=
Send DDE Info
FontBold
=
0
False
FontItalic
=
0
False
FontName
=
MS Sans Serif
FontSize
=
7.8
FontStrikethru =
0
False
FontUnderline
=
0
False
Height
=
255
Index
=
0
Left
=
2760
TabIndex
=
29
Top
=
2400
Width
=
1575
End
Begin CommandButton ttscr
Caption
=
Run TT script
FontBold
=
0
False
FontItalic
=
0
False
FontName
=
MS Sans Serif
FontSize
=
7.8
FontStrikethru =
0
False
FontUnderline
=
0
False
Height
=
255
Index
=
1
Left
=
1080
TabIndex
=
28
Top
=
5280
Width
=
1575
End
Begin CommandButton TTstat
Caption
=
Start
FontBold
=
0
False
FontItalic
=
0
False
FontName
=
MS Sans Serif
13-25

FontSize
FontStrikethru
FontUnderline
Height
Index
Left
TabIndex
Top
Width
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
End
Begin TextBox Text1
FontBold
=
FontItalic
=
FontName
=
FontSize
=
FontStrikethru =
FontUnderline
=
Height
=
Index
=
Left
=
TabIndex
=
Top
=
Width
=
End
7.8
0
False
0
False
255
0
120
27
2400
735
-1 True
0
False
Arial
7.2
0
False
0
False
375
18
240
15
4680
6015
repeat last section with the following changes:

Index
17 16 15 14
TabIndex 14 13 12 11
Top
4440 4200
1560 1320
13 12
10 9
3960
1080
11 5
8 7
3720
840
4 3
6 5
3480
600
2 1
4 3
3240
360
Begin CommandButton receive

Caption
=
Receive
FontBold
=
0
False
FontItalic
=
0
False
FontName
=
MS Sans Serif
FontSize
=
7.8
FontStrikethru =
0
False
FontUnderline
=
0
False
Height
=
255
Index
=
0
Left
=
1080
TabIndex
=
25
Top
=
5640
Width
=
1575
End
Begin CommandButton status
Caption
=
Status
FontBold
=
0
False
FontItalic
=
0
False
FontName
=
MS Sans Serif
13-26
0
1
1800

FontSize
FontStrikethru
FontUnderline
Height
Index
Left
TabIndex
Top
Width
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
7.8
0
False
0
False
255
4
5280
24
5640
735
End
Begin CommandButton formats
Caption
=
Formats
FontBold
=
0
False
FontItalic
=
0
False
FontName
=
MS Sans Serif
FontSize
=
7.8
FontStrikethru =
0
False
FontUnderline
=
0
False
Height
=
255
Index
=
2
Left
=
4440
TabIndex
=
23
Top
=
5640
Width
=
735
End
Begin CommandButton topics
Caption
=
Topics
FontBold
=
0
False
FontItalic
=
0
False
FontName
=
MS Sans Serif
FontSize
=
7.8
FontStrikethru =
0
False
FontUnderline
=
0
False
Height
=
255
Index
=
1
Left
=
3600
TabIndex
=
22
Top
=
5640
Width
=
735
End
Begin CommandButton Sysitems
Caption
=
SysItems
FontBold
=
0
False
FontItalic
=
0
False
FontName
=
MS Sans Serif
FontSize
=
7.8
FontStrikethru =
0
False
FontUnderline
=
0
False
Height
=
255
Index
=
0
Left
=
2760
TabIndex
=
21
13-27

Top
Width
=
=
5640
735
End
Begin TextBox Text2
Height
=
285
Left
=
1080
TabIndex
=
20
Top
=
6000
Width
=
5295
End
Begin CommandButton cls
Caption
=
Send DDE Info
FontBold
=
0
False
FontItalic
=
0
False
FontName
=
MS Sans Serif
FontSize
=
7.8
FontStrikethru =
0
False
FontUnderline
=
0
False
Height
=
255
Index
=
4
Left
=
2760
TabIndex
=
18
Top
=
5280
Width
=
1575
End
Begin CommandButton ttscr
Caption
=
Run TT script
FontBold
=
0
False
FontItalic
=
0
False
FontName
=
MS Sans Serif
FontSize
=
7.8
FontStrikethru =
0
False
FontUnderline
=
0
False
Height
=
255
Index
=
0
Left
=
1080
TabIndex
=
17
Top
=
2400
Width
=
1575
End
Begin CommandButton Exit
Caption
=
Exit
FontBold
=
0
False
FontItalic
=
0
False
FontName
=
MS Sans Serif
FontSize
=
7.8
FontStrikethru =
0
False
FontUnderline
=
0
False
Height
=
255
Index
=
0
Left
=
5280
TabIndex
=
16
13-28

Top
Width
=
=
5280
1095
End
Begin CommandButton TTstat
Caption
=
Start
FontBold
=
0
False
FontItalic
=
0
False
FontName
=
MS Sans Serif
FontSize
=
7.8
FontStrikethru =
0
False
FontUnderline
=
0
False
Height
=
255
Index
=
1
Left
=
120
TabIndex
=
0
Top
=
5280
Width
=
735
End
Begin Frame Rahmen1
Caption
=
Session 1
FontBold
=
-1 True
FontItalic
=
0
False
FontName
=
System
FontSize
=
9.6
FontStrikethru =
0
False
FontUnderline
=
0
False
Height
=
2295
Left
=
120
TabIndex
=
2
Top
=
0
Width
=
6255
End
Begin Frame Rahmen2
Caption
=
Session 2
FontBold
=
-1 True
FontItalic
=
0
False
FontName
=
System
FontSize
=
9.6
FontStrikethru =
0
False
FontUnderline
=
0
False
Height
=
2295
Left
=
120
TabIndex
=
26
Top
=
2880
Width
=
6255
End
Begin Label Bezeichnung1
Caption
=
DDE Info
Height
=
255
Left
=
120
TabIndex
=
19
Top
=
6000
13-29

Width
975
End
End
Sub cls_Click (index As Integer)
text2.LinkMode = 0
If index = 0 Then
text2.LinkTopic = TT07W|ttlk1
Else
End If
text2.LinkItem = Send
text2.LinkMode = 2
text2 = text2 + Chr(13) + Chr(10) + Chr(0)
text2.LinkPoke
text2 = Chr(13)
text2.LinkPoke
text2 =
End Sub
Sub Exit_Click (index As Integer)
End
End Sub
Sub formats_Click (index As Integer)
text2.LinkMode = 0
text2.LinkTopic = TT07W|System
text2.LinkItem = Formats
text2.LinkMode = 2
text2.LinkRequest
End Sub
Sub ftp_Click (index As Integer)
text2.LinkMode = 0
text2.LinkTopic = TTfler|System
text2.LinkItem = SysItems
text2.LinkMode = 2
text2.LinkRequest
End Sub
Sub receive_Click (index As Integer)
If receive(0).Caption = Receive Then
receive(0).Caption = Stop receive
text2.LinkMode = 0
text2.LinkTopic = TT07W|Session
text2.LinkItem = Receive
text2.LinkMode = 1
Else
receive(0).Caption = Receive
text2.LinkMode = 0
End If
13-30

End Sub
Sub status_Click (index As Integer)
text2.LinkMode = 0
text2.LinkItem = Status
text2.LinkMode = 2
text2.LinkRequest
End Sub
Sub Sysitems_Click (index As Integer)
text2.LinkMode = 0
text2.LinkItem = SysItems
text2.LinkMode = 2
text2.LinkRequest
End Sub
Sub topics_Click (index As Integer)
text2.LinkMode = 0
text2.LinkItem = Topics
text2.LinkMode = 2
text2.LinkRequest
End Sub
Sub ttscr_Click (index As Integer)
text2.LinkMode = 0
If index = 0 Then
Else
End If
text2.LinkItem = Escape
text2.LinkMode = 2
text2.LinkExecute [Escape( + Chr(27) +
P2zC:\TTLKW31\scripts\DEMO.SCR(WIN,INIT) + Chr(27) + \)]
End Sub
Sub TTstat_Click (index As Integer)
If index = 0 Then
For i = 0 To 6
Text1(i).LinkMode = 0
Text1(i).LinkTopic = TT07W|ttlk1
Text1(i).LinkItem = 0, + i + ,80
Text1(i).LinkMode = 1
Next i
Else
For i = 0 To 6
Text1(i + 12).LinkMode = 0
Text1(i + 12).LinkTopic = TT07W|ttlk2
13-31

Text1(i + 12).LinkItem = 0, + i + ,80
Text1(i + 12).LinkMode = 1
Next i
End If
End Sub
13-32
Troubleshooting
A
Troubleshooting
This appendix provides answers to the most commonly asked questions.
Problem:
When I try to run TeemTalk a message appears warning me that the

language DLL or file transfer utility may not be compatible.
Solution:
This may occur when you have more than one version of TeemTalk
installed on your system and the version you are trying to run is
attempting to use a DLL or file that belongs to another version. If you
continue you may get unpredictable results.
Problem:
Every time I run my application I have to change my setup

parameters.
Solution:
You can save the current session configuration as a connection

template. To make TeemTalk automatically attempt to make a host connection using the same settings the next time it is loaded, click the File
option in the menu bar to display the File menu, then click the Save
Session option.
TeemTalk enables you to create multiple connection templates, any one of
which can be used either when TeemTalk is loaded or while it is running.
The procedure is as follows:
1. In the File menu, select the Save Session As... option to display
the dialog box shown overleaf.
2. In the Saved Items box, indicate which user preference settings are
to be saved by checking the boxes next to the relevant options.
3. In the Settings File text box, specify the name of the terminal
emulation settings file (and the directory path if different from
the default) which is to store settings only affecting the terminal emulation. The default filename is tt*w.nv, where * is 05, 07 or 11,
depending on your version of TeemTalk.
A-1
Troubleshooting
4. In the Save As File Name text box, specify the name of the workspace
settings file (and the directory path if different from the default) which
is to store the user preference settings selected by the Saved Items
options. The default filename is tt*w.wsp, where * is 05, 07 or 11,
depending on your version of TeemTalk.
5. In the Description text box, enter a unique description (up to 132
characters long) which will be used to identify the connection
template for future selection. This description will also appear in the
Open Session dialog box.
6. Click the OK button to save the connection template. If you specified
the names of settings files that already exist, a message box will ask
you to confirm whether or not you want to overwrite the existing files
with the new settings.
Problem:
Random characters appear on the screen when running my

application.
Solution:
Check that the terminal emulation mode selected in the Emulation Settings dialog box is set to the correct one for the application. TeemTalk
defaults to the VT100 emulation.
Check that the settings in the Serial Settings dialog box match that of
the host.
A-2
Troubleshooting
Problem:
How do I run a 4010 program?.
Solution:
Display the Emulation Settings dialog box and select Tek as the emulation, then display the Dialog Settings dialog box and set the Dialog
Area Enabled option to 0 (zero).
Problem:
The text background colour is incorrect.
Solution:
Select the required text colour indices in the Attributes dialog box then
display the Dialog Settings dialog box and select Dialog Indices
Locked.
Problem:
The Gin cursor is too small.
Solution:
TeemTalk displays a small crosshair cursor by default. You can change

the size of the cursor by using the following initialization file command
or command line option:
CrosshairSize=1-4096
-x1-4096
Problem:
The position of text is incorrect and/or the wrong line is displayed

when scrolling through the text.
Solution:
Try changing the setting of the Cursor Origin option in the Dialog
Settings dialog box.
Problem:
Characters are being lost over serial interfaces.
Solution:
The problem is a result of a data overrun in the serial I/O controller on

the communications board of the PC. As characters are received from
the outside world, the serial I/O controller stores characters received
over the RS232 and then generates an interrupt to DOS to signify the
arrival of a character. DOS, and subsequently Windows then read this
character and pass it to the interested application. The problem comes if
characters are received faster than they can be processed by the PC.
Most serial controllers use a buffering technique which stores multiple
characters during times of peak loading so that the affect is minimised.
Because Windows and other applications disable processing of interrupts for considerable periods of time, this buffering is not always
sufficient to overcome the problem. Below are some suggestions to
minimize the problem.
1. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file so that the stacks statement (if one exists)
reads STACKS=0,0. If this isn't done, DOS will turn interrupts off for
a short period when there is a hardware interrupt.
A-3
Troubleshooting
2. Some overruns are caused by SMARTDRV write caching. To disable write caching but continue read caching, specify the drive letter
without a + or -. For example, SMARTDRV C enables read caching
but disables write caching. Note, however, that this will slow the PC
down.
3. Remove the DOS=HIGH statement from CONFIG.SYS as it causes
interrupts to be delayed longer. Note that this will take up precious
CONVENTIONAL memory space.
4. An ill-behaved TSR may be contributing to the problem. If so, try to
isolate it by removing all TSRs then adding them back one at a time.
5. Run in standard mode. Windows stops virtualizing I/O and there is
less overhead.
6. Remove the SOUNDS.DRV driver (which enables a variety of
sounds from your PC speaker) if it is present, as this disables interrupts while activated.
Other things you could try are listed below.
Check that you are using the Windows versions of EMM386,
HIMEM.SYS and SMARTDRV, and not the DOS versions.

Don't run multiple disk-caching programs.
In CONFIG.SYS, set FILES to 30 or higher.
Check that you have SHELL=COMMAND.COM / E:2048 /P i.e.
2K environment.
If Windows hangs, increase the stacks to 64,512. The recommenda-
tion is 0,0.
Check that your TEMP variable points to a subdirectory that actually
exists and that there are at least 2 megabytes free on the disk.
Check that EMMExclude=A000-EFFF, otherwise Windows will
interfere with (DOS) high memory when it shouldn't.

For bizarre problems, disable shadow RAM. If this rectifies the prob-
lem, upgrade your BIOS.

Disable hardware cache in caching disk controller.
If you are using V3.1 of Windows communication drivers then try
using a serial port with a 16550 UART.

Note: Microsoft has produced a document called CE_OVERRUN
Errors with Serial Communications which can be obtained
by contacting Microsoft and asking for document number
Q79988.
A-4
Virtual Key Names
B
Virtual Key Names
This appendix lists all the supported virtual key names which enable you
to include a specific key function in a user definition.
Standard Virtual Key Names

Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Key Function
0-9
A-Z
Alt (same as Menu)
Alt (right)
Apostrophe (' @)*
Back Slash (\ |)*
Backspace
Break
Caps Lock
Comma (, <)
Comma
Compose Character
Control (left)
Control (right)
Copy
Cursor Down
Cursor Left
Cursor Right
Cursor Up
Data Talk
Delete
End
Escape
Euro Sign
Exit teemtalk
F1 - F12
Forward Slash (/ ?)*
Hold Screen
Home
Insert
Keypad 0 - 9
VK_0 - VK_9
VK_A - VK_Z
VK_ALT
VK_RALT
VK_OEM_3
VK_OEM_5
VK_BACK
VK_BREAK
VK_CAPITAL
VK_OEM_COMMA
VK_COMMA
VK_COMPOSE
VK_CONTROL
VK_RCONTROL
VK_COPY
VK_DOWN
VK_LEFT
VK_RIGHT
VK_UP
VK_DATATALK
VK_DELETE
VK_END
VK_ESCAPE
VK_EUROSIGN
VK_EXIT
VK_F1 - VK_F12
VK_OEM_2
VK_HOLDSCREEN
VK_HOME
VK_INSERT
VK_NUMPAD0 - 9
Keypad Add (+)

VK_ADD
Keypad Divide (/)
VK_DIVIDE
Keypad Decimal (.) VK_DECIMAL
Keypad Multiply (*) VK_MULTIPLY
Keypad Subtract (-) VK_SUBTRACT
Menu (same as Alt) VK_MENU
Minus (- _)
VK_OEM_MINUS
Not Sign (` /)*
VK_OEM_8
Number Sign (# ~)* VK_OEM_7
Num Lock
VK_NUMLOCK
Less Than Sign (<>) VK_OEM_102
Page Down
VK_NEXT
Page Up
VK_PRIOR
Paste
VK_PASTE
Pause
VK_PAUSE
Period (. >)
VK_OEM_PERIOD
Plus (+ =)
VK_OEM_PLUS
Print Screen
VK_SNAPSHOT
Print Screen
VK_PRINTSCREEN
Return
VK_RETURN
Scroll Lock
VK_OEM_SCROLL
Semicolon (; :)*
VK_OEM_1
Separator
VK_SEPARATOR
Setup
VK_SETUP
Shift
VK_SHIFT
Shift (right)
VK_RSHIFT
Spacebar
VK_SPACE
Square Bracket L*
VK_OEM_4
Square Bracket R*
VK_OEM_6
Tab
VK_TAB
* 102 key keyboard, may not appear on others
Virtual Key Name
B-1
Virtual Key Names

122 Key Keyboard Additional Keys
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Attn
Clear
Cu Sel
Erase EOF
Ex Sel
F13 - F18
VK_ATTN
VK_OEM_CLEAR
VK_CUSEL
VK_EREOF
VK_EXSEL
VK_F13 - VK_F18
F19 - F24
No Name
PA1
Play
Reset
Zoom
VK_OEM_F19 - F24
VK_NONAME
VK_PA1
VK_PLAY
VK_OEM_RESET
VK_ZOOM
DEC VT220 Virtual Key Names

Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Back Tab
Break
Backspace
Compose
Cursor Down
Cursor Left
Cursor Right
Cursor Up
Datatalk
Delete
Do (F16)
Enter
Escape
F6 - F14
F17 - F20
Find
Help (F15)
Hold Screen
VT_CSIZ
VT_BREAK
VT_BACKSPACE
VT_COMPOSE
VT_DOWN
VT_LEFT
VT_RIGHT
VT_UP
VT_DATATALK
VT_DELETE
VT_DO
VT_ENTER
VT_ESCAPE
VT_F6 - VT_F14
VT_F17 - VT_F20
VT_FIND
VT_HELP
VT_HOLD
Insert
Keypad 0 - 9
Keypad Comma
Keypad Decimal
Keypad Minus
Next Page
PF1 - PF4
Previous Page
Print
Remove
Return
Scroll Down
Scroll Left
Scroll Right
Scroll Up
Select
Setup
Tab
VT_INSERT
VT_PAD0 - 9
VT_COMMA
VT_PADDECIMAL
VT_MINUS
VT_NEXT
VT_PF1 - VT_PF4
VT_PREV
VT_PRINT
VT_REMOVE
VT_RETURN
VT_PANDOWN
VT_PANLEFT
VT_PANRIGHT
VT_PANUP
VT_SELECT
VT_SETUP
VT_TAB
Tek Virtual Key Names

Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Key Function
Virtual Key Name
Break
Cancel
Default View*
Dialog Area Copy*
D. Area Visibility*
Erase Dialog Area
Erase Graphics Area
Fill Patterns
TK_BREAK
TK_CANCEL
TK_DEFVIEW
TK_DCOPY
TK_DVISIB
TK_DERASE
TK_GERASE
TK_PATTERNS
Primary Setup
Print
Restore View*
Screen Copy
View Down*
View Up*
Zoom*
TK_SETUP
TK_PRINT
TK_RSTVIEW
TK_SCOPY
TK_VIEWDOWN
TK_VIEWUP
TK_ZOOM
* Except TeemTalk-05W and TeemTalk-05W32.
B-2
Key Reference Numbers
C
This appendix lists the reference numbers assigned to keys on the
British keyboard and mouse buttons which are used by Tek key
programming commands.
The following tables of reference numbers correspond to the keys listed in the left
column. The key legends shown are those found on the British versions of the
keyboard layouts for the different systems compatible with TeemTalk. Note that not all
of the function keys are on all of the keyboards.
The reference numbers for control keys on other national keyboards will be the same
as shown for the British keyboard.
Alphabetic, numeric and symbolic key reference numbers for other national keyboards are the same as those for the keys in the equivalent positions on the British
keyboard.
Comparison can be made as follows. To find alphabetic, numeric and symbolic key
reference numbers for non-British keyboard layouts, refer to the keyboard layouts in
the manual supplied by the manufacturer. Compare the key positions with those on
the British layout in that manual, then find the corresponding reference numbers in
the following tables.
C-1

BRITISH KEYBOARD KEY REFERENCE NUMBERS
C-2
KEY
NORM
SHIFT
CTRL
CT/SH
ALT
COMPOSE
DEL
DELETE
DO (F10)
END
ESCAPE
HELP (F11)
HOME
INSERT
NEXT
PAUSE BR
REMOVE
RETURN
SPACE
TAB
-166
-258
127
-231
-259
27
-232
-256
-255
-260
148
-257
13
32
9
-166
-264
-34
-233
-265
-37
-234
-262
-261
-266
155
-263
-49
-52
-46
-166
-270
-35
-235
-271
-38
-236
-268
-267
-272
-22
-269
-50
-53
-47
-166
-276
-36
-237
-277
-39
-238
-274
-273
-278
-29
-275
-51
-54
-48
-166
-348
-373
-360
-349
-370
-361
-346
-345
-350
-365
-347
-374
N/A
-371
Keypad 0
Keypad 1
Keypad 2
Keypad 3
Keypad 4
Keypad 5
Keypad 6
Keypad 7
Keypad 8
Keypad 9
Keypad .
Keypad ,
Keypad Keypad ENTER
-55
-56
-57
-58
-59
-60
-61
-62
-63
-64
-65
-66
-67
-68
-69
-70
-71
-72
-73
-74
-75
-76
-77
-78
-79
-80
-81
-82
-83
-84
-85
-86
-87
-88
-89
-90
-91
-92
-93
-94
-95
-96
-97
-98
-99
-100
-101
-102
-103
-104
-105
-106
-107
-108
-109
-110
-331
-332
-333
-334
-335
-336
-337
-338
-339
-340
-341
-342
-343
-344
PF1
PF2
PF3
PF4
-239
-240
-241
-242
-243
-244
-245
-246
-247
-248
-249
-250
-251
-252
-253
-254
-327
-328
-329
-330
CURSOR RIGHT
CURSOR UP
CURSOR LEFT
CURSOR DOWN
-135
-136
-137
-138
-139
-140
-141
-142
-143
-144
-145
-146
-147
-148
-149
-150
-369
-366
-367
-368

KEY
NORM
SHIFT
CTRL
CT/SH
ALT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10 (DO)
F11 (HELP)
F12
F13
F14
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
144
-231
-232
145
146
147
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
151
-233
-234
152
153
154
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-18
-235
-236
-19
-20
-21
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
-16
-17
-25
-237
-238
-26
-27
-28
-351
-352
-353
-354
-355
-356
-357
-358
-359
-360
-361
-362
-363
-364
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
41
33
64
35
36
37
94
38
42
40
N/A
N/A
0
27
28
29
30
31
127
N/A
N/A
N/A
0
27
28
29
30
31
127
N/A
-279
-280
-281
-282
-283
-284
-285
-286
-287
-288
\ |
< >
, <
- _
. >
/ ?
; :
' "
=
[
]
` ~
# ~
92
60
44
45
46
47
59
96
61
91
93
39
23
124
62
60
95
62
63
58
34
43
123
125
126
126
28
60
44
31
46
31
59
96
N/A
27
29
30
23
28
62
60
31
62
31
58
34
N/A
27
29
30
126
-326
-376
-317
-318
-319
-320
-315
-325
-316
-322
-324
-321
-323
C-3

C-4
KEY
NORM
SHIFT
CTRL
CT/SH
ALT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
-289
-290
-291
-292
-293
-294
-295
-296
-297
-298
-299
-300
-301
-302
-303
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
-304
-305
-306
-307
-308
-309
-310
-311
-312
-313
-314

MOUSE BUTTON REFERENCE NUMBERS
Button Pressed
Button Pressed
-155 -157 -159
-161 -163 -165
Button Released
Button Released
-156 -158 -160
-162 -164 -166
Button
Shift + Button
Button Pressed
Button Pressed
-167 -169 -171
-173 -175 -177
Button Released
Button Released
-168 -170 -172
-174 -176 -178
Ctrl + Button
Ctrl + Shift + Button
Programmed strings for Button Released reference numbers are transmitted by

releasing the button only when GIN has been enabled for report transmission on
button release.
C-5
Notes
C-6
Character Sets
D
Character Sets
This appendix shows the tables of characters that are supported by
TeemTalk.
Introduction
The following pages show the character sets that are supported when TeemTalk is in
Tek Alpha or VT220 Alpha overall mode (as explained below). The mode in which
each set is valid is indicated in brackets under the heading.
TeemTalk can emulate either a Tek 4100 series terminal or a DEC VT220 terminal.
The software will switch automatically between these two overall modes only when
particular sub-mode switches take place. These are the switches which require the
terminal emulation to change from Tek to DEC VT220. The sub-modes of the two
emulations are as follows:
Tek Sub-Modes:
VT220 Sub-Modes:
VT52
ANSI (VT100)
EDIT
TEK
VT52
VT100
VT220 7-Bit
VT220 8-Bit
Each character set consists of a series of control characters and displayable characters. Displayable characters are alphanumeric, symbolic or graphic characters that
can be displayed on the screen or printed by a hardcopy device. Control characters
enable the terminal emulation or the printer to perform specific tasks, such as a line
feed or carriage return. These will be actioned when received from the host or when
TeemTalk is in local mode and they are entered from the keyboard.
Note: When the Display Controls option in the Emulation Settings
dialog box is selected, a representation of most control
characters received will be displayed on the screen instead of
actioned.
D-1
Character Sets
To enter a control character from the keyboard, first find the displayable character
equivalent by adding 64 to the decimal value of the control character in the relevant
character set table. For example, the control character CR (carriage return) has a
decimal value of 13. Adding 64 makes 77 which is the decimal value of the
displayable character M. When the Ctrl (control) key is held down and Shift + M is
pressed (or M alone if Caps Lock is on), this will generate a CR code in local mode.
Some setup options require you to specify one or more control characters. A control
character can be specified by typing ^ to represent the Ctrl key, immediately
followed by the displayable character equivalent of the control character as described
in the previous paragraph. For example, ^M, represents Ctrl + M, which generates
the control character CR.
Another way of specifying control characters is by entering the decimal value of the
ASCII character. Decimal values are entered as three-digit numbers immediately
preceded by an underscore character. Values with only two digits must be preceded
by a zero. For example, the decimal value of CR is 13, so this would be entered as
_013.
D-2
Character Sets
ASCII (MULTINATIONAL 7-BIT) CHARACTER SET
(Tek & VT220 Alpha Modes)
COLUMN
R 8 7 BITS
65
O
W 4321
2
3
6
7
4
5
0
0
0
0
01
00
00
0
11
11
00 101
11
00 001 010
1
0
0
0 0000 NUL
1 0001 SOH
2 0010 STX
3 0011 ETX
4 0100 EOT
5 0101 ENQ
6 0110 ACK
7 0111 BEL
8 1000 BS
9 1001 HT
10 1010 LF
11 1011 VT
12 1100 FF
13 1101 CR
14 1110 SO
15 1111
KEY:
SI
ESC
0
20
0 DLE 16
0
10
1
21
1 DC1 17
1 XON 11
2
22
2 DC2 18
2
12
3
23
3 DC3 19
3 XOFF 13
4
24
4 DC4 20
4
14
5
25
5 NAK 21
5
15
6
26
6 SYN 22
6
16
7
27
7 ETB 23
7
17
10
30
8 CAN 24
8
18
11
31
9 EM 25
9
19
12
32
10 SUB 26
A
1A
13
33
11 ESC 27
B
1B
14
34
12 FS
28
C
1C
15
35
13 GS 29
D
1D
16
36
14 RS
30
E
1E
17
37
15 US
31
F
1F
33
27
1B
SP
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
DEL
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
The ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) character set will
be selected when the Keyboard Language option in the Terminal Settings dialog
box is set to North American, or the Multinational option in the Emulation
Settings dialog box is selected. This table forms the first half of the Multinational
character set, the second half of which is the DEC Additional set.
D-3
Character Sets
DEC ADDITIONAL (MULTINATIONAL 8-BIT) CHARACTER SET
(VT220 Alpha Mode)
10
11
14
15
COLUMN
12
13
BITS R
8
1
1
1
1
76
11
10
1
10
11
11
O
00 101
11
00 001 010
1 4 3 2 15 W
0
8
IND
NEL
SSA
ESA
HTS
HTJ
VTS
PLD
PLU
RI
SS2
SS3
200
128
80
201
129
81
202
130
82
203
131
83
204
132
84
205
133
85
206
134
86
207
135
87
210
136
88
211
137
89
212
138
8A
213
139
8B
214
140
8C
215
141
8D
216
142
8E
217
143
8F
KEY:
DCS
PU1
PU2
STS
CCH
MW
SPA
EPA
CSI
ST
OSC
PM
APC
ESC
220
144
90
221
145
91
222
146
92
223
147
93
224
148
94
225
149
95
226
150
96
227
151
97
230
152
98
231
153
99
232
154
9A
233
155
9B
234
156
9C
235
157
9D
236
158
9E
237
159
9F
33
27
1B
240
160
A0
241
161
A1
242
162
A2
243
163
A3
244
164
A4
245
165
A5
246
166
A6
247
167
A7
250
168
A8
251
169
A9
252
170
AA
253
171
AB
254
172
AC
255
173
AD
256
174
AE
257
175
AF
2
3
/4
/2
260
176
B0
261
177
B1
262
178
B2
263
179
B3
264
180
B4
265
181
B5
266
182
B6
267
183
B7
270
184
B8
271
185
B9
272
186
BA
273
187
BB
274
188
BC
275
189
BD
276
190
BE
277
191
BF
300
192
C0
301
193
C1
302
194
C2
303
195
C3
304
196
C4
305
197
C5
306
198
C6
307
199
C7
310
200
C8
311
201
C9
312
202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204
CC
315
205
CD
316
206
CE
317
207
CF
320
208
D0
321
209
D1
322
210
D2
323
211
D3
324
212
D4
325
213
D5
326
214
D6
327
215
D7
330
216
D8
331
217
D9
332
218
DA
333
219
DB
334
220
DC
335
221
DD
336
222
DE
337
223
DF
340
224
E0
341
225
E1
342
226
E2
343
227
E3
344
228
E4
345
229
E5
346
230
E6
347
231
E7
350
232
E8
351
233
E9
352
234
EA
353
235
EB
354
236
EC
355
237
ED
356
238
EE
357
239
EF
360
240
F0
361
241
F1
362
242
F2
363
243
F3
364
244
F4
365
245
F5
366
246
F6
367
247
F7
370
248
F8
371
249
F9
372
250
FA
373
251
FB
374
252
FC
375
253
FD
376
254
FE
377
255
FF
0000 0
0001 1
0010 2
0011 3
0100 4
0101 5
0110 6
0111 7
1000 8
1001 9
1010 10
1011 11
1100 12
1101 13
1110 14
1111 15
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
This is the second half of the Multinational character set when TeemTalk is in VT220
Alpha overall mode (the first half is the ASCII character set). These characters may
be generated when TeemTalk is in VT220 7 or 8 bit mode and the Multinational
option in the Emulation Settings dialog box is selected.
D-4
Character Sets
NATIONAL REPLACEMENT CHARACTERS
(VT220 Alpha Mode)
BINARY BIT 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
43
35
23
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
100
64
40
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
133
91
5B
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
134
92
5C
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
135
93
5D
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
136
94
5E
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
137
95
5F
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
140
96
60
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
173
123
7B
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
174
124
7C
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
175
125
7D
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
176
126
7E
ASCII
British
Canadian
Danish
Norwegian
Dutch
/4
ij
/2
fl
/4
Finnish
French
Belgian
German
Italian
Portuguese
Spanish
Swedish
Swiss French
Swiss German
This table shows the characters that replace certain ASCII characters in VT220
Alpha overall mode when the Multinational option in the Emulation Settings dialog
box is not selected. The national character set consists of the ASCII set with the
changed characters listed on the line for the selected keyboard nationality.
D-5
Character Sets
NATIONAL REPLACEMENT CHARACTERS
(Tek Alpha Mode)
BINARY BIT 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
43
35
23
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
100
64
40
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
133
91
5B
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
134
92
5C
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
135
93
5D
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
140
96
60
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
173
123
7B
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
174
124
7C
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
175
125
7D
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
176
126
7E
ASCII
British
Danish
Norwegian
French
German
Swedish
This table shows the characters that replace certain ASCII characters in Tek overall
mode for the keyboard nationality chosen in the Terminal Settings dialog box. The
national character set consists of the ASCII set with the changed characters listed on
the line for the selected keyboard nationality.
D-6
Character Sets
LINE DRAWING CHARACTER SET
(Tek & VT220 Alpha Modes)
0
COLUMN
R 8 7 BITS
65
O
W 4321
00
00
0 0000 NUL
1 0001 SOH
2 0010 STX
3 0011 ETX
4 0100 EOT
5 0101 ENQ
6 0110
ACK
7 0111 BEL
8 1000 BS
9 1001 HT
10 1010 LF
11 1011 VT
12 1100 FF
13 1101 CR
14 1110 SO
15 1111
KEY:
SI
ESC
1
00
01
0
20
0 DLE 16
0
10
1
21
1 DC1 17
1 XON 11
2
22
2 DC2 18
2
12
3
23
3 DC3 19
3 XOFF 13
4
24
4 DC4 20
4
14
5
25
5 NAK 21
5
15
6
26
6 SYN 22
6
16
7
27
7 ETB 23
7
17
10
30
8 CAN 24
8
18
11
31
9 EM 25
9
19
12
32
10 SUB 26
A
1A
13
33
11 ESC 27
B
1B
14
34
12 FS
28
C
1C
15
35
13 GS 29
D
1D
16
36
14 RS
30
E
1E
17
37
15 US
31
F
1F
33
27
1B
00
SP
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
10
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
00
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
11
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
01
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
00
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
01
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
01
01
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
H
F
C
L
N
V
10
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
01
11
DEL
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
This is a special character set which is used by some applications.
D-7
Character Sets
ADDITIONAL CHARACTER SET
(Tek Alpha Mode)
COLUMN
R 8 7 BITS
65
O
W 4321
2
3
6
7
4
5
0
0
0
0
01
00
00
0
11
11
00 101
11
00 001 010
1
0
0
0 0000 NUL
1 0001 SOH
2 0010 STX
3 0011
ETX
4 0100 EOT
5 0101 ENQ
6 0110 ACK
7 0111 BEL
8 1000 BS
9 1001 HT
10 1010 LF
11 1011 VT
12 1100 FF
13 1101 CR
14 1110 SO
15 1111
KEY:
SI
ESC
0
20
0 DLE 16
0
10
1
21
1 DC1 17
1 XON 11
2
22
2 DC2 18
2
12
3
23
3 DC3 19
3 XOFF 13
4
24
4 DC4 20
4
14
5
25
5 NAK 21
5
15
6
26
6 SYN 22
6
16
7
27
7 ETB 23
7
17
10
30
8 CAN 24
8
18
11
31
9 EM 25
9
19
12
32
10 SUB 26
A
1A
13
33
11 ESC 27
B
1B
14
34
12 FS
28
C
1C
15
35
13 GS 29
D
1D
16
36
14 RS
30
E
1E
17
37
15 US
31
F
1F
33
27
1B
SP
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
oo
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
oc
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
H
F
C
L
N
V
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
DEL
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL
These characters may be generated when TeemTalk is in Tek Alpha mode.
D-8
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
Host Command Summary
E
This appendix lists the host and Tek Primary Setup commands that are
valid in each terminal emulation mode. TeemTalk-specific commands
are listed at the back.
The following conventions are used in this command list:
Spaces in a command are for clarity only and are not to be entered as part of the
command. A space character that is part of the command will be shown as SP.
An asterisk (*) in a command indicates the location of one or more parameters
except otherwise indicated next to the command.
VT52 Mode
CHARACTER SET SELECTION
HOST
Invoke G0 character set

Invoke G1 character set
Select G0 character set
Select Line Drawing character set
SI
SO
ESC G
ESC F
CURSOR
HOST
Direct cursor addressing (1 to 96 = SP to DEL)

Insert FF character & advance cursor
Line feed
Move cursor down one line
Move cursor home
Move cursor one column left
Move cursor one column right
Move cursor to left margin of current line
Move cursor to next tab stop
Move cursor up one line
Reverse line feed
ESC Y *line *column

FF
LF
ESC B
VT
ESC H
BS
ESC D
ESC C
CR
HT
ESC A
ESC I
PRIMARY SETUP
PRIMARY SETUP
E-1
E-2
TEXT ERASURE
HOST
Erase text to end of line

Erase text to end of screen
ESC K
ESC J
GENERAL
HOST
Cancel current ESC sequence & display error

Sound audible tone
CAN
BEL
MODE SELECTION
HOST
PRIMARY SETUP
Select terminal emulation mode

(Host * 0 = Tek, 1 = ANSI, 2 = Edit, 3 = VT52,
5 = VT100N, 6 = VT220N, 7 = VT220M7,
8 = VT220M8)
Select numeric keypad application mode
Select numeric keypad normal mode
Select VT100 mode
ESC % ! *
CODE *
ESC =
ESC >
ESC <
PRINTING
HOST
Auto print off

Auto print on
Print controller off
Print controller on
ESC _
ESC ^
ESC X
ESC W
REPORTS
HOST
Request mode identification report

Send terminal emulation mode report
ESC Z
ESC # ! 0
PRIMARY SETUP
PRIMARY SETUP
PRIMARY SETUP
PRIMARY SETUP
ANSI VT100 Mode

CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES
Assign * attribute(s) to following characters
Default attributes
Bold on
Underline on
Flashing on
Inverse video on
Half intensity off
Underline off
Flashing off
Inverse video off
Black foreground
Red foreground
Green foreground
Yellow foreground
Blue foreground
Magenta foreground
Cyan foreground
White foreground
White foreground
0
1
4
5
7
22
24
25
27
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
39
ESC [ * m
White background 40
Red background
41
Red background
42
Yellow background 43
Blue background
44
Magenta background 45
Cyan background
46
White background 47
White background 49
White background 50
Red background
51
Red background
52
Yellow background 53
Blue background
54
Magenta background 55
Cyan background
56
White background 57
White background 59
Deselect underline character mode

Double width & height (top half) characters
Double width & height (bottom half) characters
Double width single height characters
Select underline character mode
Single width & height (normal) characters
ESC [ < 1 h
ESC # 3
ESC # 4
ESC # 6
ESC [ < 1 l
ESC # 5
HOST
Assign G0 label to * character set

ESC ( *
ESC ) *
ASCII / N.American
British
Dutch
Finnish
French
French Canadian
German
B
A
4
5 or C
R
9 or Q
K
Assign G0 labelled set to 7 bit codes

DAMODE *
DAMODE *
PRIMARY SETUP
Italian
Danish / Norwegian
Portuguese
Spanish
Swedish
Swiss
Line Drawing
Y
' or E or 6
%6
Z
7 or H
=
0
SI
SO
CURSOR
HOST
Clear tab stops (0 = cursor position, 2 or 3 = all)

Deselect auto carriage return
Disable cursor
Disable cursor autowrap
ESC [ * g
ESC [ 20 l
ESC [ ? 50 l
ESC [ ? 7 l
PRIMARY SETUP
E-3
E-4
Enable cursor
Enable cursor autowrap
Index cursor (move down one line)
Insert FF character & advance cursor
Line feed
Move cursor down * lines
Move cursor left * columns
Move cursor right * columns
Move cursor to beginning of next line
Move cursor to left margin of current line
Move cursor to line (*l) column (*c)
Move cursor to line (*l) column (*c)
Move cursor to next tab stop
Move cursor up * lines
Reverse index cursor (move up one line)
Select absolute origin mode
Select auto carriage return
Select relative origin mode
Set tab stop at current cursor position
Tab cursor backward * tabs
Tab cursor forward * tabs
ESC [ ? 50 h
ESC [ ? 7 h
ESC D
FF
LF
ESC [ * B
VT
ESC [ * D
BS
ESC [ * C
ESC E
CR
ESC [ *l ; *c H
ESC [ *l ; *c f
HT
ESC [ * A
ESC M
ESC [ ? 6 l
ESC [ 20 h
ESC [ ? 6 h
ESC H
ESC [ * Z
ESC [ * I
DISPLAY
HOST
Scroll display down * lines

Scroll display up * lines
Select 80 column display mode
Select 132 column display mode
Select invisible display
Select normal colour display mode
Select reverse colour display mode
Select visible display
Set left (*l) and right (*r) margin positions
ESC [ * T
ESC [ * S
ESC [ ? 3 l
ESC [ ? 3 h
ESC [ ? 75 l
ESC [ ? 5 l
ESC [ ? 5 h
ESC [ ? 75 h
ESC [ *l ; *r r
LFCR *
TABS *
PRIMARY SETUP
EDITING
HOST
Delete * characters from cursor position right

Delete * lines from cursor position down
Erase * characters & attributes from cursor right
Erase line portion (0 = from, 1 = to, 2 = all)
Erase screen portion (0 = from, 1 = to, 2 = all)
Insert * blank lines
Insert * space characters
Select insert mode
Select replace mode
ESC [ * P
ESC [ * M
ESC [ * X
ESC [ * K
ESC [ * J
ESC [ * L
ESC [ * @
ESC [ 4 h
ESC [ 4 l
GENERAL OPERATION
HOST
PRIMARY SETUP
Cancel current ESC sequence & display error

Local echo mode on
Local echo mode off
Reset features (* = * in ESC [ * h commands)
CAN
ESC [ 12 l
ESC [ 12 h
ESC [ * l
ECHO YES
ECHO NO
PRIMARY SETUP

Reset terminal emulation
Restore saved features
Save features (char. set, attrib's, cursor, origin)
5 = VT100N, 6 = VT220N, 7 = VT220M7,
8 = VT220M8)
Select VT52 mode
Select VT100 mode from VT320 mode
Select VT300 7 bit mode
Select VT300 8 bit mode
Select VT300 8 bit mode (* can be 0 or 2)
Set features (* = * in ESC [ * h commands)
Soft reset
Sound audible tone
ESC c
ESC 8
ESC 7
ESC % ! *
ESC [ ? 2 l
CODE VT52
ESC [ 61 " p
ESC [ 62 ; 1 " p
ESC [ 62 " p
ESC [ 62 ; * " p
ESC [ * h
ESC [ ! p
BEL
KEYBOARD
HOST
Disable key autorepeat

Disable keyboard
Disable keyboard input
Enable key autorepeat
Enable keyboard
Enable keyboard input
Select cursor key application mode
Select cursor key normal mode
Select keypad application mode
Select keypad numeric mode
ESC [ ? 8 l
ESC `
ESC [ 2 h
ESC [ ? 8 h
ESC b
ESC [ 2 l
ESC [ ? 1 h
ESC [ ? 1 l
ESC =
ESC >
PRINTING
HOST
Auto print off

Auto print on
Print controller on
Print controller off
Print cursor line
Print page
ESC [ ? 4 i
ESC [ ? 5 i
ESC [ 5 i
ESC [ 4 i
ESC [ ? 1 i
ESC [ i
REPORTS
HOST
Report compatibility level

Report cursor position
Report keyboard nationality
Report operating status
Report terminal emulation mode
Report VT terminal identity
ESC [ > c
ESC [ 6 n
ESC [ ? 26 n
ESC [ 5 n
ESC # ! 0
ESC [ 0 c
ESC [ c
ESC Z
CODE *
PRIMARY SETUP
PRIMARY SETUP
PRIMARY SETUP
E-5
ANSI VT220 Mode

When TeemTalk is in VT220 7 or 8 bit mode, the following commands will be
executed in addition those listed previously for ANSI VT100 mode.
CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES
HOST
Non-erase attribute on
Non-erase attribute off (* = 0 or 2)
ESC [ 1 " q
ESC [ * " q
HOST

(second * is parameter)
ESC * *
Extre character sets: DEC VT220 Additional

Tek Additional
E-6
PRIMARY SETUP
PRIMARY SETUP
ESC + *
<
3

Assign G2 labelled set to 7 bit codes for 1 character
Assign G3 labelled set to 7 bit codes for 1 character
Clear redefinable character set
Load redefinable character set
Select Multinational character set mode
Select National character set mode
ESC ~
ESC n
ESC N
ESC }
ESC o
ESC O
ESC |
ESC P 1 ; 1 ; 2 { SP @ ESC \
ESC P * { * ESC \
ESC [ ? 42 l
ESC [ ? 42 h
EDITING
HOST
Selective erase line (0 = from, 1 = to, 2 = all)

Selective erase screen (0 = from, 1 = to, 2 = all)
ESC [ ? * K
ESC [ ? * J
GENERAL OPERATION
HOST
Select C1 7 bit control mode

Select C1 8 bit control mode
ESC SP F
ESC SP G
PF KEYS
HOST
Clear all PF keys

Lock PF keys
Program a PF key
ESC P 0 ; 1 | ESC \
ESC P 1 ; 0 | ESC \
ESC P * ; * | * / * ESC \
PRIMARY SETUP
PRIMARY SETUP
PRIMARY SETUP
Tek Mode
Applies to TeemTalk-11W and TeemTalk-11W32 only.
Applies to TeemTalk-05W & -05W32, TeemTalk-07W & TeemTalk-07W32.
COLOUR
HOST
PRIMARY SETUP
Assign colour index to P0/P1 plotter pen

Assign colours to dialog area indices
Assign colours to surface indices
Select background grey shade
Select background surface colour
Select character cell/dash line gap index
Select colour/overlap/grey mode
Select dialog area surface colour map
Select dialog area text alternative index
Select graphics text colour index
Select line/panel b/m colour index
Select smoothness of curve
Select surface indices grey shades
Set pixels in rectangle to identical colour
Specify alpha cursor colour indices
Specify dialog area colour indices
Specify index monochrome printing
Specify pixel colour indices
ESC P I *
ESC T F *
ESC T G *
ESC R B *
ESC T B *
ESC M B *
ESC T M *
ESC L S *
ESC L J *
ESC M T *
ESC M L *
ESC U G *
ESC R G *
ESC R R *
ESC T D *
ESC L I *
ESC Q I *
ESC R P *
PMAP *
DACMAP *
CMAP *
GREYBACK *
CBACKGROUND *
BACKINDEX *
CMODE *
DASURFACE *
DA2INDEX *
GTINDEX *
LINEINDEX *
CSMOOTH *
GREYCMAP *
PXRECTANGLE *
ACURSOR *
DAINDEX *
HCMAP *
PXRASTERWRITE *
DIALOG AREA
HOST
PRIMARY SETUP
Delete specified dialog area

Enable dialog area
Enable dialog area display
Erase dialog area buffer
Set dialog area hardcopy attributes
Specify dialog area maximum line length
Specify dialog area position
Specify no. of visible lines in dialog area
Specify size of dialog area buffer
ESC K K *
ESC K A *
ESC L V *
ESC L Z
ESC Q L *
ESC L C *
ESC L X *
ESC L L *
ESC L B *
DELDAREA *
DAENABLE *
DAVISIBILITY *
CLEARDIALOG
HCDAATTRIBUTES *
DACHARS *
DAPOSITION *
DALINES *
DABUFFER *
GENERAL
HOST
PRIMARY SETUP
Acivate screen dim

Backspace
Cancel current ESC seq. & display error
Cancel operation & reset
Carriage return
Display command & param. current values
Display command information
Display decoded value of encoded param.
Display encoded value of host com. param.
Enable port to port communications
End spooling
End write command file to disk
ESC K G *
BS
CAN
ESC K C
CR
DIM *
ESC P C *
ESC J E
ESC A X
CANCEL
STATUS
HELP
DECODE *
ENCODE *
PCOPY *
STOPSPOOL
E-7
E-8
Enter Alpha mode

Enter Marker mode
Enter Vector mode
Exit TeemTalk to DOS
Insert FF & advance cursor
Line feed
Lock keyboard
Lock viewing keys for zoom/pan
Read command file from disk
Reset TeemTalk
Run a program
Save parameters
Save parameters in non-volatile file
Select 4107 or 4111 emulation
Select auto carriage return
Select auto line feed
Select code for SYN
Select continuous/intermittent bell tone
Select control code action or display
Select error message display level
Select factory default parameters
Select local or online mode
Select response to full page
5 = VT100N, 6 = VT220N, 7 = VT220M7,
8 = VT220M8)
Select text editing characters
Set tab stop positions
Sound audible tone
Specify command source
Specify spooling path
Tab to next tab stop
Vertical tab (i.e. line feed)
Write command file to disk
US
FS
GS
ESC A E
FF
LF
ESC K L *
ESC R J *
ESC A R *
ESC K V
ESC A S *
ESC J V *
ESC K U
ESC K Z *
ESC A U *
ESC K B *
BEL
ESC J L *
ESC J S *
HT
VT
ESC A W *
GIN
HOST
PRIMARY SETUP
Define GIN window

Define tablet GIN area
Disable GIN mode
Enable 4010 GIN mode
Enable/disable 4953 tablet GIN mode
Enable GIN
Enable GIN gridding & specify grid spacing
Enable GIN inking
Enable rubberbanding
Enable tablet & keys
Select format of GIN reports
Select GIN cursor speed
Select GIN ink/rubberband start points
Select GIN pick aperture size
ESC I W *
ESC I V *
ESC I D *
ESC SUB
ESC ! *
ESC I E *
ESC I G *
ESC I I *
ESC I R *
ESC K J *
ESC I K *
ESC I J *
ESC I X *
ESC I A *
GINWINDOW *
GINAREA *
GINDISABLE *
ESC K F *
ESC K R *
ESC K S *
ESC K T *
ESC K P *
ESC % ! *
LOCKVIEWINGKEYS *
RESET
SAVE *
NVSAVE
TEKMODE *
LFCR *
CRLF *
SYNISESC *
BELLTYPE *
SNOOPY *
ERRORLEVEL *
FACTORY
LOCAL *
PAGEFULL *
CODE *
EDITCHARS *
TABS *
LOAD *
SPOOL *
GINENABLE *
GINGRIDDING *
GININKING *
GINRUBBERBAND *
MOUSEMAP *
GINREPORT *
GSPEED *
GINSTARTPOINT *
GINPICKAPERTURE *

Select segment for GIN cursor
Select tablet area
Set GIN stroke report frequency
Specify GIN cursor movement
Specify GIN key characters
Specify GIN stroke report key characters
Specify tablet type
ESC I C *
ESC I N *
ESC I F *
ESC I U *
ESC I Z *
ESC I H *
ESC I B *
GINCURSOR *
TBSIZE *
GINFILTERING *
GINRATES *
GINTABCHARS *
GINSHEADERCHARS *
GRAPHICS ALPHA TEXT
HOST
PRIMARY SETUP
Select alpha text font (G0)

Select alpha text font (G1)
Select underline mode
Specify 4014 alpha text size (128 cpl)
ESC SI
ESC SO
ESC L M *
ESC ;
ESC :
ESC 8
ESC 9
GRAPHICS PRIMITIVES
HOST
PRIMARY SETUP
Change graphics position

Define line style
Draw curve
Draw marker
Draw vector
End panel definition
Fill rectangle
Finish fill pattern definition
Select marker style
Select panel fill pattern
Select panel filling features
Select pixel rectangle features
Select rectangle drawing boundary
Specify 4014 line style (* = ` to o)
Specify style of line/panel boundary
Start fill pattern definition
Start panel definition
ESC L F *
ESC M X *
ESC U C *
ESC L H *
ESC L G *
ESC L E
ESC U R *
ESC M E
ESC M M *
ESC M P *
ESC M S *
ESC R T *
ESC U B *
ESC *
ESC M V *
ESC M D *
ESC L P *
MOVE *
LSDEFINE *
CURVE *
MARKER *
DRAW *
ENDPANEL
RECTANGLE *
ENDFILLP
MARKTYPE *
FILLPATTERN *
PFILLMODE *
PXFACTORS *
BOUNDMODE *
GRAPHICS SURFACES
HOST
PRIMARY SETUP
Erase graphics area

Select current view surf./erase/border index
Select surface visibility
Specify number of surfaces & bit planes
Specify surface priority level
ESC FF
ESC R A *
ESC R I *
ESC R D *
ESC R N *
VATTRIBUTES *
SVISIBILITY *
SDEFINITIONS *
SPRIORITIES *
GRAPHICS TEXT
HOST
PRIMARY SETUP
Begin graphics text character definition

Define graphics text font grid dimensions
Delete user defined character from font
Display graphics text
End graphics text character definition
Graphics area replace/overstrike
ESC S T *
ESC S G *
ESC S Z *
ESC L T *
ESC S U
ESC M G *
GTBEGIN *
GTGRID *
GTDELETE *
GTEXT *
GTEND
GAMODE *
DAMODE *
LINESTYLE *
BEGINFILLP *
BEGINPANEL *
E-9

Select font for stroke precision
Select graphics text control precision
Select graphics text slant angle
Select size of graphics text
Specify graphics text string rotation angle
Specify graphics text writing direction
ESC M F *
ESC M Q *
ESC M A *
ESC M C *
ESC M R *
ESC M N *
GTFONT *
GTPRECISION *
GTSLANT *
GTSIZE *
GTROTATION *
GTPATH *
HOST COMMUNICATIONS
HOST
PRIMARY SETUP
Direct host data to specified port

Ignore delete code
Select bypass mode
Select end of line characters
Select line parity type
Select local echo
Select prompt mode
Set input queue size
Set line baud rate limit
Set line TX & RX baud rate
Set stop bits
Specify break key interrupt duration
Specify end of file characters
Specify end of line delay
Specify end of line string transfer freq.
Specify line flow control type
Specify prompt mode prompt string
Specify report termination characters
ESC J C *
ESC K I *
ESC CAN
ESC N C *
ESC N P *
ESC K E *
ESC N M *
ESC N Q *
ESC N L *
ESC N R *
ESC N B *
ESC N K *
ESC N E *
ESC N D *
ESC I M *
ESC N F *
ESC N S *
ESC N T *
COPY HO: TO *
IGNOREDEL *
EOMCHARS *
PARITY *
ECHO *
PROMPTMODE *
QUEUESIZE *
XMTLIMIT *
BAUDRATE *
STOPBITS *
BREAKTIME *
EOFSTRING *
XMTDELAY *
REOM *
FLAGGING *
PROMPTSTRING *
EOLSTRING *
P0/P1 PORT
HOST
PRIMARY SETUP
Assign protocol to P0/P1 port

Select hardcopy features
Select hardcopy image width
Select P0/P1 positive/neg. hardcopy
Specify number of P0/P1 port hardcopies
Specify P0/P1 port baud rate
Specify P0/P1 port data & stop bits
Specify P0/P1 port end of file string
Specify P0/P1 port flow control
Specify P0/P1 port h/c image orientation
Specify P0/P1 port parity
Specify printer type
Specify size of colour hardcopy
Transmit current view visible segs to port
ESC P A *
ESC Q X *
ESC Q F *
ESC P J *
ESC P N *
ESC P R *
ESC P B *
ESC P E *
ESC P F *
ESC P O *
ESC P P *
ESC Q D *
ESC Q A *
ESC P L *
PASSIGN *
HCFEATURES *
HCFORMWIDTH *
PINVERSION *
PCOPIES *
PBAUD *
PBITS *
PEOF *
PFLAG *
PORIENT *
PPARITY *
HCINTERFACE *
HCSIZE *
PLOT TO *
PARALLEL PORT
HOST
PRIMARY SETUP
Copy screen to parallel printer port

Copy to parallel printer port
Select CR or CRLF for mono printer
Select colour copier control
Select dithered pattern for hardcopy
Select hardcopy image width
ESC ETB
ESC K H *
ESC Q E *
ESC Q R *
ESC Q M *
ESC Q F *
HCMONOCHROME *
HCRESERVE *
HCDITHER *
HCFORMWIDTH *
E-10

Select port hardcopy quantity
Select response to full page
Set image orientation of hardcopy
Specify colour resolution of data
Specify density of hardcopy
Specify hardcopy repaint number
Specify printer type
Specify size of colour hardcopy
ESC Q N *
ESC K P *
ESC A U *
ESC Q O *
ESC Q B *
ESC Q U *
ESC Q T *
ESC Q D *
ESC Q A *
HCORIENT *
HCDATARES *
HCDENSITY *
HCREPAINT *
HCINTERFACE *
HCSIZE *
PIXEL COMMANDS
HOST
PRIMARY SETUP
Begin pixel operations

Copy pixels from current to specified surf.
Read pixel file from disk
Redisplay saved pixel data
Save pixel bit plane memory to main mem.
Set pixel beam position
Set pixel viewport size
Specify raster memory colour indices
Write pixel file to disk
ESC R U *
ESC R X *
ESC A P *
ESC U K *
ESC U J *
ESC R H *
ESC R S *
ESC R L *
ESC A O *
PXBEGIN *
PXCOPY *
PROGRAMMED STRINGS
HOST
HCCOPIES *
PAGEFULL *
PIXRESTORE *
PIXSAVE *
PXPOSITION *
PXVIEWPORT *
PXRUNLENGTHWRITE *
PRIMARY SETUP
Define key programmed string (volatile)

Define key programmed string (non-vol)
Define programmed string (volatile)
Define programmed string (non-vol)
Display programmed string
Enable programmed key strings
Select key string local/host character
Transmit programmed string
ESC K W *
ESC K Y *
ESC K X *
LEARN
NVLEARN
DEFINE *
NVDEFINE *
MACROSTATUS *
KEYEXPAND *
KEYEXCHAR *
EXPAND *
REPORTS
HOST
PRIMARY SETUP
Assign report intro/termination chars.

Enable TeemTalk status byte
Select bypass mode cancellation character
Send 4010 status report
Send colour hardcopy status report
Send device status report
Send error report
Send GIN position report
Send port status report
Send segment status report
Send emulation mode report
Send emulation settings report
Set report maximum line length
Specify version number
Specify XY coords & integer report format
ESC I S *
ESC I T *
ESC N U *
ESC ENQ
ESC Q Q
ESC J Q *
ESC K Q
ESC I P *
ESC P Q *
ESC S Q *
ESC # ! 0
ESC I Q *
ESC I L *
RSIGCHARS *
TBSTATUS *
BYPASSCANCEL *
ESC K D *
ESC K O *
ESC U X *
HCREPORT
SETTINGS *
RLINELENGTH *
TERMINAL *
COORDINATEMODE *
E-11

SEGMENTS
HOST
PRIMARY SETUP
Add primitives to segment

Assign pick ID nos. to graphics primitives
Assign segment to class
Call segment as subroutine
Copy segment into current segment def.
Delete pick groups from segment
Delete segment
Delete segment part
Enable segment visibility
End definition of segment
End segment & start higher segment def.
End segment & start lower segment def.
End segment & start new segment
Renumber segment
Select segment detectability for GIN pick
Select segment magnification or rotation
Select segment drawing mode
Select segment edit mode
Select segment flashing
Set segment display & GIN pick priority
Specify operation classes
Specify pivot point
Specify segment mag. rotation & position
Specify segment position
Start definition of segment
ESC U I *
ESC M I *
ESC S A *
ESC S F *
ESC L K *
ESC U E *
ESC S K *
ESC U D *
ESC S V *
ESC S C
ESC S N
ESC S B
ESC S E *
ESC S R *
ESC S D *
ESC S J *
ESC S M *
ESC U H *
ESC S H *
ESC S S *
ESC S L *
ESC S P *
ESC S I *
ESC S X *
ESC S O *
SGINSERT *
SGPICKID *
SGCLASS *
SGCALL *
SGINCLUDE *
SGREPLACE *
SGDELETE *
SGREMOVE *
SGVISIBILITY *
SGCLOSE
SGUP
SGDOWN
SGNEW *
SGRENAME *
SGDETECT *
SGSCALE *
SGMODE *
SGEDIT *
SGHIGHLIGHT *
SGPRIORITY *
SGMATCHINGCLASS *
SGPIVOT *
SGTRANSFORM *
SGPOSITION *
SGOPEN *
VIEWS, VIEWPORTS & WINDOWS
HOST
PRIMARY SETUP
Delete specified view

Erase view & redraw visible segments
Select current view
Select overview full/part window size
Select screen update level
Select viewport border visibility
Specify current view window boundary
Specify viewport position
Specify views in view group
ESC R K *
ESC K N *
ESC R C *
ESC U W *
ESC R F *
ESC R E *
ESC R W *
ESC R V *
ESC R Q *
VDELETE *
RENEW *
VSELECT *
OWINDOW *
FIXUP *
BORDER *
WINDOW *
VIEWPORT *
VCLUSTER *
E-12
W3220 Mode
GENERAL OPERATION
HOST
Disable local echo

Enable local echo
Select bypass mode
Transfer data between aux & host ports
Transfer data from aux to host port
ESC N
ESC M
ESC CAN
ESC X
ESC L
GIN MODE
HOST
Define polygon & enable polygon dragging

Enable line dragging
Request cursor position report
Select GIN cursor position
Terminate dragging
ESC | R D * ESC | R E
ESC | R A
ESC ENQ
ESC | R @
ESC | R F
GRAPHICS TEXT
HOST
Move graphics text cursor down

Move graphics text cursor left
Move graphics text cursor right
Move graphics text cursor up
Select graphics text size - 128 cols, 52 lines, 8x15
Select orientation of graphics text (@ = Normal,
A = Upwards, B = Backwards, C = Downwards)
Text magnification level (@ = 1, A = 2, B = 3)
LF
BS
HT
VT
ESC 8
ESC 9
ESC =
ESC :
ESC ;
ESC <
ESC >
ESC | O *
ESC | E *
MODE SELECTION
HOST
Deselect GIN & enter graphics text mode

Deselect GIN & enter graphics text mode
Deselect point plot & enter graphics text mode
Deselect vector mode & enter graphics text
Select alpha mode
Select alpha mode & erase alpha memory
Select GIN mode
Select graphics text & erase graphics memory
Select graphics text mode
Select point plot mode
CR
ESC FF
CR
ESC FF
US
CR
ESC FF
US
ESC 2
ESC EOT
ESC SUB
ESC FF
ESC 1
FS
PRIMARY SETUP
PRIMARY SETUP
PRIMARY SETUP
PRIMARY SETUP
E-13

5 = VT100N, 6 = VT220N, 7 = VT220M7,
8 = VT220M8)
ESC % ! *
CODE *
POINT PLOT MODE
HOST
PRIMARY SETUP
Select marker type
ESC | M *
SURFACES & COLOURS
HOST
Assign colour to overlay/alternate set index

Assign colour to overlay/principal set index
Assign colour to overlay/principal/alt. set index
Overwrite alternative colour index set
Protect surfaces
Select colour set & surface visibility
Select combined surface & writing colour index
Select overlaid surface & display priority
Select overlaid surface & writing surface
ESC ] F *
ESC ] M *
ESC ] L *
ESC ] N *
ESC ] W *
ESC ] D *
ESC ] C *
ESC ] P *
ESC ] O *
VECTOR MODE
HOST
Activate area fill

Define fill pattern
Define line style
Define line style
Deselect block fill
Deselect write-through & selective erase
Enable selective erase
Enable write-through mode
Generate arc or circle
Select block fill
Select fill pattern
Select line thickness
Select vector mode
Specify line style (* = a through w and `)
ESC | F *
ESC | P *
ESC | L *
ESC ACK
ESC ETX
ESC SOH
ESC DLE
ESC NAK
ESC | A Q
ESC STX
ESC | P *
ESC | K *
GS
ESC *
E-14
PRIMARY SETUP
PRIMARY SETUP
TeemTalk Additional Commands

MOUSE REPORTING IN ALPHANUMERIC APPLICATIONS
Arm TeemTalk for mouse operation
where *arg is of the format: bit 7 - 3
bit 2
bit 1
bit 0
ESC [ = *arg g
00110
when set enables motion events
when set enables button release events
when set enables button press events
If all bits are cleared then any outstanding arming request is cancelled. The mouse remains
armed until cancelled. When any of the selected events occur, the following report format is
sent to the host:
ESC [ = <Event Type> ; <Button Status> ; <Column> ; <Row> r
Where: <Event Type> is the event(s) that caused the report in the same
format as the arming sequence.
<Button Status> is of the format: 00110LMR
where LMR indicates which button caused the event.
<Column> and <Row> are the alphanumeric position of the mouse.
MOUSE CURSOR
Mouse cursor style (see table in Initialization Commands)
ESC [ = 2 ; * p
DISPLAY
Number of screen lines (window resizes accordingly)
ESC [ = 1 ; * p
SCRIPT FILE
Initiate script file (filename can include options)
ESC P 2 z filename ESC \
LOG HOST FILE

Log host file (*f = 0 create new file, 1 append file,
*n = filename, *d = host data to write to file)
ESC P *f z *n ; *d ESC \
REPORTS
Report application name & version (in DEC VT modes)
Example report format: tt07w - 3.2.1
ESC [ 0 ; 1234 c
E-15
Notes
E-16
Index
Index
Symbols
80/132 Column Display
Character Sets D-1

Additional (DEC) D-4
Additional (Tek) D-8
ASCII D-3
Control characters D-1
Line Drawing D-7
National (Tek Alpha) D-6
National (VT220 Alpha) D-5
National characters (DEC) D-5
National characters (Tek) D-6
7-36
A
Answerback String
7-34
ASCII File Transfer
8-2
AT Keyboard Mapping
DEC VT220 mode 3-2
Tek, VT100 & Edit mode
Auto Wrap
3-3
Colour Selection
Text attributes
7-35
B
Baud Rate Selection
7-27
Block Mode
Cursor positioning
4-4
Button Tools
Adding buttons 5-5
Assigning functions 5-6
Floating button palette 5-1
Predefined functions 5-2
Redefining 5-5
Removing buttons 5-8
C
Cancel Button
Capturing Files
Carrier Detect
2-17
7-13
7-28
Character Set Mode
Colour Attributes
7-26
7-40
7-40
Command Line Options

Alpha off during redraw 11-23
Bold font in full screen
workspace 11-22
Connection template to use 11-14
Crosshair cursor size 11-23
Default font size 11-21
Disable bell 11-16
Disable close window menu
item 11-18
Disable 'closed connection' box
11-11
Disable control menu 11-18
Disable copyright message 11-17
Disable 'Exit TeemTalk' box 11-11
Disable graphics show-thru 11-24
Disable maximize button 11-18
Disable menu bar 11-20
Disable min/max buttons 11-18
Disable minimize button 11-18
Index-1
Index
Disable mouse editing 11-25
Disable remote printing 11-28
Disable scroll bar 11-20
Disable status bar 11-21
Disable system menu 11-18
Disable title bar 11-19
Disable toolbar 11-20
Disable window frame 11-19
Flashing for all sessions 11-22
Format 11-5
FTP include subdirectories 10-14
FTP progress bar 10-14
FTP time out 10-14
Hide script parameters 11-15
LK450 keyboard 11-25
Mouse cursor style 11-25
Network host name 11-8
Network input queue size 11-10
Network protocol 11-8
New session warning message 11-11
Number of segments 11-24
Preload Winsock DLL for PPP
usage 11-9
Print data to file 11-28
Private profile file to use 11-14
Return script values in
uppercase 11-15
Run script file 11-15
Segment memory size 11-24
Soft buttons displayed 11-21
Summary 11-6
Support multiple surfaces 11-23
Text redraw delay 11-23
TSR identifier 11-10
Use Windows default printer 11-27
Window fills screen 11-17
Window maximized 11-17
Window minimized 11-17
Window subtitle 11-21
Window title 11-20
ZMODEM startup 11-15
Composing Characters
Connection Template
Creating 2-6, 7-5
Selecting 2-7, 7-7
Index-2
3-16
Control Characters D-1

Displaying 7-26
Keyboard equivalents
D-2
Copy & Paste

Disabling 4-3
Edit menu options 7-21
Using keyboard 4-3
Using mouse 4-1, 4-3
Cursor
Block or underline 7-36
Gin 2-23
Origin mode 7-36
Positioning in block mode
Selection 2-22
Text 2-22
Cursor Keys
4-4
3-9
D
DDE Support
7-21, 13-1
Default Setup Settings

DefView Button
DErase Button
7-4, 7-8
2-18
2-17
Detect Carrier 7-28

Dialog Area
80/132 column width 7-36
Auto wrap 7-35
Buffer size 7-37
Cursor origin mode 7-36
Cursor style 7-36
Description 2-21
Enable 7-37
Erasing contents of 2-17
Lines visible 7-37
Lock colour indices 7-35
Scrolling speed 7-35
Visibility 2-17, 7-36
Dialog Settings
7-35
Display
Control codes 7-26
Euro sign 3-15, 7-49
Hotspots 6-1
Resize effect on font 7-36
Index
Scroll bar on maximized 7-32
Text attributes 7-40
Window size in rows 7-36
DVisib Button
2-17
13-1
Floating Button Palette 5-1

Adding buttons 5-5
Redefining buttons 5-5
Using 5-1
Flow Control
7-27
Edit Menu 7-21
Fonts
Effect of window resize
Edit Mode
Selecting
FTF File Transfer

2-9
Editing Text
7-21
Emulation Settings
7-25
Emulation Workspace
2-21
Enhanced AT Keyboard Mapping

DEC VT220 mode 3-4
Tek, VT100 & Edit mode 3-5
Environment Variables
Settings files 2-7, 7-6
Error Messages
Script file 12-67
Euro Sign
3-15, 7-49
F
Factory Default Setup
File Capture/Replay
File Menu
7-4
7-13
7-8
File Transfer
FTP 10-1
ICL FTF 9-1
File Transfer Utility
ASCII parameters 8-12
General parameters 8-8
Kermit parameters 8-10
Kermit remote operations 8-17
Local operation 8-19
Protocol parameters 8-8
Receiving files 8-5
Sending files 8-3
ZModem parameters 8-14
Fill Patterns
2-18
7-36
9-1
FTP File Transfer 10-1

Progess bar display 10-14
Synchronous WINSOCK calls 10-13
G
GErase Button
2-17
Getting Started
Host communications 2-3
Keyboard operation 3-1
Loading TeemTalk 2-1
Mouse functions 4-1
Quitting TeemTalk 2-1
Setup configuration 2-11
Terminal emulation selection 2-9
Toolbar functions 5-1
Using window elements 2-12
Gin Cursor
2-23
Gin Settings 7-38

Map mouse to joystick 7-39
Serial port device 7-38
Tablet characters 7-39
Tablet type 7-38
Graphics Area
Description 2-21
Erasing contents of
2-17
H
Help Menu
7-58

ANSI VT100 mode E-3
TeemTalk additional commands
E-15
Index-3
Index
Tek mode E-7
VT220 mode E-6
VT52 mode E-1
W3220 mode E-13
Host Communications
Bypass cancel character 7-33
End of message characters 7-34
End of message frequency 7-34
Getting started 2-3
NCSI settings menu 7-29
Report max. line length 7-33
RS232 overrun errors A-3
Serial settings menu 7-27
Host Connection
LED indicators
2-19
Hotspots
Defining 6-2
Displaying all 6-1
Using 6-1
I
IBM 3270 Mode
Telnet options 7-19
9-1
Iconizing TeemTalk 2-13

Introduction 11-1
Initialization File
Private profile file
Windows 3.1x 11-2
Windows 95 & NT 11-3
WIN.INI (Windows 3.1x) 11-1
Initialization File Commands
Alpha off during redraw 11-23
Bold font in full screen
workspace 11-22
Crosshair cursor size 11-23
Default font size 11-21
Default TeemTalk printer 11-27
Disable bell 11-16
Disable close window menu
item 11-18
Index-4
Disable 'closed connection' box

11-11
Disable control menu 11-18
Disable copyright message 11-17
Disable 'Exit TeemTalk' box 11-11
Disable graphics show-thru 11-24
Disable maximize button 11-18
Disable menu bar 11-20
Disable menu items 11-19
Disable min/max buttons 11-18
Disable minimize button 11-18
Disable mouse editing 11-25
Disable scroll bar 11-20
Disable status bar 11-21
Disable system menu 11-18
Disable title bar 11-19
Disable toolbar 11-20
Disable window frame 11-19
Flashing for all sessions 11-22
Hide script parameters 11-15
LK450 keyboard 11-25
Mouse cursor style 11-25
NetBIOS version 11-9
Network host name 11-8
Network input queue size 11-10
Network protocol 11-8
New session warning message 11-11
Number of segments 11-24
Path for .nv file 11-14
Path for .wsp file 11-14
Preload Winsock DLL for PPP
usage 11-9
Print data to file 11-28
Print manager 11-27
Return script values in
uppercase 11-15
Run script file 11-15
Segment memory size 11-24
Soft buttons displayed 11-21
Startup command group to
action 11-13
Support multiple surfaces 11-23
Suppress telnet echo option 11-12
Telnet binary options 11-12
Telnet break settings 11-12
Index
Telnet EOR options 11-12
Text redraw delay 11-23
Window fills screen 11-17
Window maximized 11-17
Window minimized 11-17
Window subtitle 11-21
Window title 11-20
ZMODEM startup 11-15
Insert Mode Indicator
2-19
Operation 3-1
PowerStation mapping 3-1
Using LK450 11-25
Virtual key names B-1
Keywords 4-4
L
LK250/450 Keyboard Mapping
DEC VT220 mode 3-6
Loading TeemTalk
2-1
Local Echo
Kermit 8-1
Local/On Line Button
2-19
Key Mapping
Changing 3-10, 7-44
Displaying 3-10, 7-44
Local/On Line Setting
7-28
Key Programming
Macros menu 3-10, 7-44
Macros
Keyboard
AT mapping
DEC VT220 mode 3-2
Changing key functions 3-10
Composing characters 3-16
Cursor key mode 7-32
Cursor keys 3-9
Defining keys 3-10, 7-44
Enhanced AT mapping
DEC VT220 mode 3-4
Entering control characters D-2
Key reference numbers C-2
Keypad mode 7-32
LK250 mapping 3-1
LK250/450 mapping
DEC VT220 mode 3-6
LK450 mapping 3-1
Macros 3-10, 7-44
Mapping (changing) 3-10, 7-44
Mapping (showing) 3-10, 7-44
Nationality 3-9, 7-31
7-28
M
3-10, 7-44
Menu Bar 2-13

Disable 11-20
Menu Items
Disable 11-19
Minimize & Maximize Buttons
2-13
Mouse
Button actions 7-54
Button ref. numbers C-5
Button tools 7-56
Map to cursor keys/joystick 7-39
Mouse Functions
Action hotspots 4-4
Default 4-1
Move cursor 4-4
Select rectangle 4-3
Selecting text for copy
Send keyword 4-4
Show hotspots 4-4
4-3
Multinational Character Set 7-26
N
Network
NetBIOS version
11-9
Index-5
Index
New Connection dialog box
Telnet options 7-19
7-9
R
RDPXY
New Connection Dialog Box 7-9
RDT
12-57
RDTXY
12-57
Reference Numbers
Keyboard keys C-2
Mouse buttons C-5
On Line/Local Button 2-19

On Line/Local Setting
12-57
7-28
Overstrike Mode Indicator 2-19
Replay File
7-14
Report
Maximum line length
Reset Terminal
Parity Selection 7-27

Patterns Button
7-9
Resizing the Window

Menu bar << & >> 2-14
Window border & corners
2-18
Pause/Resume Button
2-19
Predefined Fill Patterns 2-18
Resume/Pause Button
Primary Setup
Description 2-11
RstView Button
Save Session
Print Manager 7-15

Printer Setup 7-14
Default TeemTalk printer 11-27
Font settings 7-15
Print manager 11-27
Send print data to file 11-28
Private Profile File
Windows 3.1x 11-2
Q
Quitting TeemTalk 2-1
Index-6
2-18
7-5, 7-12
Saving A Connection Template
2-19
PSET & PGET Script Settings
2-20
2-19
Print
Auto 7-17
Buffer 7-17
Cancel 7-17
Screen 7-15
Print Button
7-33
12-73
Script Commands
BREAK 12-23
BRF 12-23
BRT 12-23
CAPTURE 12-23
CLB 12-23
CLIPBD APPEND 12-23
CLIPBD EMPTY 12-24
CLIPBD READ 12-24
CLIPBD WRITE 12-24
CLR 12-24
CLS 12-24
CONV 12-24
DDE CANCEL 12-25
DDE EXECUTE 12-25
DDE INITIATE 12-25
DDE POKE 12-26
DDE REQUEST 12-27
DEC 12-27
DECRYPT 12-27
DIALOGUE 12-28
2-6
Index
DIRFIRST 12-28
DIRNEXT 12-29
DSP 12-30
ELSE 12-30
ENCRYPT 12-31
ERRORCODE 12-31
ERRORLINE 12-31
EXIT 12-31
FACT 12-31
FILE CLOSE 12-32
FILE COPY 12-32
FILE DELETE 12-32
FILE OPEN 12-32
FILE READ 12-33
FILE RENAME 12-33
FILE RGET 12-34
FILE SEEK 12-34
FILE STAT 12-34
FILE WPUT 12-35
FILE WRITE 12-35
FSTR 12-36
FTP CD 12-36
FTP CONNECT 12-37
FTP COPYDLG 12-37
FTP DIRFIRST 12-38
FTP DIRNEXT 12-39
FTP DISCONNECT 12-39
FTP GET 12-40
FTP PUT 12-40
FTP RM 12-41
FTP SET 12-41
FTP TOOL 12-41
FTP WD 12-41
FTU CANCEL 12-41
FTU GET 12-41
FTU INITIATE 12-42
FTU SET 12-42
FTU START 12-44
GETINI 12-44
GOSUB 12-45
GOTO 12-45
HCMP 12-45
HGET 12-46
HRCV 12-46
IF 12-47
INC 12-47
INP 12-47
KACT 12-48
KBD 12-48
KGET 12-48
KINTERCEPT 12-49
KPRESS 12-49
KRAW 12-49
KRCV 12-49
KSTR 12-50
LAUNCH 12-50
LEN 12-50
LET 12-50
LOW 12-51
LSTR 12-51
MSGBOX 12-51
MSTR 12-52
ONERROR 12-53
PACK 12-53
PACKTAB 12-53
PARSE 12-54
PASSWORD 12-54
PGET 12-55
PSET 12-55
PUT 12-56
QUIT 12-56
RAND 12-56
REPLAY 12-57
RETURN 12-58
RST 12-58
RSTR 12-58
SAVESET 12-58
SEED 12-58
SETINI 12-59
SUBTITLE 12-59
SWITCH 12-60
SYSERR 12-60
TCMP 12-61
TITLE 12-61
TOOLBAR ADD 12-61
TOOLBAR DEL 12-63
TOOLBAR FIX 12-63
TOOLBAR FLOAT 12-63
TOOLBAR HIDE 12-63
TOOLBAR INS 12-63
UPP 12-64
VAR 12-64
Index-7
Index
WAIT 12-65
WHILE 12-65
WRT 12-66
Script File
Arithmetic operators 12-14
Command descriptions 12-23
Command summary 12-19
Creating 12-1
Error numbers 12-65, 12-67
Examples 12-4
Initiating using
Command line option 12-2
Escape sequence 12-3
File menu option 12-2
Initialization file command 12-1
Key or button definition 12-2
PPF file command 12-1
Numeric operators 12-14
PSET & PGET settings 12-73
Random number generator
12-56, 12-58
String operators 12-16
Syntax conventions 12-12
Scroll Arrows 2-16
Scroll Bar 2-16
Disable 11-20
Scroll Box
2-16
Scrolling Speed
7-35
Segments
Maximum in memory
Memory size 11-24
11-24
Selection Cursor 2-22

Session
Opening new 7-11
Save 7-12
Save as 7-12
Settings Files
Locating on client 2-7, 7-6
Settings Menu
Setup Button
7-24
2-17
Setup Menus
Attributes 7-40
Button Tools 7-56
Index-8
Closing 2-14, 7-2

Default settings 7-4
Dialog settings 7-35
Displaying 7-1
Edit Menu 7-21
Emulation settings 7-25
File menu 7-8
Gin settings 7-38
Help menu 7-58
Keyboard Macros 3-10, 7-44
Menu descriptions 7-8
Mouse Button Actions 7-54
NCSI settings 7-29
New Connection 7-9
Open Session 7-11
Option selection 7-2
Save Session As 7-12
Saving settings 7-5
Serial settings 7-27
Settings menu 7-24
Soft Buttons 7-50
Startup options 7-13
Terminal settings 7-31
Soft Buttons 2-16
Cancel function 2-17
DefView function 2-18
DErase function 2-17
Disable 11-21
Display 11-21
DVisib function 2-17
GErase function 2-17
Patterns function 2-18
Print function 2-19
RstView function 2-18
Settings menu 7-50
Setup function 2-17
ViewDn function 2-18
ViewUp function 2-18
Zoom function 2-17
Startup Options
7-13
Status Bar
Description 2-19
Disable 11-21
Index
T
Tek Mode
Host command summary
Selecting 2-9
Telnet
Initialization commands
Telnet Options
VT100 Mode
Selecting 2-9
E-7
11-12
7-19
Terminal Emulation
Selecting 2-9, 7-25
Terminal ID Setting
Terminal Reset
7-9
Terminal Settings
Text Cursor
VT52 Mode
Selecting 2-9
E-6
E-1
7-26
Terminal Server
Settings files on clients
VT220 Mode
Selecting 2-9
E-3
2-7, 7-6
7-31
2-22
W3220 Mode
Selecting 2-9
E-13
WIN.INI Commands
Summary 11-6
Title Bar 2-12

Disable 11-19
WIN.INI File 11-1

Command groups 11-2
Toolbar
Adding buttons 5-5
Disable 11-20
Floating button palette 5-1
Predefined button tools 5-2
Redefining 5-5
Using 5-1
Window element 2-15
Window Elements
<< and >> 2-14
Border & corners 2-20
Emulation workspace 2-21
Gin cursor 2-23
Hotspots 4-4
Menu bar 2-13
Minimize & maximize buttons
Scroll arrow 2-16
Scroll bar 2-16
Scroll box 2-16
Selecting & using 2-12
Selection cursor 2-22
Soft Buttons 2-16
Status bar 2-19
Text cursor 2-22
Title bar 2-12
Toolbar 2-15
Troubleshooting
Display problems A-2, A-3
Incompatibility message A-1
RS232 communications A-3
Setup problems A-1
V
ViewDn Button
2-18
ViewUp Button
2-18
Virtual Key Names B-1

Standard B-1
Tek mode B-2
VT220 mode B-2
2-13
Window Frame
Disable 11-19
Window Resize
2-14
Index-9
Index
X
XMODEM
8-1
XMODEM-1K 8-1
Y
YMODEM Batch
8-2
Z
ZMODEM
8-2
Zoom Button 2-17
Index-10

Team Talk

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Team Talk

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Team Talk

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TeemTalk

-05W, -07W & -11W

Software Version 4.3.1

Part number: TT6TM-4.3.1

TeemTalk 1988-2003 Neoware UK Ltd, All Rights Reserved.

The material in this user's guide is for information purposes only

1988-2003 Neoware UK Ltd, All Rights Reserved.

Getting Started.................................................. 2-1

Selecting The Terminal Emulation ................................................ 2-9

Keyboard Configuration ................................... 3-1

Compose Character Sequences ................................................... 3-16

Mouse Functions .............................................. 4-1

The Toolbar ........................................................ 5-1

The Predefined Button Tools ......................................................... 5-2

Hotspots ............................................................ 6-1

Setup Menus ..................................................... 7-1

Menu Descriptions ........................................................................ 7-8

File Transfer ....................................................... 8-1

Kermit Remote Operations .......................................................... 8-17

ICL FTF File Transfer ........................................ 9-1

FTP File Transfer ............................................. 10-1

FTP Initialization File Entries .................................................. 10-13

FTP Command Line Options .................................................... 10-14

Initialization Commands ................................ 11-1

Command Line Option Format ................................................... 11-5

Creating A Script File ..................................... 12-1

Dynamic Data Exchange ................................ 13-1

File Transfer ................................................................................ 13-6

Troubleshooting ................................................ A-1

Key Reference Numbers .................................. C-1

About This User's Guide

ICL FTF File Transfer

Chapter 10: FTP File Transfer

Terms & Conventions

Double-click the TT05W, TT07W or TT11W icon.

Quitting using the File menu:

Press Alt + F to display the File menu, then press X to exit.

Quitting using the Control menu:

If the window is displayed, press Alt + Spacebar to display the

Note: If you do not wish to make a host connection at this moment,

Making A Serial Host Connection

Making A Network Host Connection

TeemTalk for Windows 3.1x:

Note: Refer to the Network Connection chapter in the Networking

Creating A Connection Template

Using Environment Variables To Locate

Selecting A Connection Template

Selecting The Terminal Emulation

Tablet & Mouse Configuration

Calcomp (16 button)

Primary Setup Mode

The TeemTalk Display

The Title Bar

The Minimize & Maximize Buttons

The Menu Bar

Click the title of the menu required.

Click anywhere outside the menu.

Press the Alt key.

Resizing The Window

Click the pointer over the << or >> commands.